Contents

BMW X1 xDrive28i X1 Series 2013 Owner's Manual PDF

1 of 299
1 of 299

Summary of Content for BMW X1 xDrive28i X1 Series 2013 Owner's Manual PDF

Owner's Manual for Vehicle

The Ultimate Driving Machine

THE BMW X1. OWNER'S MANUAL.

Contents A-Z

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

X1 Owner's Manual for Vehicle Thank you for choosing a BMW. The more familiar you are with your vehicle, the better control you will have on the road. We therefore strongly suggest: Read this Owner's Manual before starting off in your new BMW. It contains important information on vehicle operation that will help you make full use of the technical features available in your BMW. The manual also contains information designed to en hance operating reliability and road safety, and to contribute to maintaining the value of your BMW. Supplementary information can be found in the additional bro chures in the onboard literature. We wish you a safe and enjoyable drive. BMW AG

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

2013 Bayerische Motoren Werke Aktiengesellschaft Munich, Germany Reprinting, including excerpts, only with the written consent of BMW AG, Munich. US English XI/13, 07 13 500 Printed on environmentally friendly paper, bleached without chlorine, suitable for recycling.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

Addendum

ADDENDUM TO BMW X1 OWNERS MANUAL 1402926013

We wanted to provide you with some updates and clarifications with respect to the printed BMW Owners Manual. These updates and clarifications will supersede the materials contained in that document.

1. Where the terms service center, the service center, your service center, service specialist, or service are used in the Owners Manual, we wanted to clarify that the terms refer to a BMW dealers service center or another service center or repair shop that employs trained personnel that can perform maintenance and repair work on your vehicle in accordance with BMW specifications.

2. Where the text of the Owners Manual contains an affirmative instruction to contact a service center or your service center, we wanted to clarify that BMW recommends that, if you are faced with one of the situations addressed by that text, you contact or seek the assistance of a BMW dealers service center or another service center or repair shop that employs trained personnel that can perform maintenance and repair work on your vehicle in accordance with BMW specifications.

While BMW of North America LLC, at no cost to you, will pay for repairs required by the limited warranties provided with respect to your

vehicle and for maintenance under the Maintenance Program during the applicable warranty and maintenance coverage periods, you are free to elect, both during those periods and thereafter, to have maintenance and repair work provided by other service centers or repair shops.

3. Where the Owners Manual makes reference to parts and accessories having been approved by BMW, those references are intended to reflect that those parts and accessories are recommended by BMW of North America LLC. You may elect to use other parts and accessories, but, if you do, we recommend that you make sure that any such parts and/or accessories are appropriate for use on your vehicle.

4. At page 6 and page 7, under the warranty sections discussion of homologation, where it states that you cannot lodge warranty claims for your vehicle there, the text should read that you may not be able to lodge warranty claims for your vehicle there.

5. At page 7, under the Parts and Accessories section, in the sixth sentence, the word cannot should read does not.

6. At page 47, in the Checking and replacing safety belts section, the

Addendum

text beginning, Have the work performed only by your service center . . . should be disregarded and the following text should be read in lieu thereof: BMW recommends having this work performed by a service center as it is important that this safety feature functions properly.

7. At page 131 under the heading: Objects in the area around the pedals and at page 265 under the heading: Carpets and floor mats, the paragraph that begins: Only use floor mats . . . should be disregarded and the following language should be read in lieu thereof: The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends that you use floor mats that have been identified by it as appropriate for use in your vehicle and that can be properly fixed in place.

8. At page 138, under the heading: Have maintenance carried out, the sentence beginning, Have the maintenance carried out . . . should be disregarded and the following text should be read in lieu thereof: BMW recommends that you have the maintenance carried out by your service center.

9. At page 196, under Telephone, the heading that reads Approved mobile phones should read Compatible mobile phones.

10. At page 224 and page 225, under the heading Apps and subheading Requirements, the section that begins, Use only . . . , should be

disregarded and the following text should be read in lieu thereof: The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends the use of BMW recommended software; otherwise there may be malfunctions in system operations.

11. At page 239, under the heading: Approved wheels and tires, the term Approved should be disregarded and in lieu thereof, the term Recommended should be read in its place. In addition, the text of that section should be disregarded and the following text should be read in lieu thereof:

The manufacturer of your vehicle strongly suggests that you use wheels and tires that have been recommended by the vehicle manufacturer for your vehicle type; otherwise, for example, despite having the same official size ratings, variations can lead to body contact and with it, the risk of severe accidents.

The manufacturer of your vehicle does not evaluate non- recommended wheels and tires to determine if they are suitable for use on your vehicle.

12. At page 241, under the heading: Snow Chains, the text should be disregarded and the following text should be read in lieu thereof:

Only certain types of fine-link snow chains have been tested by the manufacturer of your vehicle and are determined by the manufacturer

Addendum

of your vehicle to be road safe and are recommended by the manufacturer of your vehicle.

Information about recommended snow chains is available from a service center.

13. At page 242, under the heading Hood, the sentence beginning, If you are unfamiliar should be disregarded.

14. At page 245, under the heading: Approved oil types, the references to Approved should be read as Suitable. Immediately preceding the Gasoline engine chart, the following sentence should be inserted: Add engine oils that meet the following oil rating standards: . . . The reference to BMW High Performance SAE 5W- 30 should be disregarded.

15. At page 245, under the heading: Alternative oil types, the text preceding the chart should be disregarded, and in lieu thereof should be read as follows: If an engine oil suitable for continuous use is not available, up to 1 US quart/liter of an engine oil with the following oil rating can be added: . . . The reference to specification should be read as rating.

16. At page 246, under the heading: Engine oil change, the text should be disregarded and in lieu thereof should be read as follows:

BMW recommends that you have the oil changed at your BMW dealers service center or at another service center that has trained personnel that can perform the work in accordance with BMW specifications

17. At page 247 and page 248, under the heading: Service and Warranty Information Booklet for US models and Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models, the second paragraph should be disregarded and the following text read in lieu thereof:

The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends that you have maintenance and repair performed by your BMW dealers service center or another service center or repair shop that employs trained personnel that can perform maintenance and repair work on your vehicle in accordance with BMW specifications. The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends that you maintain records of all maintenance and repair work performed on your vehicle.

18. At page 250 and page 252, where it reads: Do not perform work/bulb replacement on xenon headlamps, that text should be disregarded and in lieu thereof the following text should be read: Xenon headlamp work or replacement can cause serious and fatal injuries. In the text that follows, where it reads: [h]ave any work on the xenon lighting system . . . , the following

Addendum

words should be read as preceding that passage: It is strongly suggested that you . . . .

19. At page 255, under the Battery replacement section, the text should be disregarded and in lieu thereof the following text should be read:

Use of recommended vehicle batteries

The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends that you use vehicle batteries that it has tested and recommends for use in your vehicle; otherwise the vehicle could be damaged and systems or functions may not be fully available.

After a battery replacement, the manufacturer of your vehicle recommends that you have the battery registered on your vehicle by a service center to ensure that all comfort functions are fully available, and that any check control messages of these comfort functions are no longer displayed.

Contents The fastest way to find information on a partic ular topic or item is by using the index, refer to page 280.

6 Notes

At a glance 12 Cockpit 18 iDrive 25 Voice activation system

Controls 30 Opening and closing 44 Adjusting 52 Transporting children safely 57 Driving 71 Displays 83 Lamps 88 Safety 97 Driving stability control systems 101 Driving comfort 108 Climate 113 Interior equipment 123 Storage compartments

Driving tips 130 Things to remember when driving 134 Loading 137 Saving fuel

Navigation 142 Navigation system 144 Destination entry 153 Destination guidance 161 What to do if...

Entertainment 164 Tone 166 Radio 174 CD/multimedia

Communication 196 Telephone 209 Office 218 Contacts 221 ConnectedDrive

Mobility 228 Refueling 230 Fuel 232 Wheels and tires 242 Engine compartment 247 Maintenance 249 Replacing components 257 Breakdown assistance 263 Care

Reference 270 Technical data 272 Short commands for voice activation

system 280 Everything from A to Z

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

Notes Using this Owner's Manual The fastest way to find information on a partic ular topic is by using the index. An initial overview of the vehicle is provided in the first chapter.

Additional sources of information Should you have any questions, your service center will be glad to advise you at any time. Information on BMW, e.g., on technology, is available on the Internet: bmwusa.com

Symbols Indicates precautions that must be followed

precisely in order to avoid the possibility of personal injury and serious damage to the ve hicle. Marks the end of a specific item of informa tion. "..." Identifies Control Display texts used to se lect individual functions. ... Verbal instructions to use with the voice ac tivation system. ... Identifies the answers generated by the voice activation system.

Refers to measures that can be taken to help protect the environment.

Symbols on vehicle components Indicates that you should consult the rele

vant section of this Owner's Manual for infor mation on a particular part or assembly.

Vehicle equipment This Owner's Manual describes all models, all series equipment, as well as country-specific and special equipment offered in the model

series.Therefore, this Owner's Manual also de scribes and depicts equipment that may not be contained in your vehicle because of the se lected special equipment or country version, for example. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. For options and equipment not described in this Owner's Manual, please refer to the Sup plementary Owner's Manuals. On right-hand drive vehicles, some controls are arranged differently than shown in the illus trations.

Status of this Owner's Manual at time of printing The manufacturer of your vehicle pursues a policy of constant development that is con ceived to ensure that our vehicles continue to embody the highest quality and safety stan dards. In rare cases, therefore, the features de scribed in this Owner's Manual may differ from those in your vehicle.

Updates made after the editorial deadline Any updates made after the editorial deadline for the Owner's Manuals are located in the ap pendix of the printed quick reference for the vehicle.

For your own safety Warranty Your vehicle is technically configured for the operating conditions and registration require ments applying in the country of first delivery homologation. If your vehicle is to be oper ated in a different country it might be neces

Seite 6

Notes

6 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

sary to adapt your vehicle to potentially differ ing operating conditions and permit requirements. If your vehicle does not comply with the homologation requirements in a cer tain country you cannot lodge warranty claims for your vehicle there. Further information can be obtained from your Service Centre.

Maintenance and repairs Advanced technology, e.g., the use of modern materials and high-performance electronics, requires suitable maintenance and repair methods. Therefore, have this work performed only by a BMW center or a workshop that works accord ing to BMW repair procedures with appropri ately trained personnel.

If this work is not carried out properly, there is the danger of subsequent damage and related safety hazards.

Parts and accessories

Seite 7

Notes

7 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

California Proposition 65 Warning California laws require us to state the following warning: Engine exhaust and a wide variety of automo bile components and parts, including compo nents found in the interior furnishings in a vehi cle, contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects and reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other repro ductive harm. Battery posts, terminals and re lated accessories contain lead and lead com pounds. Wash your hands after handling. Used engine oil contains chemicals that have caused cancer in laboratory animals. Always protect your skin by washing thoroughly with soap and water.

Service and warranty We recommend that you read this publication thoroughly. Your vehicle is covered by the fol lowing warranties: New Vehicle Limited Warranty Rust Perforation Limited Warranty Federal Emissions System Defect War

ranty

BMW recommends using parts and accessories approved by BMW for this purpose. Your BMW center is the right contact for genuine BMW parts and accessories, other products approved by BMW and related qualified advice. BMW has tested these products for safety and suitability in relation to BMW vehicles. BMW can assume responsibility for them. However, we cannot assume any responsibility whatsoever for parts and accessories that have not been specifically approved by BMW.

BMW cannot evaluate whether each individual product from another manufacturer can be used with BMW vehicles without presenting a safety hazard. This guarantee is also not applicable when country-specific government approval has been granted. Testing of this kind may fail to embrace the entire range of potential operating conditions to which components might be exposed on BMW vehicles. Such products could conceivably fail to comply with BMW's own stringent quality standards.

Federal Emissions Performance Warranty California Emission Control System Lim

ited Warranty Detailed information about these warranties is listed in the Service and Warranty Information Booklet for US models or in the Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models. Your vehicle has been specifically adapted and designed to meet the particular operating con ditions and homologation requirements in your country and continental region in order to de liver the full driving pleasure while the vehicle is operated under those conditions. If you wish to operate your vehicle in another country or region, you may be required to adapt your ve hicle to meet different prevailing operating conditions and homologation requirements. You should also be aware of any applicable warranty limitations or exclusions for such country or region. In such case, please contact Customer Relations for further information.

Maintenance Maintain the vehicle regularly to sustain the road safety, operational reliability and the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Specifications for required maintenance meas ures: BMW Maintenance system Service and Warranty Information Booklet

for US models Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for

Canadian models If the vehicle is not maintained according to these specifications, this could result in seri ous damage to the vehicle. Such damage is not covered by the BMW New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Data memory Numerous electronic components in your vehi cle contain data memories that store technical

information on the vehicle condition, events and faults, either temporarily or permanently. This technical information generally docu ments the state of a component, a module, a system or the environment. Operating conditions of system compo

nents, such as filling levels. Status messages from the vehicle and its

individual components, such as wheel rpm/ speed, motion delay, transverse accelera tion.

Malfunctions and defects in important sys tem components, such as lights and brakes.

Vehicle responses to special driving situa tions, such as airbag deployment, use of the stability control systems.

Ambient conditions, such as the tempera ture.

These data are of a technical nature only and are used to detect and eliminate faults and to optimize vehicle functions. Travel profiles of routes driven with the vehicle cannot be cre ated from these data. If services are used, for instance in the event of repairs, service proc esses, warranty cases, quality assurance, etc., this technical information can be read out from the event and fault data memories by service personnel, including the manufacturer, using special diagnosis tools. This service personnel can provide you with more information if needed. After troubleshooting, the information in the fault memory is cleared or overwritten continuously. Situations are conceivable during the use of the vehicle in which these technical data could become associated with a specific person in combination with other information, such as an accident report, damage to the vehicle, wit ness accounts, etc., possibly with the involve ment of an authorized expert. Additional functions that are contractually agreed with the customer, such as vehicle lo calization in the event of an emergency, permit

Seite 8

Notes

8 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

the transfer of certain vehicle data out of the vehicle.

Reporting safety defects For US customers The following only applies to vehicles owned and operated in the US. If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause in jury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Adminis tration NHTSA, in addition to notifying BMW of North America, LLC, P.O. Box 1227, West wood, New Jersey 07675-1227, Telephone 1-800-831-1117. If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or BMW of North America, LLC. To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http:// www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washing ton, DC 20590. You can also obtain other in formation about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov

For Canadian customers Canadian customers who wish to report a safety- related defect to Transport Canada, Defect Investigations and Recalls, may tele phone the toll-free hotline 1-800-333-0510. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.tc.gc.ca/ roadsafety.

Seite 9

Notes

9 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

At a glance These overviews of buttons, switches and

displays are intended to familiarize you with your vehicle. You will also become quickly acquainted with the available control concepts and options.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

Cockpit Vehicle equipment This chapter describes all series equipment as well as country-specific and special equipment offered for this model series.Therefore, it also

describes equipment that may not be found in your vehicle, for instance due to the selected special equipment or the country version. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems.

All around the steering wheel

1 Safety switch for rear power win dows41

2 Power windows40 3 Exterior mirror operation49 4 Lamps

Parking lamps83

Low beams83

Automatic headlamp con trol84 Adaptive Light Control84 High-beam Assistant85 Front fog lamps86

5 Steering column stalk, left Turn signal62

High beams, head lamp flasher85

Seite 12

At a glance Cockpit

12 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

High-beam Assistant85

Roadside parking lamps85

Computer73

Settings and information about the vehicle74

Instrument lighting87

6 Steering wheel buttons, left Telephone196

Volume

Activate/deactivate the voice acti vation system25

7 Shift paddles67 8 Instrument cluster14 9 Steering wheel buttons, right

Change the radio station Select a music track Scroll through the redial list

Next entertainment source

Recirculated air mode110

10 Start/stop the engine and switch the ignition on/off57

11 Steering column stalk, right Windshield wipers62

Rain sensor63

Rear window wiper64

12 Ignition lock57 13 Steering wheel heating51

14 Horn, the entire surface 15 Adjust the steering wheel51 16 Cruise control101

17 Opening tailgate36 18 Releasing the hood242

Seite 13

Cockpit At a glance

13 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

Instrument cluster

1 Speedometer 2 Indicator/warning lamps15 3 Tachometer72 4 Current fuel consumption72

Engine oil temperature72 5 Display for

Clock71 External temperature71 Indicator/warning lamps15 Cruise control101

6 Display for Automatic transmission position66

Hill Descent Control99 Computer73 Date of next scheduled service, and re

maining distance to be driven78 Odometer and trip odometer71 Checking engine oil level243 Settings and information74 Check Control message

present80 7 Fuel gauge72 8 Resetting the trip odometer71

Seite 14

At a glance Cockpit

14 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

Indicator/warning lamps The concept

The indicator and warning lamps can light up in a variety of combinations and colors. Several of the lamps are checked for proper functioning when the engine is started or the ignition is switched on, and light up briefly.

Text messages Text messages at the upper edge of the Con trol Display explain the meaning of the dis played indicator and warning lamps.

Supplementary text messages You can call up more information, e.g., on the cause of a malfunction and on how to respond, via Check Control, refer to page 80. In urgent cases, this information will be shown as soon as the corresponding lamp comes on.

Indicator lamps without text messages The following indicator lamps notify you that certain functions are active:

Symbol Function or system

Turn signals, refer to page 62

High beams/headlamp flasher, refer to page 85

Symbol Function or system

Front fog lamps, refer to page 86

Lamp flashes: DSC or DTC is regulating the pro pulsive forces in order to maintain driving stability, refer to page 97

The handbrake is set, refer to page 61

Canada: the parking brake is set, re fer to page 61.

Engine malfunction with adverse ef fect on emissions, refer to page 248

Canada: engine malfunction with adverse effect on exhaust emis sions, refer to page 248

Seite 15

Cockpit At a glance

15 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

All around the center console

1 Headliner17 2 Control Display18 3 Air vent111 4 Hazard warning system257

Central locking system35

5 Automatic climate control108 6 Glove compartment123 7 Radio and CD/DVD drive166

Programmable memory buttons22 8 PDC Park Distance Control103

rearview camera105 HDC Hill Descent Control99

Deactivate the Automatic Engine Start/Stop Function59

DSC Dynamic Stability Con trol97 DTC Dynamic Traction Con trol98 ECO PRO138

9 Selector lever with automatic transmis sion65

10 Controller with buttons18

Seite 16

At a glance Cockpit

16 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

All around the headliner

1 Emergency Request257

2 Panoramic glass sunroof41

3 Indicator lamp for the front pas senger airbags90

4 Reading lamps87

5 Interior lamps87

Seite 17

Cockpit At a glance

17 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

iDrive Vehicle equipment This chapter describes all series equipment as well as country-specific and special equipment offered for this model series.Therefore, it also describes equipment that may not be found in your vehicle, for instance due to the selected special equipment or the country version. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems.

The concept The iDrive combines the functions of a multi tude of switches. Thus, these functions can be operated from a central location.

Using the iDrive during a trip To avoid becoming distracted and pos

ing an unnecessary hazard to your vehicle's occupants and to other road users, never at tempt to use the controls or enter information unless traffic and road conditions allow this.

Controls at a glance Controls

1 Control Display 2 Controller with buttons

The buttons can be used to open the me nus directly. The controller can be used to select menu items and create the settings.

Control Display

Notes To clean the Control Display, follow the

care instructions, refer to page 266. Do not place objects close to the Control

Display; otherwise, the Control Display can be damaged.

Switching off

1. Press the button. 2. "Switch off control display"

Switching on Press the controller again to switch the screen back on.

Seite 18

At a glance iDrive

18 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

Controller Select menu items and create settings.

1. Turn.

2. Press.

3. Move in four directions.

Buttons on controller

Press the but ton

Function

MENU Opens the main menu.

RADIO Opens the Radio menu.

MEDIA Opens the CD/Multimedia menu.

Press the but ton

Function

NAV Opens the Navigation menu.

TEL Opens the Telephone menu.

BACK Displays the previous panel.

OPTION Opens the Options menu.

Operating concept Opening the main menu

Press the button.

The main menu is displayed. All iDrive functions can be called up via the main menu.

Selecting menu items Menu items shown in white can be selected.

1. Turn the controller until the desired menu item is highlighted.

2. Press the controller.

Seite 19

iDrive At a glance

19 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

Menu items in the Owner's Manual In the Owner's Manual, menu items that can be selected are set in quotation marks, e.g., "Settings".

Changing between panels After a menu item is selected, e.g., "Radio", a new panel is displayed. Panels can overlap. Move the controller to the left.

The current panel is closed and the previ ous panel is displayed. The previous panel is opened again by pressing the BACK button. In this case, the current panel is not closed.

Move the controller to the right. A new panel is opened on top of the previ ous display.

White arrows pointing to the left or right indi cate that additional panels can be opened.

View of an opened menu When a menu is opened, it generally opens with the panel that was last selected in that menu. To display the first panel of a menu: Move the controller to the left repeatedly

until the first panel is displayed. Press the menu button on the controller

twice.

Opening the Options menu Press the button.

The "Options" menu is displayed.

Additional options: move the controller to the right repeatedly until the "Options" menu is displayed.

Options menu The "Options" menu consists of various areas: Screen settings, e.g., "Switch off control

display". Control options for the selected main

menu, e.g., for "Radio". If applicable, further operating options for

the selected menu, for instance "Store station".

Changing settings 1. Select a field. 2. Turn the controller until the desired setting

is displayed.

3. Press the controller.

Activating/deactivating the functions Several menu items are preceded by a check box. It indicates whether the function is acti vated or deactivated. Selecting the menu item activates or deactivates the function.

Seite 20

At a glance iDrive

20 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

The function is activated. The function is deactivated.

Example: setting the clock Setting the clock

1. Press the button. The main menu is displayed.

2. Turn the controller until "Settings" is high lighted, and then press the controller.

3. If necessary, move the controller to the left to display "Time/Date".

4. Turn the controller until "Time/Date" is highlighted, and then press the controller.

5. Turn the controller until "Time:" is high lighted, and then press the controller.

6. Turn the controller to set the hours and press the controller.

7. Turn the controller to set the minutes and press the controller.

Status information Status field The following information is displayed in the status field at the top right: Time. Current entertainment source. Sound output, on/off. Wireless network reception strength. Telephone status. Traffic bulletin reception.

Status field symbols The symbols are grouped into various catego ries.

Radio symbols

Symbol Meaning

HD Radio is switched on.

Satellite radio is switched on.

Seite 21

iDrive At a glance

21 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

Telephone symbols

Symbol Meaning

Incoming or outgoing call.

Missed call.

Wireless network reception strength Symbol flashes: searching for network.

Wireless network is not available.

Bluetooth is switched on.

Roaming is active.

Text message, e-mail was received.

Check the SIM card.

SIM card is blocked.

SIM card is missing.

Enter the PIN.

Entertainment symbols

Symbol Meaning

CD/DVD player.

Music collection.

Gracenote database.

AUX-IN port.

USB audio interface.

Music interface for smartphones.

Additional symbols

Symbol Meaning

Spoken instructions are switched off.

Request of the current vehicle posi tion.

Split screen General information Additional information can be displayed on the right side of the split screen, e.g., information from the computer. In the divided screen view, the so-called split screen, this information remains visible even when you change to another menu.

Switching the split screen on and off

1. Press the button. 2. "Split screen"

Selecting the display

1. Press the button. 2. "Split screen" 3. Move the controller until the split screen is

selected. 4. Press the controller or select "Split screen

content". 5. Select the desired menu item.

Programmable memory buttons General information The iDrive functions can be stored on the pro grammable memory buttons and called up di rectly, e.g., radio stations, navigation destina

Seite 22

At a glance iDrive

22 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

tions, phone numbers and entry points into the menu. The settings are stored for the remote control currently in use.

Saving a function 1. Highlight the function via the iDrive.

2. Press the desired button for more than two seconds.

Running a function Press the button. The function will run immediately. This

means, for example, that the number is dialed when a phone number is selected.

Displaying the button assignment Use a finger to touch the buttons. Do not wear gloves or use objects. The key assignment is displayed at the top edge of the screen.

To display short information: touch the button.

To display detailed information: touch the button for an extended period.

Entering letters and numbers 1. Turn the controller: select letters or num

bers.

2. Select additional letters or numbers if needed.

3. "OK": confirm the entry.

Symbol Function

Press the controller: delete the let ter or number.

Press the controller for an extended period: delete all letters or numbers.

Enter a blank space.

Switching between letters and numbers Depending on the menu, you can switch be tween entering letters and numbers.

Symbol Function

Enter the letters.

Enter the numbers.

Switching between upper and lower case letters Depending on the menu, you can switch be tween entering uppercase and lowercase let ters.

Symbol Function

Move the controller forward: switch from upper to lower case letters.

Move the controller forward: switch from lower to upper case letters.

Entry comparison Entry of names and addresses: the selection is narrowed down every time a letter is entered and letters may be added automatically. The entries are continuously compared to the data stored in the vehicle.

Seite 23

iDrive At a glance

23 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

Only those letters are offered during the entry for which data is available.

Destination search: town/city names can be entered using the spelling of language available on the Control Display.

Seite 24

At a glance iDrive

24 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

Voice activation system Vehicle equipment This chapter describes all series equipment as well as country-specific and special equipment offered for this model series.Therefore, it also describes equipment that may not be found in your vehicle, for instance due to the selected special equipment or the country version. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems.

The concept Most functions that are displayed on the

Control Display can be operated with the voice activation system using spoken com mands. The system prompts you to make your entries.

Functions that can only be used when the vehicle is stationary cannot be operated using the voice activation system.

The system uses a special microphone lo cated in the area of the interior rearview mirror.

... Verbal instructions in the Owner's Manual to use with the voice activation system.

Requirements Via the Control Display, set a language that is also supported by the voice activation system so that the spoken commands can be identi fied. Set the language, refer to page 77.

Using voice activation Activating the voice activation system

1. Press the button on the steering wheel.

2. Wait for the signal. 3. Say the command.

The command appears on the Control Dis play.

The symbol on the Control Display indi cates that the voice activation system is active. If no other commands are available, operate the function via iDrive in this case.

Terminating the voice activation system

Briefly press the button on the steer ing wheel or Cancel.

Possible commands Most menu items on the Control Display can be voiced as commands. The available commands depend on the menu that is currently displayed on the Control Dis play. The functions of the main menu have short commands. Some list items, such as the phone book en tries, can also be selected via the voice activa tion system. Say the list items exactly as they are displayed on the list.

Having possible commands read aloud You can have the system read possible com mands aloud: Voice commands.

Seite 25

Voice activation system At a glance

25 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

For example, if the "Settings" menu is dis played, the commands for the settings are read out loud.

Executing functions using short commands Functions on the main menu can be performed directly by means of short commands, usually irrespective of which menu item is currently selected, for instance Vehicle status. List of short commands of the voice activation system, refer to page 272.

Help dialog for the voice activation system Calling up help dialog: Help Additional commands for the help dialog: Help with examples: information about the

current operating options and the most im portant commands for them are an nounced.

Help with voice activation: information about the principle of operation for the voice activation system is announced.

Example: playing back a CD Via the main menu The commands of the menu items are spoken out loud, in the same way as they are selected via the controller.

1. Switch on the Entertainment sound output if necessary.

2. Press the button on the steering wheel.

3. C D and multimedia The medium last played is played back.

4. C D 5. C D drive

The CD is played back.

6. Press the button on the steering wheel again to select a specific track.

7. Track ... e.g., CD track 4.

Via short commands Playback of the CD can also be started using a short command.

1. Switch on the Entertainment sound output if necessary.

2. Press the button on the steering wheel.

3. C D drive Track ... e.g., CD track 4.

Setting the voice dialog You can set whether the system should use the standard dialog or a shorter version. In the shorter variant of the voice dialog, the announcements from the system are issued in an abbreviated form. On the Control Display:

1. "Settings" 2. "Language/Units" 3. "Speech mode:" 4. Select the setting.

Adjusting the volume Turn the volume knob while giving an instruc tion until the desired volume is set.

Seite 26

At a glance Voice activation system

26 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

The volume remains constant even if the volume of other audio sources is changed.

The volume is stored for the remote con trol currently in use.

Notes on Emergency Requests Do not use the voice activation system to ini tiate an Emergency Request. In stressful situa tions, the voice and vocal pitch can change. This can unnecessarily delay the establish ment of a telephone connection. Instead, use the SOS button, refer to page 257, in the vicinity of the interior mirror.

Environmental conditions Say the commands, numbers, and letters

smoothly and with normal volume, empha sis, and speed.

Always say commands in the language of the voice activation system.

Keep the doors, windows, and glass sun roof closed to prevent noise interference.

Avoid making other noise in the vehicle while speaking.

Seite 27

Voice activation system At a glance

27 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

Controls This chapter is intended to provide you with

information that will give you complete control of your vehicle. All features and accessories that are useful for driving and your safety, comfort

and convenience are described here.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

Opening and closing Vehicle equipment This chapter describes all series equipment as well as country-specific and special equipment offered for this model series.Therefore, it also describes equipment that may not be found in your vehicle, for instance due to the selected special equipment or the country version. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems.

Remote control/key Buttons on the remote control

1 Unlocking 2 Locking 3 Opening tailgate

General information The vehicle is supplied with two remote con trols with keys. Each remote control contains a rechargeable battery that is automatically recharged when it is in the ignition lock while the car is being driven. Use each remote control at least twice a year for longer road trips in order to maintain the batteries' charge status. In vehicles equipped with Comfort Access, the remote control contains a replaceable battery, refer to page 38.

The settings called up and implemented when the vehicle is unlocked depend on which re mote control is used to unlock the vehicle, re fer to Personal Profile. In addition, information about service require ments is stored in the remote control, Service data in the remote control, refer to page 247.

Integrated key

Press button 1 and pull out the key.

The integrated key fits the following locks: Driver's door, refer to page 34.

New remote controls You can obtain new remote controls from your service center.

Loss of the remote controls Lost remote controls can be blocked by your service center.

Personal Profile The concept You can set several of your vehicle's functions to suit your personal needs and preferences. The settings are automatically saved in the

profile currently activated in the remote control.

Seite 30

Controls Opening and closing

30 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

The remote control used is detected when the vehicle is unlocked and the stored pro file is called up.

Your personal settings will be recognized and called up again even if the vehicle has been used in the meantime by someone else with another remote control.

The individual settings are stored for a maxi mum of four remote controls. They are stored for two remote controls if Comfort Access is in use.

Personal Profile settings The following functions and settings can be stored in a profile. More information on the settings can be found under: Assigning the programmable memory but

tons, refer to page 22. Response of the central locking system

when the car is being unlocked, refer to page 32.

Automatic locking of the vehicle, refer to page 35.

Automatic call-up of the driver's seat posi tion after unlocking, refer to page 33.

Settings for the display on the Control Dis play and in the instrument cluster: 12h/24h clock format, refer to

page 76. Date format, refer to page 77. Brightness of the Control Display, refer

to page 78. Language on the Control Display, refer

to page 77. Units of measure for fuel consumption,

distance covered/remaining distances, and temperature, refer to page 75.

Show visual warning for the Park Distance Control PDC, refer to page 104.

Backup camera:

Function selection, refer to page 106. Type of display, refer to page 107.

Light settings: Triple turn signal activation, refer to

page 62. Welcome lamps, refer to page 83. Headlamp courtesy delay feature, refer

to page 84. Daytime running lights, refer to

page 84. High-beam Assistant, refer to

page 85. Automatic climate control: AUTO program,

cooling function and automatic recircu lated air control activated/deactivated, temperature, air flow rate and distribution, refer to page 108.

Navigation: Voice activation, refer to page 155. Route criteria, refer to page 153. Map view settings, refer to page 157.

Entertainment: Tone control, refer to page 164. Radio, stored stations, refer to

page 172. CD/multimedia, audio source listened

to last, refer to page 174. Telephone: volume, refer to page 200.

Central locking system The concept The central locking system becomes active when the driver's door is closed. The system simultaneously engages and re leases the locks on the following: Doors. Tailgate. Fuel filler flap.

Seite 31

Opening and closing Controls

31 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

Operating from the outside Via the remote control. Via the door lock. In cars with Comfort Access, via the door

handles on the driver's and front passen ger sides.

The following takes place simultaneously when locking/unlocking the vehicle via the re mote control: The welcome lamps, interior lamps and

courtesy lamps are switched on and off. The alarm system is armed or disarmed,

refer to page 39.

Operating from the inside Via the button for the central locking system, refer to page 35. If the vehicle is locked from the inside, the fuel filler flap remains unlocked. If an accident of a certain severity occurs, the central locking system unlocks automatically. The hazard warning system and interior lamps come on.

Opening and closing: from the outside Using the remote control

General information Take the remote control with you People or animals left unattended in a

parked vehicle can lock the doors from the in side. Always take the remote control with you when leaving the vehicle so that the vehicle can then be opened from the outside.

Unlocking Press the button. The vehicle is unlocked.

The welcome lamps, interior lamps, and cour tesy lamps are switched on.

You can set how the vehicle is to be unlocked. The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.

1. "Settings" 2. "Door locks" 3. "Unlock button:"

4. Select the desired function: "All doors"

The entire vehicle is unlocked. "Driver's door only"

Only the driver's door and the fuel filler flap are unlocked. Pressing again unlocks the entire vehicle.

Convenient opening Press and hold the button on the remote

control. The windows and the panoramic glass sunroof open.

Locking Press the button on the remote con

trol. Locking from the outside Do not lock the vehicle from the outside

if there are people in it, as the vehicle cannot be unlocked from inside without special knowl edge.

Seite 32

Controls Opening and closing

32 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

Switching on the interior lamps and courtesy lamps

Press the button on the remote con trol with the vehicle locked.

Panic mode You can trigger the alarm system if you find yourself in a dangerous situation.

Press the button on the remote control for at least 3 seconds. To switch off the alarm: press any button.

Unlocking tailgate Press the button on the remote control for

approx. 1 second and release. The tailgate will open slightly, regardless of whether it was previously locked or unlocked. The tailgate pivots back and up when it opens. Ensure that adequate clearance is available before opening. To avoid locking yourself out of the vehicle, do not place the remote control into the cargo area. The tailgate is locked again as soon as it is pushed closed. Before and after each trip, check that the tail gate has not been inadvertently unlocked.

Confirmation signals from the vehicle 1. "Settings" 2. "Door locks" 3. "Flash when lock/unlock"

Retrieving the seat and mirror settings The driver's seat and exterior mirror positions used last are stored for the remote control cur rently in use. When the vehicle is being unlocked, these po sitions are automatically retrieved if the setting is activated.

Pinch hazard when moving back the seat If this function is used, first make sure

that the footwell behind the driver's seat is empty. Failure to do so could cause injury to persons or damage to objects behind the seat as a result of a rearward movement of the seat.

The adjustment procedure is interrupted: When a seat position switch is pressed. When a button of the seat and mirror mem

ory is pressed.

Selecting automatic activation 1. "Settings" 2. "Door locks" 3. "Last seat position auto."

Malfunctions Local radio waves may interfere with the re mote control. In this case, unlock and lock the car at the door lock with the integrated key. In vehicles without an alarm system or Comfort Access, only the driver's door can be unlocked and locked using the integrated key in the door lock.

Seite 33

Opening and closing Controls

33 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

If the car can no longer be locked with a re mote control, the battery in the remote control is discharged. Use the remote control during an extended drive in order to recharge the bat tery, refer to page 30. The remote control for Comfort Access contains a battery that may need to be replaced, refer to page 38.

For US owners only The transmitter and receiver units comply with part 15 of the FCC/Federal Communication Commission regulations. Operation is gov erned by the following: FCC ID: LX8766S LX8766E LX8CAS Compliance statement: This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: This device may not cause harmful inter

ference, and this device must accept any interference

received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

Any unauthorized modifications or changes to these devices could void the user's authority to operate this equipment.

Using the door lock

General information

Locking from the outside Do not lock the vehicle from the outside

if there are people in it, as the vehicle cannot be unlocked from inside without special knowl edge.

In some market-specific versions, the alarm system, refer to page 39, is triggered if the vehicle is unlocked via the door lock. To stop the alarm, unlock the vehicle with the remote control or insert the remote control into the ignition lock all the way. In some vehicle equipment versions, only the driver's door can be locked via the door lock.

Locking the doors, the fuel filler flap, and the tailgate all at once To lock all doors, the fuel filler flap, and the tail gate at once:

1. With the doors closed, lock the vehicle us ing the button for the central locking sys tem in the interior, refer to page 35.

2. Unlock and open the driver's or front pas senger door, refer to page 35.

3. Lock the vehicle. Lock the driver's door using the

integrated key in the door lock, or Press down the lock button of the front

passenger door and close the door from the outside.

Manual operation If an electrical malfunction occurs, unlock or lock the driver's door using the integrated key in the door lock.

Seite 34

Controls Opening and closing

34 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

Opening and closing: from the inside

Locking and unlocking Press the button in the vehicle.

The doors and the tailgate are locked or un locked when the front doors are closed, but they are not secured against theft. The fuel filler flap remains unlocked.

Automatic locking The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.

1. "Settings" 2. "Door locks" 3. Select the desired function:

"Lock if no door is opened" The vehicle locks automatically after a short period of time if a door is not opened.

"Lock after start. to drive" The vehicle locks automatically after you drive away.

Unlocking and opening Press the button. The doors are

unlocked. To open, pull the door handle above the armrest.

Pull the door handle above the armrest twice: the door is unlocked the first time and opened the second time.

Locking Press the button. The doors are

locked. Press the lock button of a door. To prevent

you from being locked out, the opened driver's door cannot be locked using the lock button.

Take the remote control with you People or animals left unattended in a

parked vehicle can lock the doors from the in side. Always take the remote control with you when leaving the vehicle so that the vehicle can then be opened from the outside.

Tailgate Opening The tailgate pivots back and up when it opens. Ensure that adequate clearance is available before opening.

Seite 35

Opening and closing Controls

35 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

Provide edge protection Sharp or angular objects can hit the rear

window while driving and damage the heating wires of the rear window. Provide edge protec tion.

Opening from the inside

Press the button. The tailgate is opened if the vehicle is

stationary, provided that the tailgate has not been locked.

Opening from the outside

Press the button next to the tailgate. Press the remote control button for ap

prox. 1 second and then release. The tailgate opens slightly. It can be swung upward.

Opening manually In case of an electrical malfunction:

1. Fold down the rear seat backrest, enlarge the cargo area, refer to page 118.

2. From the cargo area, press out the handle in the tailgate, see arrow, and pull out as far as possible. The tailgate is unlocked.

3. Open the tailgate from the outside and press in the handle.

The tailgate is locked again as soon as it is closed.

Closing

Recessed grips on the inside trim of the tail gate can be used to conveniently pull down the tailgate.

Before closing the tailgate, ensure that the cargo floor panel is not raised, refer to page 121.

Keep the closing area clear Make sure that the closing area of the

tailgate is clear; otherwise, injuries or damage may result.

Seite 36

Controls Opening and closing

36 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

Comfort Access The concept The vehicle can be accessed without activat ing the remote control. All you need to do is to have the remote con trol with you, e.g., in your jacket pocket. The vehicle automatically detects the remote control when it is nearby or in the passenger compartment. Comfort Access supports the following func tions: Unlocking/locking of the vehicle. Unlocking of the tailgate separately. Starting the engine. Convenient closing.

Functional requirement To lock the vehicle, the remote control

must be located outside of the vehicle. The next unlocking and locking cycle is not

possible until after approx. 2 seconds. The engine can only be started if the re

mote control is inside the vehicle.

Comparison with ordinary remote control The functions can be controlled by pressing the buttons or via Comfort Access.

Unlocking

Grasp the handle on the driver's or front pas senger door completely, arrow 1.

This corresponds to pressing the button.

Locking

Touch the area on the door handle, arrow 2, with your finger for approx. 1 second. This corresponds to pressing the but ton.

To save battery power, ensure that the ignition and all electronic systems and/or power con sumers are switched off before locking the ve hicle. If a remote control is detected within the vehi cle, the vehicle does not lock or is unlocked again.

Convenient closing Press the area, arrow 2, with your finger and hold. In addition, the windows and the panoramic glass sunroof close.

Monitor the closing process Watch during the closing process to be

sure that no one is injured. Removing the hand from the door handle immediately stops the closing process.

Unlocking the tailgate separately Press the button on the exterior of the tailgate. This corresponds to pressing the button. If a remote control accidentally left in the cargo area is detected in the locked vehicle, the tail gate opens again.

Seite 37

Opening and closing Controls

37 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

Ignition on Pressing the Start/Stop button switches the ignition on. When doing so, do not depress the brake pedal, otherwise the engine will start.

Starting the engine The engine can be started or the ignition can be switched on when a remote control is inside the vehicle. It is not necessary to insert a re mote control into the ignition lock, refer to page 57.

Switching off the engine in cars with automatic transmission The engine can only be switched off with transmission position P engaged, refer to page 59. To switch the engine off with transmission po sition N engaged, insert the remote control in the ignition lock.

Malfunction The Comfort Access functions can be distur bed by local radio waves, such as by a mobile phone in the immediate vicinity of the remote control or when a mobile phone is being charged in the vehicle. If this occurs, open or close the vehicle using the buttons on the remote control or use the integrated key in the door lock. To start the engine afterward, insert the re mote control into the ignition switch.

Warning lamps The warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up when you attempt to start the engine: the engine cannot

be started. The remote control is not in the vehicle or has a malfunction. Take the remote control with you inside the vehicle or have it checked. If

necessary, insert another remote control into the ignition switch.

The warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up while the engine is running: the remote control is no lon

ger inside the vehicle. After switching off the engine, the engine can only be started again within approx. 10 sec onds if no door has been opened.

The indicator lamp in the instrument cluster comes on and a message ap pears on the Control Display: replace

the remote control battery.

Replacing the battery The remote control for Comfort Access con tains a battery that will need to be replaced from time to time.

1. Take the integrated key out of the remote control, refer to page 30.

2. Remove the cover.

3. Insert a new battery of the same type with the positive side facing upwards.

4. Press the cover closed. Return used battery to a recycling collec tion point or to your service center.

Seite 38

Controls Opening and closing

38 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

Alarm system The concept The vehicle alarm system responds to: Opening of a door, the hood or the tailgate. Movements in the vehicle: interior motion

sensor, refer to page 40. Changes in the vehicle tilt, e.g., during at

tempts to steal a wheel or tow the car. Interruptions in battery voltage. The alarm system briefly indicates tampering: By sounding an acoustic alarm. By switching on the hazard warning sys

tem. By flashing the high beams.

Arming and disarming the alarm system

General information When you lock or unlock the vehicle, either with the remote control or at the door lock, the alarm system is armed or disarmed at the same time.

Door lock and armed alarm system Unlocking via the door lock will trigger the alarm on some market-specific versions. To stop this alarm, unlock the vehicle with the remote control or switch on the ignition.

Tailgate and armed alarm system The tailgate can be opened using the remote control, even if the alarm system is armed.

Press the button on the remote control. After the tailgate is closed, it is locked and monitored again by the alarm system. The haz ard warning system flashes once. In some market-specific versions, the tailgate can only be opened using the remote control if the vehicle was unlocked first.

Switching off the alarm Unlock the vehicle using the remote con

trol, refer to page 32. Insert the remote control all the way into

the ignition lock.

Indicator lamp on the interior rearview mirror

The indicator lamp flashes briefly every 2 seconds: The system is armed.

The indicator lamp flashes after locking: The doors, hood or tailgate is not closed properly, but the rest of the vehicle is se cured. The indicator lamp flashes continuously af ter approx. 10 seconds. The interior motion sensor is not active.

The indicator lamp goes out after unlock ing: The vehicle has not been tampered with.

If the indicator lamp flashes after unlocking until the remote control is inserted in the ignition, but for no longer than approx. 5 minutes: An alarm has been triggered.

Panic mode In dangerous situations, trigger the alarm sys tem:

Press the button on the remote control for at least 3 seconds. To switch off the alarm: press any button.

Seite 39

Opening and closing Controls

39 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

Tilt alarm sensor The tilt of the vehicle is monitored. The alarm system responds in situations such as attempts to steal a wheel or tow the car.

Interior motion sensor For the sensor to function properly, the win dows and panoramic glass sunroof must be closed.

Avoiding unintentional alarms The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sen sor can be switched off together, such as in the following situations: In duplex garages. During transport on car-carrying trains, at

sea or on a trailer. When animals are to remain in the vehicle.

Switching off the tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sensor

Press the remote control button again within 10 seconds after the vehicle is locked. The indicator lamp lights up for approx. 2 sec onds and then flashes continuously. The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sen sor remain switched off until the vehicle is locked again.

Power windows General information

Take the remote control with you Take the remote control with you when

leaving the vehicle so that children, for exam ple, cannot operate the power windows and in jure themselves.

Opening

Press the switch to the resistance point. The window opens while the switch is held.

Press the switch beyond the resist ance point. The window opens automatically.

Pressing again stops the motion.

Closing Danger of pinching Monitor the closing process and make

sure that the closing path of the window is clear; otherwise, injuries may result.

Pull the switch to the resistance point. The window closes while the switch is held.

Pull the switch beyond the resistance point. The window closes automatically.

Pressing the switch stops the motion. Convenient operation via the remote control, refer to page 32. Convenient closing, refer to page 37, with Comfort Access.

Seite 40

Controls Opening and closing

40 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

After the ignition is switched off When the remote control is removed or the ig nition is switched off, the windows can con tinue to be operated for approx. 1 minute as long as no door is opened.

Pinch protection system If the closing force exceeds a specific value as a window closes, the closing action is inter rupted. The window reopens slightly.

Danger of pinching even with pinch pro tection

Even with the pinch protection system, check that the window's closing path is clear; other wise, the closing action may not stop in certain situations, e.g., if thin objects are present.

Do not use window accessories Do not install any accessories in the

range of movement of the windows; otherwise, the pinch protection system will be impaired.

Closing without the pinch protection system For example, if there is an external danger or if ice on the windows prevents a window from closing normally, proceed as follows:

1. Pull the switch past the resistance point and hold it there. Pinch protection is limited and the window reopens slightly if the closing force ex ceeds a certain value.

2. Pull the switch past the resistance point again within approx. 4 seconds and hold it there. The window closes without pinch protec tion.

Safety switch With the safety switch, the rear windows are prevented from being opened or closed via the

switches in the rear passenger area, such as by children.

Press the button. The LED lights up if the safety function is switched on.

Safety switch for rear operation Press the safety switch when transport

ing children in the rear; otherwise, injury may result if the windows are closed without super vision.

Panoramic glass sunroof General information The glass sunroof and the sliding visor can be operated together or separately using the switch.

Danger of pinching Monitor the closing process and make

sure that the closing path of the glass sunroof is clear; otherwise, injuries may result.

Take the remote control with you Take the remote control with you when

leaving the vehicle so that children, for exam ple, cannot operate the roof and injure them selves.

Seite 41

Opening and closing Controls

41 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

Tilting the glass sunroof Press the switch briefly. The closed roof is tilted and

the sliding visor opens slightly.

The opened roof closes until it is in its tilted position. The sliding visor stays com pletely open. Pressing the switch again closes the sliding visor al most completely.

Do not use force to close the sliding visor Do not use force to close the sliding visor

with the glass sunroof in its tilted position, oth erwise the mechanism will be damaged.

Opening/closing the sliding visor Press the switch in the de

sired direction to the resist ance point and hold it there. The sliding visor moves while the switch is being held.

Press the switch in the desired direction past the resistance point. The sliding visor moves automatically. Pressing the switch again stops the mo tion.

Opening/closing the glass sunroof With the sliding visor open, proceed as descri bed under Sliding visor.

Opening/closing the glass sunroof and sliding visor together

Press the switch twice in the de sired direction past the resist ance point.

The glass sunroof and sliding visor move to gether. Pressing the switch again stops the motion.

Convenient operation, refer to page 32, via the remote control or the door lock. Convenient closing, refer to page 37, with Comfort Access.

Comfort position In the comfort position, the roof is not fully open. This reduces wind noise in the passen ger compartment. Each time the glass sunroof is opened or closed all the way, it stops in the comfort posi tion. If desired, continue the motion following this with the switch.

After the ignition is switched off The roof can still be operated for approx. 1 mi nute, as long as no door has been opened.

Pinch protection system If the closing force when closing the glass sun roof exceeds a certain value, the closing move ment is stopped, beginning at approximately the middle of the opening in the roof, or from the tilted position during closing. The glass sunroof opens again slightly.

Danger of pinching even with pinch pro tection

Despite the pinch protection system, check that the roof's closing path is clear; otherwise, the closing action may not be interrupted in certain extreme situations, such as when thin objects are present.

Closing without the pinch protection system For example, if there is an external danger, pro ceed as follows:

1. Press the switch forward beyond the re sistance point and hold.

Seite 42

Controls Opening and closing

42 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

Pinch protection is limited and the roof re opens slightly if the closing force exceeds a certain value.

2. Press the switch forward again beyond the resistance point and hold until the roof closes without pinch protection.

Initialization after a power failure After a power failure, it is only possible to raise the roof, if necessary. Have the system initialized by your service center.

Seite 43

Opening and closing Controls

43 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

Adjusting Vehicle equipment This chapter describes all series equipment as well as country-specific and special equipment offered for this model series.Therefore, it also describes equipment that may not be found in your vehicle, for instance due to the selected special equipment or the country version. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems.

Sitting safely The ideal seating position can make a vital contribution to relaxed, fatigue-free driving. The seating position plays an important role in an accident in combination with: Safety belts, refer to page 46. Head restraints, refer to page 47. Airbags, refer to page 88.

Seats Note before adjusting

Do not adjust the seat while driving Never attempt to adjust the driver's seat

while driving. The seat could respond with un expected movement and the ensuing loss of vehicle control could lead to an accident.

Do not incline the backrest too far to the rear

Do not incline the backrest on the front pas senger side too far to the rear during driving. Otherwise, there is the danger of sliding under the safety belt in an accident. This would elimi nate the protection normally provided by the belt.

Adjusting manually

Forward/backward Pull lever 1 and slide the seat into the desired position. After releasing the lever, move the seat for ward or back slightly to make sure it engages properly.

Height Pull lever 2 and apply your weight to the seat or lift it off, as necessary.

Backrest tilt

Pull lever 3 and apply your weight to the back rest or lift it off, as necessary.

Seite 44

Controls Adjusting

44 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

Seat tilt

Pull the lever and apply your weight to the seat or lift it off, as necessary.

Thigh support

Pull the lever and move the thigh support for ward or back.

Adjusting electrically

1 Forward/backward 2 Height 3 Seat tilt

4 Backrest

The head restraint can be adjusted manually, refer Head restraints below.

Lumbar support

You can also adjust the contour of the backrest to obtain additional support in the lumbar re gion. The upper hips and spinal column receive sup plementary support to help you maintain a re laxed, upright sitting position. Increase or decrease curvature:

Press front or rear section of switch. Shift curvature up or down:

Press upper or lower section of switch.

Seite 45

Adjusting Controls

45 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

Backrest width

The width of the backrest can be changed with the side wings to adjust the side support to your own needs. Press front or rear section of switch. The backrest width decreases or increases.

Adjusting the rear seat backrests Adjust the backrest tilt, refer to page 118.

Seat heating

Switching on Press the button once for each tem perature level.

The maximum temperature is reached when three LEDs are lit. If the trip is continued within approx. 15 mi nutes, the seat heating is activated automati cally with the temperature set last.

Switching off Press the button longer.

The LEDs go out. The temperature is reduced, if need be, down to no heat in order to reduce the load on the battery. The LEDs remain lit.

Safety belts General information Always make sure that safety belts are being worn by all occupants before driving away. Although airbags enhance safety by providing added protection, they are not a substitute for safety belts.

Seats with safety belt The shoulder strap's anchorage point will

be correct for adult seat occupants of ev ery build if the seat is correctly adjusted.

The two rear safety belt buckles integrated into the rear seat are for passengers sitting on the left and right.

The belt buckle embossed with the word CENTER is intended exclusively for use by passengers riding in the center position.

If the middle safety belt is used in the rear, the left backrest must be locked, refer to page 118; otherwise, the safety belt will not have a restraining effect.

Notes One person per safety belt Never allow more than one person to

wear a single safety belt. Never allow infants or small children to ride on a passenger's lap.

Putting on the belt Lay the belt, without twisting, snugly

across the lap and shoulders, as close to the body as possible. Make sure that the belt lies low around the hips in the lap area and does not press on the abdomen. Otherwise, the belt can slip over the hips in the lap area in a frontal impact and injure the abdomen.

Seite 46

Controls Adjusting

46 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

The safety belt must not lie across the neck, rub on sharp edges, be routed over solid or breakable objects, or be pinched.

Reduction of restraining effect Avoid wearing clothing that prevents the

belt from fitting properly, and pull the shoulder belt periodically to readjust the tension across your lap; otherwise, the retention effect of the safety belt may be reduced.

Buckling the belt

Make sure you hear the latch plate engage in the belt buckle.

Unbuckling the belt 1. Hold the belt firmly. 2. Press the red button in the belt buckle. 3. Guide the belt back into its reel.

Safety belt reminder for the driver's and front passenger seat

The indicator lamp lights up and a signal sounds. In addition, a message appears on the Control Display. Check whether the safety belt has

been fastened correctly.

The safety belt reminder is active at speeds above approx. 5 mph/8 km/h. It can also be ac tivated if objects are placed on the front pas senger seat.

Damage to safety belts In the case of strain caused by accidents or damage: Have the safety belts, including the safety belt tensioners, replaced and have the belt anchors checked.

Checking and replacing safety belts Have the work performed only by your

service center; otherwise, it cannot be ensured that this safety feature will function properly.

Head restraints Correctly adjusted head restraints A correctly adjusted head restraint reduces the risk of spinal injury in the event of an accident.

Adjusting the head restraint Correctly adjust the head restraints of all

occupied seats; otherwise, there is an in creased risk of injury in an accident.

Height Adjust the head restraint so that its center is approx. at ear level.

Distance Adjust the distance so that the head restraint is as close as possible to the back of the head.

Seite 47

Adjusting Controls

47 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

Front

Height adjustment

To raise: pull. To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and

push the head restraint down.

Rear

Height adjustment

To raise: pull. To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and

push the head restraint down.

The height of the middle head restraint cannot be adjusted.

Removing at the front and rear Only remove the head restraint if no one will be sitting in the seat in question.

1. Pull upward as far as possible. 2. Press the button, arrow 1, and completely

pull out the head restraint with the rear seat backrest folded forward slightly.

Before transporting passengers Reinstall the head restraint before trans

porting anyone in the seat; otherwise, the pro tective function of the head restraint is unavail able.

Seat and mirror memory General information Two different driver's seat and exterior mirror positions can be stored and retrieved. The adjustment of the backrest width and the lumbar support is not stored in the memory.

Storing

1. Switch on the radio ready state or the igni tion, refer to page 57.

2. Adjust the seat and exterior mirrors to the desired positions.

3. Press the button. The LED in the button lights up.

4. Press the desired memory button 1 or 2. The LED goes out.

If the M button is pressed accidentally:

Press the button again. The LED goes out.

Seite 48

Controls Adjusting

48 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

Calling up settings Do not retrieve the memory setting while driving

Do not retrieve the memory setting while driv ing, as an unexpected seat movement could result in an accident.

Comfort function 1. Open the driver's door after unlocking or

switch on the radio ready state, refer to page 57.

2. Briefly press the desired memory but ton 1 or 2.

The seat is automatically moved to the stored position. The procedure stops when a switch for setting the seat or one of the memory buttons is pressed.

Safety mode 1. Close the driver's door and switch the igni

tion on or off, refer to page 57. 2. Press and hold the desired memory button

1 or 2 until the setting procedure is com pleted.

Mirrors Exterior mirrors

General information The mirror on the passenger side is more curved than the driver's mirror.

Estimating distances correctly Objects reflected in the mirror are closer

than they appear. Do not estimate the distance to the traffic behind you based on what you see in the mirror, as this will increase your risk of an accident.

At a glance

1 Adjusting 2 Fold in and out 3 Left/right, Automatic Curb Monitor

Selecting a mirror

To change over to the other mirror: Slide the mirror changeover switch.

Adjusting electrically The setting corresponds to the direc tion in which the button is pressed.

Saving positions Seat and mirror memory, refer to page 48.

Adjusting manually If an electrical malfunction occurs, for example, press the edges of the mirror glass.

Automatic Curb Monitor When the reverse gear is engaged, the mirror glass tilts downward slightly on the front pas senger side. This improves your view of the curb and other low-lying obstacles when park ing, for example.

Activating

1. Slide the mirror changeover switch to the driver's side mirror position.

Seite 49

Adjusting Controls

49 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

2. Shift into reverse or engage transmission position R.

Deactivating Slide the mirror changeover switch to the pas senger's side mirror position.

Fold in and out Press button 2. Possible up to approx. 15 mph/20 km/h. For example, this is advantageous In car washes. In narrow streets. For folding back mirrors that were folded

away manually. Mirrors that were folded in are folded out auto matically at a speed of approx. 25 mph/40 km/h.

Fold in the mirror in a car wash Before entering an automatic car wash,

fold in the exterior mirrors by hand or with the button; otherwise, they could be damaged, de pending on the width of the vehicle.

Automatic heating Depending on the external temperature, both exterior mirrors are automatically heated when the engine is running or the ignition is switched on.

Interior rearview mirror

Reducing the blinding effect

From behind when driving at night: turn the knob.

Interior and exterior mirrors, automatic dimming feature

Two photocells are used for control: In the mirror glass, see arrow. On the back of the mirror.

For proper operation: Keep the photocells clean. Do not cover the area between the inside

rearview mirror and the windshield.

Seite 50

Controls Adjusting

50 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

Steering wheel General information

Do not adjust while driving Do not adjust the steering wheel while

driving; otherwise, an unexpected movement could result in an accident.

Adjusting

1. Fold the lever down. 2. Move the steering wheel to the preferred

height and angle to suit your seating posi tion.

3. Fold the lever back. Do not use force to swing the lever back. Do not use force to swing the lever back

up; otherwise, the mechanism will be dam aged.

Steering wheel heating

Switching on/off Press the button.

On: the LED lights up. Off: the LED goes out.

Seite 51

Adjusting Controls

51 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

Transporting children safely Vehicle equipment This chapter describes all series equipment as well as country-specific and special equipment offered for this model series.Therefore, it also describes equipment that may not be found in your vehicle, for instance due to the selected special equipment or the country version. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems.

The right place for children Note

Children in the vehicle Do not leave children unattended in the

vehicle; otherwise, they could endanger them selves and other persons, e.g., by opening the doors.

Children should always be in the rear Accident research shows that the safest place for children is on the rear seat.

Transporting children in the rear Transport children younger than

13 years of age or shorter than 5 ft/150 cm in the rear only, using child restraint fixing sys tems suitable for the age, weight, and height of the child; otherwise, there is an increased risk of injury in an accident. Children 13 years of age or older must wear a safety belt as soon as a suitable child restraint fixing system can no longer be used, due to their age, weight and size.

Children on the front passenger seat Should it be necessary to use a child restraint fixing system on the front passenger seat, make sure that the front and side airbags on

the front passenger side are deactivated. Auto matic deactivation of front passenger airbags, refer to page 89.

Deactivating the front passenger airbags If a child restraint fixing system is used in

the front passenger seat, the front passenger airbags must be deactivated; otherwise, there is an increased risk of injury to the child when the airbags are triggered, even with a child re straint fixing system.

Installing child restraint fixing systems Notes

Manufacturer's information for child re straint fixing systems

To select, mount and use child restraint fixing systems, observe the information provided by the system manufacturer; otherwise, the pro tective effect can be impaired.

On the front passenger seat After installing a child restraint fixing system on the front passenger seat, ensure that the front and side airbags on the front passenger side are deactivated.

Deactivating the front passenger airbags If a child restraint fixing system is used in

the front passenger seat, the front passenger airbags must be deactivated; otherwise, there is an increased risk of injury to the child when the airbags are triggered, even with a child re straint fixing system.

Seat position and height Before installing a child restraint fixing system, move the front passenger seat as far back as

Seite 52

Controls Transporting children safely

52 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

possible and adjust its height to the highest position to obtain the best possible position for the belt and to offer optimal protection in the event of an accident. Do not change the seat position and height af ter this.

Backrest width Before mounting a child restraint fixing system on the front passenger seat, open the backrest width, refer to page 46, completely. Do not change the backrest width after this.

Backrest width for the child seat Before installing a child restraint fixing

system in the front passenger seat, the back rest width must be opened completely. Do not change the adjustment after this; otherwise, the stability of the child seat will be reduced.

Child seat security

The rear safety belts and the safety belt for the front passenger can be locked to prevent ex tension in order to permit attachment of child restraint fixing systems.

Locking the safety belt 1. Pull out the belt webbing completely. 2. Secure the child restraint fixing system

with the belt. 3. Allow the belt webbing to be pulled in and

pull it taut against the child restraint fixing system. The safety belt is locked.

Unlocking the safety belt 1. Open the belt buckle. 2. Remove the child restraint fixing system. 3. Allow the belt webbing to be pulled in com

pletely.

LATCH child restraint fixing system LATCH: Lower Anchors and Tether for Chil dren.

Note Manufacturer's information for LATCH child restraint fixing systems

To mount and use the LATCH child restraint fixing systems, observe the operating and safety information from the system manufac turer; otherwise, the level of protection may be reduced.

Mounts for the lower LATCH anchors The lower anchors may be used to attach the CRS to the vehicle seat up to a combined child and CRS weight of 65 lb/30 kg when the child is restrained by the internal harnesses.

Correctly engage the lower LATCH an chors

Make sure that the lower LATCH anchors have properly engaged and that the child restraint fixing system is resting snugly against the backrest; otherwise, the degree of protection offered may be reduced.

Seite 53

Transporting children safely Controls

53 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

The mounts for the lower LATCH anchors are located behind the indicated cover caps.

Before mounting the LATCH child restraint fix ing system, pull the belt away from the child restraint fixing system.

Mounting LATCH child restraint fixing systems 1. Mount the child restraint fixing system; re

fer to the operating instructions of the sys tem.

2. Ensure that both LATCH anchors are prop erly connected.

Child restraint fixing system with a tether strap

Mounting points

There are three mounting points, see arrows, for the upper retaining strap of LATCH child restraint fixing systems.

LATCH mounting eyes Only use the mounting eyes for the up

per LATCH retaining strap to secure child re straint fixing systems; otherwise, the mounting eyes could be damaged.

Retaining strap guide Retaining strap Make sure the upper retaining strap does

not run over sharp edges and is not twisted as it passes to the top anchor. Otherwise, the strap will not properly secure the child restraint fixing system in the event of an accident.

Outer rear seats

1 Direction of travel 2 Head restraint 3 Cargo area floor 4 Hook for upper retaining strap 5 Mounting point/eye 6 Backrest 7 Upper retaining strap

When using the cargo cover, pass the upper retaining strap between the rear seat backrest and the cargo cover.

Seite 54

Controls Transporting children safely

54 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

Center rear seat

1 Direction of travel 2 Head restraint 3 Cargo area floor 4 Hook for upper retaining strap 5 Mounting point/eye 6 Backrest 7 Upper retaining strap

When using the cargo cover, pass the upper retaining strap between the rear seat backrest and the cargo cover.

Attaching the upper retaining strap to the mounting point On outer rear seats:

1. Slide the head restraint upward. 2. Guide the upper retaining strap between

the supports of the head restraint. 3. Attach the hook of the retaining strap to

the mounting eye. 4. Pull the retaining strap taut. 5. Slide the head restraint into the bottom po

sition. On center rear seat:

1. Route the upper retaining strap over the middle of the head restraint.

2. Attach the hook of the retaining strap to the mounting eye.

3. Pull the retaining strap taut until it com presses the cushion of the head restraint, thus preventing the strap from sliding off.

Locking the doors and windows Rear doors

Push the locking lever on the rear doors down. The door can now be opened from the outside only.

Seite 55

Transporting children safely Controls

55 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

Safety switch for the rear Press the button on the driver's door if children are being transported in the

rear.

This locks the rear window switches so that the windows cannot be operated from the rear: safety switch, refer to page 41.

Seite 56

Controls Transporting children safely

56 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

Driving Vehicle equipment This chapter describes all series equipment as well as country-specific and special equipment offered for this model series.Therefore, it also describes equipment that may not be found in your vehicle, for instance due to the selected special equipment or the country version. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems.

Ignition lock Insert the remote control into the ignition lock

Insert the remote control all the way into the ignition lock. Radio ready state is switched on. Individual

electrical consumers can operate.

Comfort Access If the car is equipped with Comfort Access, only insert the remote control into the ignition lock, refer to page 37, under special circum stances.

Removing the remote control from the ignition lock

Do not forcibly pull the remote control out of the ignition lock

Do not forcibly pull the remote control out of the ignition lock as this may cause damage.

Before removing the remote control, push it all the way in to release the locking mechanism. The ignition is switched off if it was on.

Automatic transmission You can only take out the remote control if transmission position P is engaged: interlock.

Start/Stop button

Pressing the Start/Stop button switches the ignition on or off and starts the engine.

The engine starts if the brake pedal is pressed when you press the Start/Stop button.

Radio ready state Individual electrical consumers can operate. The time and the external temperature are dis played in the instrument cluster. Radio ready state is switched off automatically: When the remote control is removed from

the ignition lock.

Seite 57

Driving Controls

57 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

In cars with Comfort Access, refer to page 37, by touching the surface above the door lock.

Ignition on All electrical consumers can operate. The od ometer and trip odometer are displayed in the instrument cluster. To save battery power when the engine is off, switch off the ignition and any unnecessary electronic systems/power consumers.

Radio ready state and ignition off All indicator and warning lamps as well as dis plays in the instrument cluster go out.

Automatic transmission, 8-gear In certain situations, transmission position P is engaged automatically. To make it possible for the vehicle to roll, such as in an automatic car wash, follow the instructions in Car washes, re fer to page 263.

Starting the engine General information

Enclosed areas Do not let the engine run in enclosed

areas; otherwise, breathing of exhaust fumes may lead to loss of consciousness and death. The exhaust gases contain carbon monoxide, an odorless and colorless but highly toxic gas.

Unattended vehicle Do not leave the car unattended with the

engine running; otherwise, it presents a poten tial source of danger. Before leaving the car with the engine running, shift to neutral or engage transmission posi tion P and set the handbrake firmly; otherwise, the vehicle may begin to roll.

Frequent starting in quick succession Avoid repeated futile attempts at starting

the car and avoid starting the car frequently in quick succession. Otherwise, the fuel is not burned or is inadequately burned, and there is the danger of overheating and damaging the catalytic converter.

Do not wait for the engine to warm-up while the vehicle remains stationary. Start driving right away, but at moderate engine speeds.

Starting the engine

Automatic transmission Remote control in the ignition lock or, with Comfort Access, inside the vehicle, refer to page 37.

1. Depress the brake pedal. 2. Engage transmission position P if neces

sary. 3. Press the Start/Stop button. The ignition is activated automatically for a certain time and is stopped as soon as the en gine starts.

Seite 58

Controls Driving

58 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

Engine stop General information

Take the remote control with you Take the remote control with you when

leaving the vehicle so that children, for exam ple, cannot operate the windows and injure themselves.

Set the handbrake and further secure the vehicle as required

Set the handbrake firmly when parking; other wise, the vehicle may roll. On steep upward and downward inclines, further secure the ve hicle, for example, by turning the steering wheel in the direction of the curb.

Before driving into a car wash To make it possible for the vehicle to roll in an automatic car wash, follow the information on Washing in automatic car washes, refer to page 263.

Switching off the engine

Automatic transmission 1. Engage transmission position P with the

vehicle stopped. 2. Press the Start/Stop button. 3. Set the handbrake firmly. 4. Remove the remote control from the igni

tion lock, refer to page 57.

Automatic Engine Start/Stop Function The concept The Auto Start/Stop function helps save fuel. The system switches off the engine during a stop, for instance in congestion or at traffic lights. The ignition remains switched on. The

engine starts automatically when you wish to drive away. Certain vehicle components may experience additional wear as a result of this system.

Automatic operation The automatic engine Start/Stop function is operational after each engine start. It is acti vated whenever you drive forward faster than 3 mph/5 km/h.

Automatic engine stop The engine is switched off automatically dur ing a stop under the following conditions: Automatic transmission: The selector lever is in transmission posi

tion D. The brake pedal remains depressed while

the vehicle is at a standstill. The driver's safety belt is fastened or the

driver's door is closed. When the engine is switched off, the air vol ume of the automatic climate control is re duced.

Indicator lamp in the instrument cluster

The indicator lamp lights up when the Auto Start/Stop function is ready to start the engine automatically.

The indicator lamp lights up if the re quirements for an automatic engine stop are not fulfilled.

Note The engine is not switched off automatically in the following situations: External temperature too low. High external temperature and operation of

the automatic climate control.

Seite 59

Driving Controls

59 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

The interior is not yet heated or cooled as much as desired.

The engine is not yet at operating temper ature.

Sharp steering angle or the steering wheel is being turned.

After driving in reverse. Fogging of the windows when the auto

matic climate control is switched on. Vehicle battery charge is very low. Hood is unlocked. HDC is activated. Stop-and-go traffic. The selector lever is in position N or M/S.

The indicator lamp is lit.

Parking the vehicle during an automatic engine stop The vehicle can be parked safely during an au tomatic engine stop, such as when you wish to leave the vehicle.

1. Press the Start/Stop button. The ignition is switched off. The Auto Start/Stop function is deactivated. Automatic transmission: transmission po sition P is engaged automatically.

2. Set the handbrake. Start the engine as usual using the Start/Stop button.

Automatic engine start The engine starts automatically under the fol lowing conditions to enable the driver to drive away: Automatic transmission:

The brake pedal is released. After the engine starts, accelerate as usual.

Safety mode The engine does not start by itself after it is switched off automatically if any of the follow ing conditions are fulfilled: The driver's safety belt is unfastened or

the driver's door is open. Hood was unlocked.

The indicator lamp lights up. A mes sage appears on the Control Display. The engine can only be started via

the Start/Stop button.

Note Even if you do not wish to drive away, the stop ped engine still starts automatically in the fol lowing situations: The interior has heated up strongly with

the cooling function switched on. The steering wheel is turned. The vehicle begins to roll. Automatic transmission: the transmission

position is changed from D to N, R or M/S. Automatic transmission: the transmission

position is changed from P to N, D, R or M/S.

Fogging of the windows when the auto matic climate control is switched on.

Vehicle battery charge is very low. The interior has cooled down strongly with

the heating switched on. Low braking pressure, such as from de

pressing the brake pedal a number of times consecutively.

Preventing automatic engine stop with an automatic transmission

The concept To permit the driver to drive away especially quickly, such as at intersections, the automatic engine stop can be actively prevented.

Seite 60

Controls Driving

60 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

Preventing the engine stop using the brake pedal The engine stop can be actively prevented within one second after the vehicle comes to a standstill. Depress the brake pedal briefly and force

fully immediately after the vehicle comes to a standstill.

Then continue depressing the brake pedal with normal braking force.

Activating/deactivating the system manually

Press the button. LED lights up: the Auto Start/Stop function

is deactivated. The engine is started during an automatic engine stop. The engine can only be stopped or started via the Start/Stop button.

LED goes out: the Auto Start/Stop function is activated.

Automatic deactivation In certain situations, the Auto Start/Stop func tion is deactivated automatically in the interest of safety, for example if the driver's absence is detected.

Malfunction The indicator lamp lights up. The au tomatic engine start/stop function no longer switches of the engine auto

matically.A message appears on the Control Display. It is possible to continue driving. Have the system checked.

Handbrake The concept The handbrake is primarily intended to prevent the vehicle from rolling while parked; it brakes the rear wheels.

Indicator lamp The indicator lamp lights up and an acoustic signal sounds when driving away. The handbrake is still set.

Setting The lever engages automatically.

Releasing

Pull up slightly, press the button, and lower the lever.

Notes Using the handbrake while driving If it should become necessary to use the

handbrake while driving, do not pull the hand brake too forcefully. Keep the button on the handbrake lever pressed at all times. Excessive application of the handbrake can block the rear wheels and lead to fishtailing of the vehicle.

Seite 61

Driving Controls

61 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

To prevent corrosion and uneven brake action, lightly apply the handbrake from time to time when coasting, traffic conditions permitting. The brake lamps do not light up when the handbrake is pulled.

Turn signal, high beams, headlamp flasher Turn signal

Do not fold in the exterior mirrors While driving and when using the turn

signal/hazard warning flashers, do not fold in the exterior mirrors; otherwise, the additional turn signal lamps in the exterior mirrors will not be in the appropriate position and will be diffi cult to detect.

Press the lever beyond the resistance point. To switch off manually, press the lever to the resistance point. Unusually rapid flashing of the indicator lamp indicates that a turn signal bulb has failed.

Signaling a turn briefly Press the lever to the resistance point and hold it there for as long as you want the turn signal to flash.

Triple turn signal activation Press the lever to the resistance point. The turn signal flashes three times.

This function can be activated or deactivated:

1. "Settings" 2. "Lighting" 3. "Triple turn signal"

The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.

High beams, headlamp flasher

1 High beams 2 Headlamp flasher

Washer/wiper system Notes

Do not switch on the wipers if frozen Do not switch on the wipers if they are

frozen onto the windshield; otherwise, the wiper blades and the windshield wiper motor may be damaged.

Seite 62

Controls Driving

62 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

Do not use the wipers on a dry wind shield

Do not use the wipers on a dry windshield; oth erwise, the wiper blades may wear more rap idly or become damaged.

At a glance

1 Switching on wipers 2 Switching off wipers or brief wipe 3 Activating/deactivating intermittent wipe or

the rain sensor 4 Cleaning the windshield and headlamps 5 Setting speed for intermittent wipe or sen

sitivity of the rain sensor

Switching on wipers Press the wiper lever upward, arrow 1. The lever automatically returns to its initial po sition when released.

Normal wiper speed Press up once. The system switches to operation in the inter mittent mode when the vehicle is stationary.

Fast wiper speed Press up twice or press once beyond the re sistance point. The system switches to normal speed when the vehicle is stationary.

Switching off wipers or brief wipe Press the wiper lever down, arrow 2.

The lever automatically returns to its initial po sition when released. Brief wipe: press down once. To switch off normal wipe: press down

once. To switch off fast wipe: press down twice.

Intermittent wipe or rain sensor If the car is not equipped with a rain sensor, the intermittent-wipe time is a preset. If the car is equipped with a rain sensor, the time between wipes is controlled automatically and depends on the intensity of the rainfall. The rain sensor is mounted on the windshield, directly in front of the interior rearview mirror.

Activating intermittent wipe or the rain sensor

Press the button, arrow 3. The LED in the steering wheel stalk lights up and a wiping cycle is started.

Setting intermittent wipe or the sensitivity of the rain sensor Turn thumbwheel 5 up or down.

Deactivating intermittent wipe or the rain sensor Press the button again, arrow 3. The LED goes out.

Seite 63

Driving Controls

63 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

Deactivate the rain sensor in car washes Deactivate the rain sensor when passing

through an automatic car wash; otherwise, damage could be caused by undesired wiper activation.

Cleaning the windshield and headlamps Pull the lever, arrow 4. The system sprays washer fluid on the wind shield and activates the wipers briefly. When the vehicle lighting system is switched on, the headlamps are cleaned at regular and appropriate intervals.

Do not use the washer system at freezing temperatures

Do not use the washers if there is any danger that the fluid will freeze on the windshield; oth erwise, your vision could be obscured. For this reason, use antifreeze. Avoid using the washer when the reservoir is empty; otherwise, you could damage the pump.

Windshield washer nozzles The windshield washer nozzles are heated au tomatically while the engine is running or the ignition is switched on.

Fold-out position of the wipers Required when changing the wiper blades or under frosty conditions, for example.

1. Switch off the ignition. 2. Under frosty conditions, ensure that the

wiper blades are not frozen onto the wind shield.

3. Press the wiper lever up beyond the point of resistance and hold it for approx. 3 sec onds, until the wiper remains in a nearly vertical position.

After the wipers are folded back down, the washer/wiper system, refer to page 62, must be reactivated.

Fold the wipers back down Before switching the ignition on, fold the

wipers back down to the windshield; other wise, the wipers may become damaged when they are switched on.

1. Switch on the ignition. 2. Press the wiper levers down. The wipers

move to their resting position and are ready for operation.

Rear window wiper

1 Intermittent wipe When reverse gear is engaged, the system switches to continuous operation.

2 Cleaning the rear window

The rear window wiper does not move if the lever is in position 1 before the ignition is switched on. To switch on the rear window wiper:

1. Move the lever to its basic position. 2. Select the required position again.

Do not use the washing mechanisms when the washer fluid reservoir is empty

Do not use washing mechanisms when the washer fluid reservoir is empty, otherwise you will damage the washer pump.

Seite 64

Controls Driving

64 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

Washer fluid General information

Antifreeze for washer fluid Antifreeze is flammable and can cause

injuries if used improperly. Therefore, keep it away from sources of igni tion. Only keep it in the closed original container and inaccessible to children. Follow the notes and instructions on the con tainer. United States: The washer fluid mixture ratio is regulated by the U.S. EPA and many individual states; do not exceed the allowable washer fluid dilution ratios limits that apply. Follow the usage instructions on the washer fluid con tainer. Use BMW's Windshield Washer Con centrate or the equivalent.

Washer fluid reservoir Adding washer fluid Only add washer fluid when the engine is

cool, and then close the cover completely to avoid contact between the washer fluid and hot engine parts. Otherwise, there is the danger of fire and a risk to personal safety if the fluid is spilled.

All washer nozzles are supplied from one res ervoir. The recommended minimum filling quantity is 0.2 US gal/1 liter.

Fill with a mixture of window washing concen trate and tap water; if needed, add antifreeze according to the manufacturer instructions. Mix the washer fluid before adding to maintain the correct mixing ratio. Do not fill in undiluted window washing con centrate and antifreeze and do not fill in pure water; this could damage the washer system. Do not mix window washing concentrate from different manufacturers; this could cause the washer nozzles to clog.

Automatic transmission with Steptronic, 6-gear In addition to the fully automatic mode, gears can also be shifted manually using Steptronic, refer to page 66.

Parking the vehicle Secure the vehicle Before leaving the vehicle with the en

gine running, move the selector lever to posi tion P and set the handbrake; otherwise, the vehicle will begin moving.

Disengaging the remote control To remove the remote control from the ignition lock, first move the selector lever to position P and switch off the engine: interlock. Remove the remote control from the ignition lock, refer to page 57.

Selector lever positions P R N D M/S +

Seite 65

Driving Controls

65 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

Displays in the instrument cluster

The selector lever position is displayed and the engaged gear, such as M4, is displayed in manual mode.

Changing selector lever positions With the ignition switched on or the engine

running, the selector lever can be moved out of position P.

When the vehicle is stationary, step on the brake before shifting out of P or N; other wise, the selector lever is locked: shiftlock.

Press on the brake pedal until you start driving

To prevent the vehicle from creeping after you select a driving position, maintain pressure on the brake pedal until you are ready to start.

A lock prevents you from inadvertently engag ing selector lever positions R and P. To cancel the lock, press the button on the front of the selector lever, see arrow.

P Park Select only when the vehicle is stationary. The rear wheels are locked.

R is Reverse Select only when the vehicle is stationary.

N is Neutral Use in automatic car washes, for example. The vehicle can roll.

D Drive, automatic position Position for normal vehicle operation. All for ward gears are selected automatically. Under normal operating conditions, fuel con sumption is lowest when you are driving in po sition D.

Kickdown Kickdown is used to achieve maximum driving performance. Press on the accelerator beyond the resistance point at the full throttle position.

Sport program and manual mode M/S

Activating the Sport program

Move the selector lever from position D toward the left.

DS is displayed in the instrument cluster. This position is recommended for a perform ance-oriented driving style. To deactivate the Sport program or manual mode M/S, move the selector lever to the right into position D.

Seite 66

Controls Driving

66 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

Activating the M/S manual mode Move the selector lever from position D toward the left. Push the selector lever forward or backward. Manual mode becomes active and the gear is changed. The engaged gear is displayed in the instru ment cluster, e.g., M1. To shift down: press the selector lever for

ward. To shift up: press the selector lever back

ward. The vehicle only shifts up or down at appropri ate engine and road speeds, e.g., it does not shift down if the engine speed is too high. The selected gear is briefly displayed in the instru ment panel, followed by the current gear.

Shifting gears using the shift paddles on the steering wheel The shift paddles on the steering wheel allow you to shift gears quickly while keeping both hands on the steering wheel. When the shift paddles on the steering

wheel are used to shift gears while in auto matic mode, the transmission switches to manual mode.

If the shift paddles are not used to acceler ate or shift gears for a certain amount of time, the transmission switches back to automatic mode.

If the selector lever is in the M/S gear plane, manual mode remains active.

Shift up: briefly pull right shift paddle +. Shift down: briefly pull left shift paddle .

The vehicle only shifts up or down at appropri ate engine and road speeds, e.g., it does not shift down if the engine speed is too high. The selected gear is briefly displayed in the instru ment panel, followed by the current gear.

Overriding selector lever lock If the selector lever is locked in position P al though the ignition is switched on, the brake is depressed, and the button on the selector lever is pressed, the selector lever lock can be overridden:

1. Switch off the ignition. 2. Unclip the sleeve of the selector lever. 3. Pull the sleeve up over the selector lever

until the sleeve is inside out.

4. Using the screwdriver from the tool kit, re fer to page 249, press the red lever while moving the selector lever to the desired position with the button pressed.

Seite 67

Driving Controls

67 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

Automatic transmission with Steptronic, 8-gear Transmission positions

D Drive, automatic position Position for normal vehicle operation. All for ward gears are available. Under normal operating conditions, fuel con sumption is lowest when you are driving in po sition D.

Kickdown Kickdown is used to achieve maximum driving performance. Press on the accelerator beyond the resistance point at the full throttle position.

R is Reverse Select only when the vehicle is stationary.

N is Neutral The vehicle can roll. N remains engaged after the engine is switched off if the remote control remains in the ignition lock. This function can be used in an automatic car wash, refer to page 263, for example. P is automatically engaged after ap prox. 30 minutes.

P Park The drive wheels are blocked. P is engaged automatically when the following conditions are met: The driver's door is opened while the en

gine is running, the safety belt is not fas tened and neither the brake pedal nor the accelerator is activated.

The engine is switched off unless N is en gaged and the remote control is in the igni tion lock.

The remote control is removed from the ig nition lock.

Before leaving the vehicle, ensure that the transmission position P is engaged; otherwise, the vehicle may begin to roll.

Engaging transmission position Transmission position P can only be disen

gaged if the engine is running and the brake pedal is pressed.

With the vehicle stationary, press on the brake pedal before shifting out of P or N; otherwise, the shift command will not be executed: shift lock.

Press on the brake pedal until you start driving

To prevent the vehicle from creeping after you select a driving position, maintain pressure on the brake pedal until you are ready to start.

Engaging transmission positions D, R, N

Briefly push the selector lever in the desired di rection, beyond a resistance point if necessary. When shifting out of P or into R, simultane ously push the unlock button 1. The engaged transmission position is dis played on the selector lever. After releasing the selector lever, it returns to its center position.

Engaging transmission position P Select only when the vehicle is stationary.

Seite 68

Controls Driving

68 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

Press button P.

Sport program and manual mode M/S

Activating the Sport program

Push the selector lever to the left out of trans mission position D.

The Sport program is activated and DS is dis played in the instrument cluster. This position is recommended for a perform ance-oriented driving style.

Activating manual mode Push the selector lever to the left out of trans mission position D. Push the selector lever forward or backward. Manual mode becomes active and the gear is changed. The engaged gear is displayed in the instru ment cluster, e.g., M1. To shift down: press the selector lever for

ward. To shift up: press the selector lever back

ward.

The transmission only shifts up or down if the rpm and vehicle speed are appropriate. If the engine speed is too high, the transmission does not shift down. The selected gear is briefly displayed in the in strument panel, followed by the current gear.

Ending the Sport program/manual mode Push the selector lever to the right. D is displayed in the instrument cluster.

Shifting gears using the shift paddles on the steering wheel The shifting paddles make it possible to quickly change gears since both hands can re main on the steering wheel. If the shift paddles on the steering wheel

are used to shift gears while in automatic mode D, the transmission temporarily switches to manual mode.

If the shift paddles are not used to acceler ate or shift gears for a certain amount of time, the transmission switches back to automatic mode D.

With the transmission position M/S selected, the manual mode remains active.

Shift up: pull right shift paddle. Shift down: pull left shift paddle. The vehicle only shifts up or down at appropri ate engine and road speeds, e.g., it does not shift down if the engine speed is too high. The selected gear is briefly displayed in the in strument cluster, followed by the current gear.

Seite 69

Driving Controls

69 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

Displays in the instrument cluster

The transmission position is displayed and the engaged gear, such as M4, is displayed in manual mode.

Seite 70

Controls Driving

70 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

Displays Vehicle equipment This chapter describes all series equipment as well as country-specific and special equipment offered for this model series.Therefore, it also describes equipment that may not be found in your vehicle, for instance due to the selected special equipment or the country version. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems.

Odometer, external temperature display, clock

1 Knob in the instrument cluster 2 External temperature display and clock 3 Odometer and trip odometer

Knob in the instrument cluster Press the knob. When the ignition is switched on, the trip

odometer is reset. When the ignition is switched off, the time,

external temperature and odometer are displayed.

Units of measure To set the respective units of measure, miles or km for the odometer and or for the ex ternal temperature, refer to page 75.

The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.

Time, external temperature display Set the time, refer to page 75.

External temperature warning If the display drops to +37 /+3 , a signal sounds and a warning lamp lights up. There is the increased danger of ice.

Ice on roads Even at temperatures above

+37 /+3 , there can be a risk of ice on roads. Therefore, drive carefully on bridges and shady roads, for example, to avoid the increased dan ger of an accident.

Odometer and trip odometer Resetting trip odometer: With the ignition switched on, press button 1 in the instrument cluster.

When the vehicle is parked If you still want to view the time, external tem perature and odometer reading briefly after the remote control has been taken out of the igni tion lock: Press button 1 in the instrument cluster.

Seite 71

Displays Controls

71 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

Tachometer

Never force the engine speed up into the red warning field, see arrow. In this range, the fuel supply is interrupted to protect the engine.

Coolant temperature A warning lamp will come on if the coolant, and therefore the engine, becomes too hot. In addi tion, a message will appear on the Control Dis play. Check the coolant level, refer to page 246.

Current fuel consumption

Displays the current fuel consumption. You can check whether you are currently driving in an efficient and environmentally-friendly man ner.

Engine oil temperature

Cold engine: the pointer is at the low tem perature end. Drive at moderate engine and vehicle speeds.

Normal operating temperature: the pointer is in the middle or in the right half of the temperature display.

Hot engine: the pointer is at the high tem perature end. Switch off the engine imme diately and allow it to cool down.

If the engine oil temperature is too high, a mes sage appears on the Control Display. Check the oil level, refer to page 243.

Fuel gauge

The vehicle inclination may cause the display to vary. The arrow on the fuel pump symbol indicates the side of the vehicle with the fuel filler flap.

Notes on refueling, refer to page 228.

Range After the reserve range is reached:

Seite 72

Controls Displays

72 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

A message is briefly displayed on the Con trol Display.

The remaining range is shown on the com puter.

When a dynamic driving style is used, such as when corners are taken rapidly, engine functions are not ensured.

The message appears continuously below a range of approx. 30 miles/50 km.

Refuel promptly At the latest, refuel at a range below

30 miles/50 km; otherwise, the engine function is not ensured and damage may occur.

Computer Displaying information on the instrument panel

Press the computer button on the turn signal lever.

Information is displayed in the instrument clus ter.

Overview of the information Repeatedly pressing the button on the turn signal lever displays the information on the in strument cluster in the following order: Range. ECO PRO bonus range. Average speed. Average fuel consumption.

Current fuel consumption. No information. To set the corresponding units of measure, re fer to page 75.

Information in detail

Range Displays the estimated cruising range available with the remaining fuel. It is calculated based on your driving style over the last 18 miles/30 km.

Average speed Periods in which the vehicle was parked and the engine was switched off manually are not included in the average speed calculations. With the trip computer, refer to page 74, you can have the average speed displayed for an additional distance. To reset the average speed: press the button on the turn indicator lever for approx. 2 sec onds.

Average fuel consumption This is calculated for the period during which the engine is running. The average consumption is computed based on the distance traveled since the last time the computer was reset. You can have the average consumption for an other trip displayed, refer to Displays on the Control Display below. To reset the average consumption: press the button on the turn indicator lever for ap prox. 2 seconds.

Current fuel consumption Displays the current fuel consumption. You can check whether you are currently driving in an efficient and environmentally-friendly man ner.

Seite 73

Displays Controls

73 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

Displays on the Control Display Display the computer or trip computer on the Control Display.

1. "Vehicle Info" 2. "Onboard info" or "Trip computer"

Displays on the "Onboard info":

Range. Distance to destination. Estimated time of arrival if a destination

was entered in the navigation system, refer to page 144.

Displays on the "Trip computer":

Departure time. Trip duration.

Trip distance. Both displays show: Average fuel consumption and Average speed.

Resetting the fuel consumption and speed Resetting the values for average speed and average fuel consumption:

1. Select the respective menu item and press the controller.

2. Press the controller again to confirm your selection.

Resetting the trip computer Resetting all values:

1. "Vehicle Info" 2. "Trip computer" 3. "Reset"

Settings and information Operating concept Certain settings and information can only be called up when the ignition is switched on. A number of settings cannot be made while driv ing.

1 Button for: Selecting the display. Setting values.

2 Button for:

Seite 74

Controls Displays

74 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

Confirming the selected display or set values.

Calling up computer information73.

Symbol Function

With the lights switched on: Dimming instrument lighting, refer to page 87

Calling up Check Control, refer to page 80

Checking the engine oil level, refer to page 243

Setting the time, refer to page 75

Setting date, refer to page 76

Viewing service requirement display, refer to page 78

Exiting displays The external temperature reading and the time reappear when you press button 2 or if you make no entries within approx. 15 seconds. If required, complete the current setting first.

Units of measure The units for fuel consumption, route/distance, temperature, and pressure can be changed.

1. "Settings" 2. "Language/Units"

3. Select the desired menu item. 4. Select the desired unit. The settings are stored for the remote control currently in use.

Clock Setting the time

In the instrument cluster To set the 12h/24h format, refer to Setting the time format below.

1. Press button 1 in the turn indicator lever up or down repeatedly until the appropriate symbol appears in the display, accompa nied by the time and the word "SET".

2. Press button 2.

Seite 75

Displays Controls

75 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

3. Use button 1 to set the hours. 4. Press button 2 to confirm the entry. 5. Use button 1 to set the minutes. 6. Press button 2 to confirm the entry. 7. Press button 2.

The system accepts the new time.

Via the iDrive

1. Press the button. The main menu is displayed.

2. "Settings"

Setting the time zone 1. "Settings" 2. "Time/Date" 3. "Time zone:" 4. Select the desired time zone. The time zone is stored.

Setting the time 1. "Settings" 2. "Time/Date"

3. "Time:"

4. Turn the controller until the desired hours are displayed, and then press the control ler.

5. Turn the controller until the desired mi nutes are displayed, and then press the controller.

The time is stored.

Setting the time format 1. "Settings" 2. "Time/Date" 3. "Format:" 4. Select the desired format. The time format is stored. The settings are stored for the remote control currently in use.

Date The settings are stored for the remote control currently in use, Personal Profile, refer to page 30.

Setting the date

In the instrument cluster To set the dd/mm or mm/dd date format, refer to Setting the date format below.

1. Press button 1 in the turn indicator lever up or down repeatedly until the appropriate

Seite 76

Controls Displays

76 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

symbol appears in the display, accompa nied by the date and the word "SET".

2. Press button 2. 3. Use button 1 to set the day of the month. 4. Press button 2 to confirm the entry. 5. Set the month and the year in the same

way. 6. Press button 2.

The system stores the new date.

Via the iDrive 1. "Settings" 2. "Time/Date" 3. "Date:" 4. Turn the controller until the desired day is

displayed, and then press the controller. 5. Make the necessary settings for the month

and year. The date is stored.

Setting the date format 1. "Settings" 2. "Time/Date"

3. "Format:" 4. Select the desired format.

The date format is stored.

Settings on the Control Display Language

Setting the language 1. "Settings" 2. "Language/Units" 3. "Language:"

4. Select the desired language. The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.

Setting the voice dialog Voice dialog for the voice activation system, refer to page 26.

Seite 77

Displays Controls

77 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

Brightness

Setting the brightness The brightness is automatically adapted to the ambient lighting conditions. However, the ba sic setting can be adjusted.

1. "Settings" 2. "Control display" 3. "Brightness"

4. Turn the controller until the desired setting is selected.

5. Press the controller. The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use. Depending on the light conditions, the bright ness control may not be clearly visible.

Service requirements

The remaining driving distance and the date of the next scheduled service are displayed briefly immediately after you start the engine or switch on the ignition.

The current service requirements can be read out from the remote control by the service specialist. For certain maintenance operations, you can view the distance remaining or the due date for that operation in the instrument cluster.

1. Switch on the ignition, refer to page 58. 2. Lightly press button 1 in the turn indicator

lever up or down repeatedly until the ap propriate symbol appears in the display, accompanied by the words "SERVICE INFO".

3. Press button 2. 4. Use button 1 to scroll through the individ

ual service items.

Displays

Symbol Function

Service requirements

Engine oil

Seite 78

Controls Displays

78 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

Symbol Function

Roadworthiness test

Front brake pads

Rear brake pads

Brake fluid

The sequence of displayed service items may vary. First the data for the next maintenance are displayed.

Detailed information on service requirements More information on the scope of service re quired can be displayed on the Control Dis play.

1. "Vehicle Info" 2. "Vehicle status"

3. "Service required" Required maintenance procedures and legally mandated inspections are displayed. Additional information can be displayed on each entry: Select the entry and press the controller. To exit from the menu: Move the controller to the left.

Symbols

Symbols Description

No service is currently re quired.

The deadline for service or a legally mandated inspection is approaching.

The service deadline has al ready passed.

Entering dates Enter the dates for the required inspections. Make sure the date on the Control Display is set correctly, refer to page 76.

1. "Vehicle Info" 2. "Vehicle status" 3. "Service required" 4. " Vehicle inspection"

5. Open the menu for entering the deadline. 6. "Date:"

Seite 79

Displays Controls

79 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

7. Create the settings. 8. Press the controller to apply the setting.

The year is highlighted. 9. Turn the controller to make the adjust

ment. 10. Press the controller to apply the setting.

The date entry is stored. To exit from the menu: Move the controller to the left.

Automatic Service Request Data regarding the maintenance status or le gally mandated inspections of the vehicle are automatically transmitted to your service cen ter before a service due date. You can check when your service center was notified.

1. "Vehicle Info" 2. "Vehicle status" 3. Open "Options". 4. "Last Service Request"

Check Control The concept The Check Control monitors vehicle functions and alerts you to any malfunctions in the sys tems monitored. A Check Control message consists of indicator and warning lamps in the instrument cluster and, in some circumstances, an acoustic signal and text messages at the top of the Control Display.

Indicator/warning lamps

The indicator and warning lamps can light up in a variety of combinations and colors.

Several of the lamps are checked for proper functioning and light up temporarily when the engine is started or the ignition is switched on.

The symbol indicates that Check Control messages have been stored. The Check Con trol messages can be displayed later.

Text messages Text messages at the upper edge of the Con trol Display in combination with a symbol in the instrument cluster explain a Check Control message and the meaning of the indicator and warning lamps.

Supplementary text messages Additional information, such as on the cause of a fault or the required action, can be called up via Check Control. In urgent cases, this information will be shown as soon as the corresponding lamp comes on.

Seite 80

Controls Displays

80 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

Symbols The following functions can be selected within the supplementary text message, depending on the Check Control message. "Service request"

Contact the service partner. "Roadside Assistance"

Contact Roadside Assistance.

Hiding Check Control messages

Press the computer button in the turn signal lever.

Some Check Control messages are displayed until the malfunctions have been rectified. They cannot be hidden. If several malfunctions occur at once, the mes sages are displayed consecutively.

They are marked with the symbol shown here.

Other Check Control messages are hidden au tomatically after approx. 20 seconds. However, they are stored and can be displayed again later.

They are marked with the symbol shown here.

Viewing stored Check Control messages 1. Lightly press button 1 in the turn indicator

lever up or down repeatedly until the ap propriate symbol appears in the display,

accompanied by the words "CHECK CON TROL".

2. Press button 2. If there is no Check Control message, this is indicated by "CHECK OK. If a Check Control message has been stored, the cor responding lamp comes on. It is accompa nied by a text message on the Control Dis play.

3. Press button 1 to check for other mes sages.

4. Press button 2. The display again shows the external tem perature and the time.

Displaying stored Check Control messages 1. "Vehicle Info" 2. "Vehicle status" 3. "Check Control" 4. Select the text message.

Messages after trip completion Special messages that were displayed during a trip are displayed again after the ignition is switched off.

Speed limit Entry of a speed limit which, when reached, should cause a Check Control message to be issued.

Seite 81

Displays Controls

81 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

Renewed warning if the vehicle speed drops below the set speed limit once by at least 3 mph/5 km/h.

Displaying, setting or changing the limit 1. "Settings" 2. "Speed" 3. "Warning at:"

4. Turn the controller until the desired limit is displayed.

5. Press the controller. The speed limit is stored.

Applying your current speed as the limit 1. "Settings" 2. "Speed" 3. "Select current speed" The system adopts your current speed as the limit.

Activating/deactivating the limit 1. "Settings" 2. "Speed" 3. "Warning"

Seite 82

Controls Displays

82 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

Lamps Vehicle equipment This chapter describes all series equipment as well as country-specific and special equipment offered for this model series.Therefore, it also describes equipment that may not be found in your vehicle, for instance due to the selected special equipment or the country version. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems.

At a glance

1 Automatic headlamp control / adaptive light control / high-beam Assistant / wel come lamps / daytime running lights

2 Lamps off / daytime running lights 3 Parking lamps / daytime running lights 4 Low beams/welcome lamps 5 Fog lamps

Parking lamps/low beams, headlamp control General information If the driver's door is opened while the ignition is switched off, the exterior lighting is switched off automatically in the following switch set tings: 0, ,

Parking lamps Switch position : the vehicle lamps light up on all sides, e.g., for parking. Do not use the parking lamps for extended pe riods; otherwise, the battery may become dis charged and it would then be impossible to start the engine. When parking, it is preferable to switch on the one-sided roadside parking lamps, refer to page 85.

Low beams Switch position with the ignition switched on: the low beams light up.

Welcome lamps When parking the vehicle, leave the switch in position or : the parking and interior lamps light up briefly when the vehicle is un locked.

Activating/deactivating the welcome lamps 1. "Settings" 2. "Lighting" 3. "Welcome light"

The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.

Seite 83

Lamps Controls

83 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

Headlamp courtesy delay feature The low beams stay lit for a short while after the ignition is switched off, if the lamps are switched off and the headlamp flasher is switched on.

Setting the duration 1. "Settings" 2. "Lighting" 3. "Pathway light.: s"

4. Set the duration. The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.

Automatic headlamp control Switch position : the low beams are switched on and off automatically, e.g., in tun nels, in twilight or if there is precipitation. The LED next to the symbol lights up. A blue sky with the sun low on the horizon can cause the lights to be switched on. The low beams remain switched on independ ent of the ambient lighting conditions when you switch on the front fog lamps.

Personal responsibility The automatic headlamp control cannot

serve as a substitute for your personal judg ment in determining when the lamps should be switched on in response to ambient lighting conditions.

For example, the sensors are unable to detect fog or hazy weather. To avoid safety risks, you should always switch on the lamps manually under these conditions.

Daytime running lights The daytime running lights light up in posi tion 0, and . After the ignition is switched off, the parking lamps light up in po sition .

Activating/deactivating 1. "Settings" 2. "Lighting" 3. "Daytime running lamps"

The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.

Adaptive Light Control The concept Adaptive Light Control is a variable headlamp control system that enables dynamic illumina tion of the road surface. Depending on the steering angle and other pa rameters, the light from the headlamp follows the course of the road. In sharp curves, e.g. serpentines, or during turning, up to a certain speed one of the two front fog lamps is switched on as a turning lamp. This provides improved illumination of the area inside the curve.

Seite 84

Controls Lamps

84 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

Controls

Activating Switch position with the ignition switched on. The turning lamps are automatically switched on depending on the steering angle or the use of turn signals. To avoid blinding oncoming traffic, the Adap tive Light Control does not swivel to the driv er's side when the vehicle is at a standstill. When driving in reverse, both turning lamps are active.

Malfunction The warning lamp lights up.A mes sage appears on the Control Display. Adaptive Light Control is malfunc

tioning or has failed. Have the system checked as soon as possible.

High beams/roadside parking lamps

1 High beams 2 Headlamp flasher 3 Roadside parking lamps

Left and right roadside parking lamps The vehicle can be illuminated on one side.

Switching on After parking the vehicle, press the lever up or down beyond the resistance point for ap prox. 2 seconds, arrow 3. The roadside parking lamps drain the battery. Therefore, do not leave them on for unduly long periods of time; otherwise, the battery might not have enough power to start the en gine.

Switching off Briefly press the lever in the opposite direction to the pressure point, arrow 3.

High-beam Assistant The concept When the lights are switched on, this system automatically switches the high beams on and off. The procedure is controlled by a sensor on the front of the interior rearview mirror. The as sistant ensures that the high beams are switched on whenever the traffic situation al lows. The driver can intervene at any time and switch the high beams on and off as usual.

Activating the High-beam Assistant 1. Turn the light switch to . 2. With the low beams switched on, briefly

push the turn indicator lever in the direc tion of the high beam.

The indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. The high beams are switched on and off automatically.

The system responds to light from oncoming traffic and traffic driving ahead of you, and to adequate illumination, e.g., in towns and cities.

Seite 85

Lamps Controls

85 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

Switching the high beams on and off manually

High beams on, arrow 1. High beams off/headlamp flasher, arrow 2.

To reactivate the High-beam Assistant, briefly push the turn indicator lever toward the high beams.

Activating/deactivating via iDrive 1. "Settings" 2. "Lighting" 3. "High beam assistant"

The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.

System limits Personal responsibility The High-beam Assistant cannot serve

as a substitute for the driver's personal judg ment of when to use the high beams. There fore, manually switch off the high beams in sit uations where this is required to avoid a safety risk.

The system is not fully functional in situations such as the following, and driver intervention may be necessary: In very unfavorable weather conditions,

such as fog or heavy precipitation. In detecting poorly-lit road users, such as

pedestrians, cyclists, horseback riders and wagons; when driving close to train or ship traffic; and at animal crossings.

In tight curves, on hilltops or in depres sions, in cross traffic or half-obscured on coming traffic on freeways.

In poorly-lit towns and cities and in the presence of highly reflective signs.

At low speeds. When the windshield in front of the interior

rearview mirror is fogged over, dirty or cov ered with stickers, etc.

If the sensor view field is dirty. The view field of the sensor is located on the front of the interior rearview mirror. Do not cover this area with stickers, etc. Clean the sensor view field with a cloth moistened with a small amount of glass cleaner.

Fog lamps Front fog lamps The parking lamps or low beams must be switched on.

Press the button. The green indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights

up.

If the automatic headlamp control, refer to page 84, is activated, the low beams will come on automatically when you switch on the fog lamps.

Seite 86

Controls Lamps

86 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

Instrument lighting The parking lamps or low beams must be switched on to adjust the brightness.

1. Push button 1 up or down repeatedly until the appropriate symbol appears in the dis play, accompanied by the brightness set ting and the word "SET".

2. Press button 2. 3. Push button 1 up or down to select the de

sired brightness level.

4. Press button 2. The display again shows the external tem perature and the time.

Interior lamps General information The interior lamps, footwell lamps, , cargo area lamps, and courtesy lamps are controlled auto matically. The LEDs for the courtesy lamps are set in the door handles and illuminate the ground in front of the doors.

To avoid draining the battery, all lamps inside the car are switched off about 8 minutes after the ignition is switched off, Start/Stop button, refer to page 57.

Switching the interior lamps on and off

Press the button.

To switch off permanently: press the button for approx. 3 seconds. To clear this setting: briefly press the button.

Reading lamps Press the button.

Reading lamps are located at the front and rear next to the interior lamps.

Danger of burns Do not reach into the opening of the

lamps; otherwise, there is a risk of burns.

Ambient lighting Depending on the equipment, the interior light ing can be set individually for some lamps.

Selecting the color scheme 1. "Settings" 2. "Lighting" 3. "Ambient:" 4. Select the desired setting.

Seite 87

Lamps Controls

87 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

Safety Vehicle equipment This chapter describes all series equipment as well as country-specific and special equipment offered for this model series.Therefore, it also

describes equipment that may not be found in your vehicle, for instance due to the selected special equipment or the country version. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems.

Airbags

1 Front airbags 2 Head airbags

3 Side airbags 4 Knee airbag

Front airbags Front airbags help protect the driver and front passenger by responding to frontal impacts in which safety belts alone cannot provide ade quate restraint.

Side airbags In a lateral impact, the side airbag supports the side of the body in the chest and lap area.

Head airbags In a lateral impact, the head airbag supports the head.

Knee airbag The knee airbag supports the legs in a frontal impact.

Seite 88

Controls Safety

88 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

Protective action Airbags are not triggered in every impact situa tion, e.g., in less severe accidents or rear-end collisions.

Information on how to ensure the optimal protective effect of the airbags

Keep at a distance from the airbags. Always grasp the steering wheel on the

steering wheel rim, holding your hands at the 3 o'clock and 9 o'clock positions, to keep the danger of injury to your hands or arms as low as possible if the airbag is trig gered.

There should be no people, animals, or ob jects between an airbag and a person.

Do not use the cover of the front airbag on the front passenger side as a storage area.

Keep the dashboard and window on the front passenger side clear, i.e., do not cover with adhesive labels or coverings, and do not attach holders such as for navi gation instruments and mobile phones.

Make sure that the front passenger is sit ting correctly, i.e., keeps his or her feet and legs in the footwell; otherwise, leg injuries can occur if the front airbag is triggered.

Do not place slip covers, seat cushions or other objects on the front passenger seat that are not approved specifically for seats with integrated side airbags.

Do not hang pieces of clothing, such as jackets, over the backrests.

Make sure that occupants keep their heads away from the side airbag and do not rest against the head airbag; otherwise, injuries can occur if the airbags are triggered.

Do not remove the airbag restraint system. Do not remove the steering wheel. Do not apply adhesive materials to the air

bag cover panels, cover them or modify them in any way.

Never modify either the individual compo nents or the wiring in the airbag system. This also applies to steering wheel covers, the dashboard, the seats, the roof pillars and the sides of the headliner.

Even when all instructions are followed closely, injury from contact with the airbags cannot be ruled out in certain situations. The ignition and inflation noise may lead to short-term and, in most cases, temporary hearing impairment in sensitive individuals.

In the case of a malfunction, deactivation and after triggering of the airbags

Do not touch the individual components imme diately after the system has been triggered; otherwise, there is the danger of burns. Only have the airbags checked, repaired or dis mantled and the airbag generator scrapped by your service center or a workshop that has the necessary authorization for handling explo sives. Non-professional attempts to service the sys tem could lead to failure in an emergency or undesired triggering of the airbag, either of which could result in injury.

Warnings and information on the airbags are also found on the sun visors.

Automatic deactivation of the front passenger airbags The system determines whether the front pas senger seat is occupied by measuring the re sistance of the human body. The front and side airbags on the front passen ger side are activated or deactivated accord ingly by the system. The indicator lamp above the interior rearview mirror shows the current status of the front passenger airbags, deactivated or activated, refer to Front passenger airbag indicator lamp below.

Seite 89

Safety Controls

89 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

Leave feet in the footwell Make sure that the front passenger

keeps his or her feet in the footwell; otherwise, the front passenger airbags may not function properly.

Child restraint fixing system in the front passenger seat

Before transporting a child on the front pas senger seat, refer to the safety notes and in structions under Children on the front passen ger seat, refer to page 52.

Malfunction of the automatic deactivation system When transporting older children and adults, the front passenger airbags may be deacti vated in certain sitting positions. In this case, the indicator lamp for the front passenger air bags lights up. In this case, change the sitting position so that the front passenger airbags are activated and the indicator lamp goes out. If it is not possible to activate the airbags, have the person sit in the rear. To make sure that occupation of the seat cushion can be detected correctly: Do not attach seat covers, seat cushion

padding, ball mats or other items to the passenger seat unless they are specifically recommended by BMW.

Do not place electronic devices on the pas senger seat if a child restraint fixing system is mounted on the seat.

Do not place objects under the seat that could press against the seat from below.

Indicator lamp for the front passenger airbags

The indicator lamp for the front passenger air bags indicates the operating state of the front passenger airbags. The lamp indicates whether the airbags are ac tivated or deactivated.

The indicator lamp lights up when a child who is properly seated in a child restraint fix ing system intended for that purpose is detected on the seat or the seat is empty. The airbags on the front passenger side are not acti vated.

The indicator lamp does not light up when, for example, a correctly seated person of sufficient size is detected on the seat. The airbags on the front passenger side are ac tivated.

Most child seats are detected by the system, Especially the child seats required by NHTSA at the time that the vehicle was manufactured. After installing a child seat, make sure that the indicator lamp for the front passenger airbags lights up. This indicates that the child seat has been detected and the front passenger airbags are not activated.

Seite 90

Controls Safety

90 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

Operational readiness of airbag system

When the ignition is switched on,, refer to page 58, the warning lamp comes on briefly to indicate that the entire airbag

system and the belt tensioners are operational.

Airbag system malfunction The warning lamp does not light up after

the ignition is switched on. Warning lamp remains permanently on.

Have the airbag system checked without delay if there is a malfunction

In the event of a malfunction in the airbag sys tem, have it checked without delay; otherwise, there is the risk that the system will not func tion as intended even if a sufficiently severe accident occurs.

FTM Flat Tire Monitor The concept The system does not measure the actual infla tion pressure in the tires. It detects a pressure loss in a tire by comparing the rotational speeds of the individual wheels while moving. In the event of a pressure loss, the diameter and therefore the rotational speed of the corre sponding wheel change. This is detected and reported as a flat tire.

Functional requirements The system must have been initialized when the tire inflation pressure was correct; other wise, reliable signaling of a flat tire is not en sured. Initialize the system after each correc tion of the tire inflation pressure and after every tire or wheel change.

System limits Sudden tire damage Sudden serious tire damage caused by

external influences cannot be indicated in ad vance.

A natural, even pressure loss in all four tires cannot be detected. Therefore, check the tire inflation pressure regularly. The system could be delayed or malfunction in the following situations: When the system has not been initialized. When driving on a snowy or slippery road

surface. Sporty driving style: slip in the drive

wheels, high lateral acceleration. When driving with snow chains.

Status display The current status of the Flat Tire Monitor can be displayed on the Control Display, e.g., whether or not the FTM is active.

1. "Vehicle Info" 2. "Vehicle status" 3. "Flat Tire Monitor" The status is displayed.

Initialization The initialization process adopts the set infla tion tire pressures as reference values for the detection of a flat tire. Initialization is started by confirming the inflation pressures.

Seite 91

Safety Controls

91 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

Do not initialize the system when driving with snow chains.

1. "Vehicle Info" 2. "Vehicle status" 3. "Reset" 4. Start the engine - do not drive away. 5. Start the initialization with "Reset". 6. Drive away. The initialization is completed while driving, which can be interrupted at any time. The initialization automatically continues when driving resumes.

Indication of a flat tire The warning lamp lights up red. A message appears on the Control Dis play. In addition, a signal sounds.

There is a flat tire or a major loss in tire inflation pressure. Reduce your speed and stop cautiously. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneuvers.

Do not continue driving without run-flat tires

Do not continue driving if the vehicle is not equipped with run-flat tires; continued driving may result in serious accidents.

When a flat tire is indicated, DSC Dynamic Sta bility Control is switched on if necessary.

Actions in the event of a flat tire

Run-flat tires

Maximum speed You can continue driving with a damaged tire at speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h.

Continued driving with a flat tire If continuing to drive with a damaged tire:

1. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu vers.

2. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h. 3. At the next opportunity, check the inflation

pressure in all four tires. If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is correct, the Flat Tire Monitor may not have been initialized. In this case, initialize the system.

Possible driving distance with complete loss of tire inflation pressure: The possible driving distance after a loss of tire inflation pressure depends on the cargo load and the driving style and conditions. For a vehicle containing an average load, the possible driving distance is ap prox. 50 miles/80 km. When the vehicle is driven with a damaged tire, its handling characteristics change, e.g., re duced lane stability during braking, a longer braking distance, and altered self-steering properties. Adjust your driving style accord ingly. Avoid abrupt steering maneuvers or driv ing over obstacles, e. g., curbs, potholes, etc. Because the possible driving distance de pends on how the vehicle is used during the trip, the actual distance may be smaller or greater depending on the driving speed, road conditions, external temperature, cargo load, etc.

Continued driving with a flat tire Drive moderately and do not exceed a

speed of 50 mph/80 km/h. A loss of tire inflation pressure results in a change in the handling characteristics, e.g., re duced lane stability during braking, a longer braking distance and altered self-steering properties.

Seite 92

Controls Safety

92 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

Final tire failure Vibrations or loud noises while driving

can indicate the final failure of the tire. Reduce speed and stop; otherwise, pieces of the tire could come loose and cause an accident. Do not continue driving, and contact your service center.

Tire Pressure Monitor TPM The concept The tire inflation pressure is measured in the four mounted tires. The system notifies you if there is a significant loss of pressure in one or more tires.

Functional requirements The system must have been reset while the in flation pressure was correct; otherwise, reliable signaling of a flat tire is not ensured. Always use wheels with TPM electronics to ensure that the system will operate properly. Reset the system after each correction of the tire inflation pressure and after every tire or wheel change.

System limits Sudden tire damage Sudden serious tire damage caused by

external influences cannot be indicated in ad vance.

The system does not operate correctly if it has not been reset. For example, a flat tire may be indicated despite correct tire inflation pres sures. The system is inactive and cannot indicate a flat tire: For a mounted wheel without TPM elec

tronics. When the TPM is disturbed by other sys

tems or devices with the same radio fre quency.

Status display 1. "Vehicle Info" 2. "Vehicle status" 3. "TPM" The status is displayed.

Status indicator on the Control Display The tire and system status is indicated by the color of the tires. A change in the tire inflation pressure during driving is taken into account. A correction is only necessary if this is indi cated by the TPM

Wheels, green The tire inflation pressure is equal to the target state.

One wheel is yellow A flat tire or major drop in inflation pressure in the indicated tire.

All wheels are yellow A flat tire or major drop in inflation pressure

in several tires. The system was not reset after a wheel

change and thus issues a warning based on the inflation pressures initialized last.

A flat tire in one or more tires while the sys tem is being reset.

Wheels, gray The system cannot detect a flat tire. Reasons for this may be: TPM is being reset. Disturbance by systems or devices with

the same radio frequency. Malfunction.

Seite 93

Safety Controls

93 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

Resetting the system Reset the system after each correction of the tire inflation pressure and after every tire or wheel change.

1. "Vehicle Info" 2. "Vehicle status" 3. "Reset" 4. Start the engine - do not drive away. 5. Reset the tire pressure using "Reset". 6. Drive away.

The tires are shown in gray and "Resetting TPM..." is displayed.

After driving for a few minutes, the set tire in flation pressures are applied as set values. The resetting process is completed automatically as you drive. The tires are shown in green and "TPM active" is shown on the Control Display. The trip can be interrupted at any time. If you drive away again, the process resumes auto matically. If a flat tire is detected while the system is re setting, all tires on the Control Display are dis played in yellow. The message "Low tire!" is shown.

Low tire pressure message The small warning lamp lights up yel low and the large warning lamp lights up red. A message appears on the Control Display. In addition, a signal

sounds. There is a flat tire or a major loss in tire in

flation pressure. The system was not reset after a wheel

change and thus issues warnings based on the inflation pressures initialized last.

Reduce your speed and stop cautiously. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneuvers.

Do not continue driving without run-flat tires

Do not continue driving if the vehicle is not equipped with run-flat tires; continued driving may result in serious accidents.

When a low inflation pressure is indicated, DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on if necessary.

Actions in the event of a flat tire

Run-flat tires

Maximum speed You can continue driving with a damaged tire at speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h.

Continued driving with a flat tire If continuing to drive with a damaged tire:

1. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu vers.

2. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h. 3. Check the air pressure in all four tires at

the next opportunity. If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is correct, the Tire Pressure Monitor may not have been reset. Reset the system.

Possible driving distance with complete loss of tire inflation pressure: The possible driving distance after a loss of tire inflation pressure depends on the cargo load and the driving style and conditions. For a vehicle containing an average load, the possible driving distance is ap prox. 50 miles/80 km. When the vehicle is driven with a damaged tire, its handling characteristics change, e.g., re duced lane stability during braking, a longer braking distance, and altered self-steering properties. Adjust your driving style accord ingly. Avoid abrupt steering maneuvers or driv ing over obstacles, e. g., curbs, potholes, etc.

Seite 94

Controls Safety

94 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

Because the possible driving distance de pends on how the vehicle is used during the trip, the actual distance may be smaller or greater depending on the driving speed, road conditions, external temperature, cargo load, etc.

Continued driving with a flat tire Drive moderately and do not exceed a

speed of 50 mph/80 km/h. A loss of tire inflation pressure results in a change in the handling characteristics, e.g., re duced lane stability during braking, a longer braking distance and altered self-steering properties.

Final tire failure Vibrations or loud noises while driving

can indicate the final failure of the tire. Reduce speed and stop; otherwise, pieces of the tire could come loose and cause an accident. Do not continue driving, and contact your service center.

Message when the system was not reset

The yellow warning lamp lights up. A message appears on the Control Dis play.

The system detected a wheel change but was not reset. Warnings regarding the current tire inflation pressure are not reliable. Check the tire inflation pressure and reset the system.

Malfunction The small warning lamp flashes in yellow and then lights up continu ously; the larger warning lamp comes on in yellow. On the Control Display,

the tires are shown in gray and a message ap pears. No flat tire can be detected.

Display in the following situations: A wheel without TPM electronics is fitted:

have the service center check it if neces sary.

Malfunction: have the system checked by your service center.

TPM could not be fully reset. Reset the system again.

The small warning lamp flashes in yellow and then lights up continu ously; the larger warning lamp comes on in yellow. On the Control Display,

the tires are shown in gray and a message ap pears. No flat tire can be detected.

Display in the following situations: Disturbance by systems or devices with

the same radio frequency: after leaving the area of the disturbance, the system auto matically becomes active again.

Declaration according to NHTSA/ FMVSS 138 Tire Pressure Monitoring Systems Each tire, including the spare (if provided) should be checked monthly when cold and in flated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label (If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.). As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pres sure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pres sure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel ef

Seite 95

Safety Controls

95 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

ficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's handling and stopping ability. Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driv er's responsibility to maintain correct tire pres sure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale. Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle startups as long as the malfunction exists. When the mal function indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the in stallation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to en sure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.

Brake force display The concept

During normal brake application, the outer brake lamps light up.

During heavy brake application, the inner brake lamps light up in addition.

Seite 96

Controls Safety

96 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

Driving stability control systems Vehicle equipment This chapter describes all series equipment as well as country-specific and special equipment offered for this model series.Therefore, it also describes equipment that may not be found in your vehicle, for instance due to the selected special equipment or the country version. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems.

Antilock Brake System ABS ABS prevents locking of the wheels during braking. The vehicle remains steerable even during full brake applications, thus increasing active safety. ABS is operational every time you start the en gine.

Electronic brake-force distribution The system controls the brake pressure in the rear wheels to ensure stable braking behavior.

Brake assistant When you apply the brakes rapidly, this system automatically produces the maximum braking force boost. It thus helps to achieve the short est possible braking distance during full brak ing. This system utilizes all of the benefits pro vided by ABS. Do not reduce the pressure on the brake pedal for the duration of the full braking.

Dynamic Stability Control DSC The concept DSC prevents traction loss in the driving wheels when driving away and accelerating. DSC also recognizes unstable vehicle condi tions, such as fishtailing or nose-diving. Sub ject to physical limits, DSC helps to keep the vehicle on a steady course by reducing engine speed and by applying brakes to the individual wheels.

Adjust your driving style to the situation An appropriate driving style is always the

responsibility of the driver. The laws of physics cannot be repealed, even with DSC. Do not reduce the additional safety margin with a risky driving style, as otherwise there is a risk of an accident.

Deactivating DSC: DSC OFF When DSC is deactivated, driving stability is reduced during acceleration and when driving in bends. To increase vehicle stability, activate DSC again as soon as possible.

Deactivating DSC

Seite 97

Driving stability control systems Controls

97 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

Press and hold the button, but not lon ger than approx. 10 seconds, until the

indicator lamp for DSC lights up in the instru ment cluster and DSC OFF is displayed. DTC Dynamic Traction Control and DSC are deacti vated together.

In the interest of better forward momentum, brake intervention is performed in the manner of a differential lock when the drive wheels spin quickly even if DSC is deactivated.

Activating DSC Press the button. DSC OFF and the indicator lamp in the

instrument cluster go out.

For better control The indicator lamp flashes: DSC con trols the drive forces and brake forces. The indicator lamp lights up: DSC and

DTC has failed.

DSC deactivated: The indicator lamp lights up and DSC OFF appears in the instrument cluster.

DSC and DTC deactivated.

Dynamic Traction Control DTC The concept The DTC system is a version of the DSC in which forward momentum is optimized. The system ensures maximum forward mo mentum on special road conditions, e.g., unp lowed snowy roads, but driving stability is lim ited. It is therefore necessary to drive with appropri ate caution. You may find it useful to briefly activate DTC under the following special circumstances: When driving in sand, on snowy inclines, in

slush, or on unplowed, snow-covered road surfaces

When rocking a vehicle free or starting off in deep snow, sand, or on loose ground

When driving with snow chains.

Deactivating/activating DTC Dynamic Traction Control Activating the Dynamic Traction Control DTC provides maximum traction on loose ground. Driving stability is limited during acceleration and when driving in bends.

Activating DTC

Press the button. TRACTION is displayed in the instru

ment cluster and the indicator lamp for DSC OFF lights up.

Seite 98

Controls Driving stability control systems

98 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

Deactivating DTC Press the button again. TRACTION and the indicator lamp in

the instrument cluster go out.

For better control The indicator lamp flashes: DTC con trols the drive forces and brake forces. The indicator lamp lights up: DSC and

DTC has failed.

DTC activated: The indicator lamp lights up and TRACTION appears in the instrument cluster.

DTC is activated.

Performance Control Performance Control enhances the agility of your vehicle. To enhance performance during sporty driving, the rear wheel on the inside of the curve is braked while the resulting braking effect is largely compensated by engine inter vention.

xDrive xDrive is the all-wheel-drive system of your ve hicle. The combined effects of xDrive and DSC further optimize the traction and dynamic driv ing characteristics. The 4-wheel drive system xDrive variably distributes the drive forces to

the front and rear axle depending on the driv ing situation and prevailing road conditions.

Hill Descent Control HDC The concept HDC is a downhill driving assistant that auto matically controls vehicle speed on steep downhill gradients. Without requiring brake ap plication, the vehicle moves at slightly more than twice walking speed. You can activate the Hill Descent Control at speeds below approx. 22 mph/35 km/h. When driving downhill at below approx. 22 mph/35 km/h, the vehicle reduces its speed to approx. twice walking speed and keeps it constant. While you are actively braking, the system is on standby. The system does not brake the vehicle during this time.

Increasing or reducing speed The speed can be changed in the range from roughly twice walking speed to approx. 15 mph/25 km/h by pressing the accelerator or brake pedal lightly. A target speed within the same range can be specified using the lever of the cruise control.

1 Increasing speed 2 Decreasing speed

Seite 99

Driving stability control systems Controls

99 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

Activating HDC

Press the button; the LED above the button lights up.

The LED flashes when the brakes are applied automatically.

Deactivating HDC Press the button again; the LED goes out. HDC is automatically deactivated

above approx. 37 mph/60 km/h.

Using HDC HDC can be used in every driving position.

Displays in the instrument cluster

1 Display for target speed 2 HDC display

Malfunction If the HDC display goes out during HDC opera tion or is not displayed: HDC is not available due to high brake temperatures or DSC has failed.

Drive-off assistant This system supports driving away on gradi ents. The handbrake is not required.

1. Hold the vehicle in place with the foot brake.

2. Release the foot brake and drive away without delay.

Depending on the vehicle load, the vehicle may roll back slightly.

Driving off without delay After releasing the foot brake, start driv

ing without delay, since the drive-off assistant will not hold the vehicle in place for more than approx. 2 seconds and the vehicle will begin rolling back.

Servotronic The concept The Servotronic varies the steering force re quired to turn the wheels depending on the speed at which you are driving. Power steering provides strong support at low speeds, which means that less effort is needed to turn the wheels. Power steering support lessens as your speed increases.

Malfunction The warning lamp lights up.A mes sage appears on the Control Display. Servotronic is malfunctioning or has

failed. Have the system checked as soon as possible.

Seite 100

Controls Driving stability control systems

100 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

Driving comfort Vehicle equipment This chapter describes all series equipment as well as country-specific and special equipment offered for this model series.Therefore, it also describes equipment that may not be found in your vehicle, for instance due to the selected special equipment or the country version. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems.

Cruise control The concept The system is functional at speeds beginning at approx. 20 mph/30 km/h. The speed specified using the lever on the steering column is maintained. The system brakes on downhill gradients if en gine braking action is insufficient.

Do not use cruise control Do not use the system if unfavorable

conditions make it impossible to drive at a con stant speed, for instance: On curvy roads. In heavy traffic. On slippery roads, in fog, snow or rain, or

on a loose road surface. Otherwise, you could lose control of the vehi cle and cause an accident.

One lever for all functions

1 Storing and maintaining speed or acceler ating

2 Storing and maintaining speed or deceler ating

3 Deactivating cruise control 4 Resuming a speed stored beforehand

Maintaining current speed Push, arrow 1, or pull, arrow 2, the lever to the resistance point. The car's current speed is stored and main tained. It is displayed on the speedometer and briefly in the instrument cluster. On uphill gradients, it may prove impossible to maintain the set speed if current engine power output is insufficient. If the engine braking ef fect is insufficient on downhill slopes, the sys tem will brake the vehicle slightly.

Increasing desired speed Repeatedly press the lever to the resistance point or beyond, arrow 1, until the desired speed is reached. Each time the lever is pressed to the point

of resistance, the desired speed increases by approx. 1 mph/1 km/h.

Each time the lever is pressed beyond the resistance point, the desired speed is in creased by up to 5 mph/10 km/h.

Seite 101

Driving comfort Controls

101 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

The system stores and maintains the speed.

Accelerating using the lever Accelerating slightly: Press the lever to the resistance point, arrow 1, until the desired speed is reached. Accelerating significantly: Press the lever beyond the resistance point, arrow 1, until the desired speed is reached. The vehicle accelerates without pressure on the accelerator pedal. The system stores and maintains the speed.

Decreasing speed Repeatedly pull the lever to the resistance point or beyond, arrow 2, until the desired speed is displayed. Each time the lever is pulled to the resist

ance point, the desired speed is decreased by approx. 1 mph/1 km/h.

Each time the lever is pulled beyond the resistance point, the desired speed is re duced by up to 5 mph/10 km/h until the minimum speed of 20 mph/30 km/h is ach ieved.

The system stores and maintains the speed.

Deactivating cruise control Push the lever upwards or downwards, ar row 3. The displays in the speedometer go out. In addition, the system is automatically deacti vated when: The brakes are applied. Selector lever position N is engaged or

transmission position D is disengaged. When DTC is activated or DSC is deacti

vated. When DSC or ABS is intervening. Cruise control is not deactivated by depressing the accelerator pedal. Once the accelerator

pedal is released, the stored speed is achieved again and maintained.

Warning lamp The warning lamp comes on when cruise control has been deactivated as a result of DSC intervention, for

example. A message appears on the Control Display.

Resuming a speed stored beforehand Press the button, arrow 4. The last stored speed is resumed and maintained. In the following cases, the stored speed value is deleted and cannot be called up again: When driving stability control systems in

tervene. When selector lever position N is engaged

or transmission position D is disengaged. When the ignition is switched off.

Displays in the instrument cluster

1 Stored speed 2 Selected speed is displayed briefly

If the display --- mph or --- km/h appears briefly, conditions may not be adequate to op erate the system. Call up Check Control messages, refer to page 81.

Seite 102

Controls Driving comfort

102 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

Malfunction The warning lamp lights up. The sys tem is malfunctioning or has failed. A message appears on the Control

Display. More information, refer to page 80.

Park Distance Control PDC The concept In addition to the PDC Park Distance Control, the backup camera, refer to page 105, can be switched on. PDC supports you when parking. A slow ap proach to an object in front of or behind your vehicle is announced by: Signal tones. Visual display.

Measurement Measurements are made by ultrasound sen sors in the bumpers. The range is approx. 6 ft/2 m. An acoustic warning is first given: By the front sensors and two rear corner

sensors at approx. 24 in/60 cm. By the rear middle sensors at approx.

5 ft/1.50 m.

System limits Check the traffic situation as well PDC cannot serve as a substitute for the

driver's personal judgment of the traffic situa tion. Check the traffic situation around the ve hicle with your own eyes. Otherwise, an acci dent could result from road users or objects located outside of the PDC detection range. Loud noises from outside and inside the vehi cle may prevent you from hearing the PDC's signal tone.

Avoid driving quickly with PDC Avoid approaching an object quickly.

Avoid driving away quickly while PDC is not yet active. For technical reasons, the system may other wise be too late in issuing a warning.

Limits of ultrasonic measurement The detection of objects can reach the physi cal limits of ultrasonic measurement, for in stance: With tow bars and trailer hitches. With thin or wedge-shaped objects. With low objects. With objects with corners and sharp edges. Low objects already displayed, e.g., curbs, can move into the blind area of the sensors before or after a continuous tone sounds. High, protruding objects such as ledges may not be detected.

False warnings PDC may issue a warning under the following conditions even though there is no obstacle within the detection range: In heavy rain. When sensors are very dirty or covered in

ice. When sensors are covered in snow. On rough road surfaces. In large buildings with right angles and

smooth walls, e.g., in underground ga rages.

In heavy exhaust. Due to other ultrasound sources, e.g.,

sweeping machines, high pressure steam cleaners or neon lights.

Seite 103

Driving comfort Controls

103 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

Switching on automatically With the engine running or the ignition switched on, shift the selector lever into posi tion R.

Switching off automatically when driving forward The system switches off when a certain dis tance or speed is exceeded. Switch on the system again if necessary.

Switching on/off manually

Press the button.

On: the LED lights up. Off: the LED goes out.

Signal tones When approaching an object, an intermittent tone is sounded that indicates the position of the object. For example, if an object is de tected behind the vehicle, a signal tone sounds from the rear speakers. The shorter the distance to the object be comes, the shorter the intervals. If the distance to a detected object is less than approx. 12 in/30 cm, a continuous tone is sounded. If objects are located both in front of and be hind the vehicle, an alternating continuous sig nal is sounded. The intermittent tone is interrupted after ap prox. 3 seconds:

If the vehicle stops in front of an object that is detected by only one of the corner sen sors.

If moving parallel to a wall. The signal tone is switched off: When the vehicle moves away from an ob

ject by more than approx. 4 in/10 cm. When transmission position P is engaged.

Volume You can set the volume of the PDC signal tone, refer to page 165. The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.

Visual warning The approach to an object can be shown on the Control Display. Objects that are farther away are displayed on the Control Display be fore a signal tone sounds.

The display appears as soon as PDC is acti vated.

If the last image selected was the rearview camera, this is displayed again. To switch to PDC:

"Switch off rear view camera" The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.

Seite 104

Controls Driving comfort

104 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

Image on the Control Display

Switching on the rear view camera using iDrive With PDC activated:

"Rear view camera" The image of the rear view camera is dis played. The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.

Malfunction

A Check Control message, refer to page 80, is displayed in the instrument cluster.

The areas in front of and behind the vehicle ap pear in shaded form on the Control Display. PDC has failed. Have the system checked. To ensure full operability: Keep the sensors clean and free of ice. When using high-pressure washers, do not

spray the sensors for long periods and maintain a distance of at least 12 in/30 cm.

Rear view camera The concept The rear view camera assists you when park ing and maneuvering in reverse. To accom plish this, the region behind your vehicle is shown on the Control Display.

System limits Check the traffic situation as well Check the traffic situation around the ve

hicle with your own eyes. Otherwise, an acci dent could result from road users or objects lo cated outside the picture area of the backup camera.

Detection of objects High, protruding objects such as ledges

may not be detected by the backup camera.

Switching on automatically With the engine running or the ignition switched on, shift the selector lever into posi tion R. The image of the rear view camera is displayed when the system has been switched on using iDrive.

Switching off automatically when driving forward The system switches off when a certain dis tance or speed is exceeded. Switch on the system again if necessary.

Switching on/off manually

Press the button. On: the LED lights up.

Off: the LED goes out. If PDC is displayed, switch on the backup cam era via the iDrive, refer to page 105.

Seite 105

Driving comfort Controls

105 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

Assistance functions

Functional requirement Rear view camera is switched on. Tailgate is completely closed.

Pathway lines

Can be displayed in the image of the rear view camera when the transmission is in reverse.

Help estimate the required amount of space when parking and maneuvering on a flat road surface.

Depend on the current steering angle and are continuously adapted to movements of the steering wheel.

Show the parking aid lines via the iDrive, refer to page 107.

Turning lines

Can be displayed in the image of the rear view camera.

Show the path of the smallest turning cir cle on a flat road surface.

When the steering wheel is turned, only one turning line is displayed.

Show the parking aid lines via the iDrive, refer to page 107.

Parking using pathway and turning lines 1. Position the vehicle so that the turning

lines lead into the margins of the parking space.

2. Turn the steering wheel to the point where the pathway line covers the corresponding turning circle line.

Seite 106

Controls Driving comfort

106 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

Obstacle marking

Three-dimensionally shaped markings can be displayed in the image of the rear view camera.

Their color gradation corresponds to the mark ings in PDC. This helps estimate the distance to the object pictured. Show the obstacle marking via the iDrive, refer to page 107.

Activating assistance functions Several assistance functions can be active at the same time.

Showing the parking aid lines "Parking aid lines"

Pathway and turning lines are displayed.

Showing the obstacle marking "Obstacle marking"

Three-dimensionally-shaped markings are dis played.

Image on the Control Display

Switching on the rear view camera using iDrive With PDC activated:

"Rear view camera" The image of the rear view camera is dis played. The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.

Brightness With the rear view camera switched on:

1. Select the symbol. 2. Turn the controller until the desired setting

is reached and press the controller.

Contrast With the rear view camera switched on:

1. Select the symbol. 2. Turn the controller until the desired setting

is reached and press the controller.

Camera

The lens of the rearview camera is under the grasping lip of the tailgate.

The presence of dirt can impair image quality. Clean the lens with a moist, nonabrasive cloth.

Seite 107

Driving comfort Controls

107 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

Climate Vehicle equipment This chapter describes all series equipment as well as country-specific and special equipment offered for this model series.Therefore, it also

describes equipment that may not be found in your vehicle, for instance due to the selected special equipment or the country version. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems.

Automatic climate control

1 Manual air distribution 2 Maximum cooling 3 Temperature, left 4 AUTO program 5 Manual air flow rate, AUTO intensity 6 Display 7 Automatic recirculated air control/recircu

lated air mode 8 ALL program

9 Temperature, right 10 Defrosting windows and removing conden

sation 11 Switching cooling function on/off manually 12 Rear window defroster 13 Seat heating, right46 14 Interior temperature sensor, please keep

clear 15 Seat heating, left46

Seite 108

Controls Climate

108 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

Comfortable interior climate For almost all conditions, the AUTO program 4 offers the optimum air distribution and air flow rate, refer to AUTO program below. Select a comfortable interior temperature only. The following sections contain more detailed information on the available setting options. Most of these settings are stored for the re mote control currently in use, Personal Profile settings, refer to page 31.

Manual air distribution Press the buttons repeatedly to select a pro gram: Windows.

Upper body region.

Footwell.

The programs can be combined as necessary.

Temperature Turn the wheel to set the de sired temperature. The automatic climate control achieves this temperature as quickly as possible, if necessary

with the maximum cooling or heating capacity, and then keeps it constant.

Avoid rapidly switching between different tem perature settings. The automatic climate con trol will not have sufficient time to adjust the set temperature. Maximum heating power can be obtained with the highest setting, regardless of the external temperature. At the lowest setting, cooling is continuous, re gardless of the external temperature.

Maximum cooling Press the button. The system is set to the lowest tem

perature, maximum air volume and recircu lated-air mode.

Air flows out of the vents for the upper body region. Open them for this purpose. Air is cooled as quickly as possible: At an external temperature of approx.

32 /0 . When the engine is running.

AUTO program Press the button. Air volume, air distribution, and tem

perature are controlled automatically.

Depending on the selected temperature, AUTO intensity, and outside influences, the air is directed to the windshield, side windows, upper body, and into the footwell. The cooling function is switched on automati cally with the AUTO program. At the same time, a condensation sensor con trols the program in such a way that window condensation is prevented as much as possi ble. To switch off the program: press the button again or manually adjust the air distribution.

Intensity of the AUTO program With the AUTO program switched on, auto matic control of the air volume and air distribu tion can be adjusted.

Press the left or right side of the but ton: decrease or increase the inten

sity.

The selected intensity is shown on the display of the automatic climate control.

Seite 109

Climate Controls

109 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

Air volume, manual To be able to manually adjust the air volume, switch off the AUTO program first.

Press the left or right side of the but ton: decrease or increase air volume.

The selected air volume is shown on the dis play of the automatic climate control. The air volume of the automatic climate control may be reduced automatically to save battery power.

Automatic recirculated air mode/ recirculated air mode You can respond to unpleasant odors or pollu tants in the immediate environment by tempo rarily suspending the supply of outside air. The system then recirculates the air currently within the vehicle.

Press the button repeatedly to select an operating mode:

LEDs off: outside air flows in continuously. Left LED on, automatic recirculated-air

control: a sensor detects pollutants in the outside air and controls the shutoff auto matically.

Right LED on, recirculated air mode: the supply of outside air into the vehicle is per manently blocked. If the windows are fogged over, switch off the recirculated-air mode and press the AUTO button to utilize the condensation sensor. Make sure that air can flow onto the windshield.

Continuous recirculated-air mode The recirculated air mode should not be

used for an extended period of time, as the air quality inside the vehicle deteriorates stead ily.

Via the button on the steering wheel A button on the steering wheel can be used to quickly switch between recirculated air mode and the previous setting.

ALL program Press the button. The current temperature setting for

the driver's side is transferred to the front pas senger side.

If the temperature setting is changed on the driver's side, the temperature on the front pas senger side changes as well. The program is switched off if the setting is changed on the front passenger side or the button is pressed again.

Defrosting and defogging windows Press the button. Ice and condensation are quickly re

moved from the windshield and the front side windows.

For this purpose, also switch on the cooling function.

Cooling function The passenger compartment can only be cooled with the engine running.

Press the button. The air is cooled and dehumidified

and depending on the temperature setting warmed again.

Depending on the weather, the windshield may fog up briefly when the engine is started. The cooling function is switched on automati cally with the AUTO program. When using the automatic climate control, condensation water, refer to page 132, devel ops that exits underneath the vehicle.

Seite 110

Controls Climate

110 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

Rear window defroster Press the button. The rear window defroster switches

off automatically after a certain period of time.

Switching the system on/off

Switching off Press and hold the left button or, with the setting at the lowest level, press

the left button. All displays are cleared except for the rear win dow defroster if it is switched on.

When the automatic climate control is switched off, the supply of outside air is sus pended. If the air quality deteriorates or the window fogs over, switch the system back on and increase the air flow rate.

Switching on Press any button, except for the buttons for the ALL program or rear window heating.

Ventilation

1 Use the thumbwheels to smoothly open and close the air vents

2 Use the lever to change the direction of the air flow

Ventilation for cooling Adjust the vent to direct the air in your direc tion, e.g., if the vehicle interior is hot from the sun.

Draft-free ventilation Adjust the vent to let the air flow past you.

Microfilter/activated-charcoal filter The microfilter traps dust and pollen in the in coming air. The activated-charcoal filter removes gaseous pollutants from the outside air that enters the vehicle. Your service center replaces this combined fil ter during routine maintenance.

Parked-car ventilation The concept The parked-car ventilation blows air into the passenger compartment to lower interior tem peratures. The system can be switched on and off at any external temperature, either directly or by us ing a preset switch-on time. It remains switched on for 30 minutes. Since the system uses a substantial amount of electrical current, refrain from activating it twice in succession without allowing the bat tery to be recharged in normal operation be tween use. Open the vents to allow air to flow out. They can be operated via iDrive.

Switching on/off directly 1. "Settings" 2. "Climate"

Seite 111

Climate Controls

111 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

3. "Activate parked-car vent."

The symbol on the automatic climate con trol flashes if the system is switched on.

Preselecting activation times 1. "Settings" 2. "Climate" 3. "Activate Timer 1" or "Activate Timer 2" 4. "Timer 1:" or "Timer 2:"

5. Set the desired time. The symbol on the automatic climate con

trol lights up when the switch-on time is acti vated.

The symbol on the automatic climate con trol flashes when the system has been switched on. The system will only be switched on within the next 24 hours. After that, it needs to reacti vated.

Seite 112

Controls Climate

112 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

Interior equipment Vehicle equipment This chapter describes all series equipment as well as country-specific and special equipment offered for this model series.Therefore, it also describes equipment that may not be found in your vehicle, for instance due to the selected special equipment or the country version. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems.

Universal Garage Door Opener The concept The Universal Garage Door Opener can be used to operate up to 3 functions in remote- controlled systems, such as garage door drives or lighting systems. The Universal Garage Door Opener replaces up to 3 different hand- held transmitters. To operate it, the buttons on the interior rearview mirror must be program med for the desired functions. The hand-held transmitter for the system is needed for the programming procedure.

During programming During programming and before activat

ing a device using the Universal Garage Door Opener, ensure that there are no people, ani mals, or objects in the range of movement of the remote-controlled device; otherwise, there is a risk of injury or damage. Also follow the safety instructions of the hand- held transmitter.

Before selling the vehicle, delete the stored functions for security reasons.

Compatibility If this symbol is printed on the packag ing or in the operating instructions of

the system being operated, the system is gen erally compatible with the Universal Garage Door Opener. If you have any questions, please contact: Your service center. www.homelink.com on the Internet. HomeLink is a registered trademark of John son Controls, Inc.

Controls on the interior rearview mirror

1 LED 2 Buttons 3 Hand-held transmitter, required for pro

gramming.

Programming

General information 1. Switch on the ignition. 2. Initial setup:

Press the right and left buttons on the inte rior rearview mirror simultaneously for ap prox. 20 seconds until the LED on the inte rior rearview mirror begins to flash. All programmed settings of the buttons on the interior rearview mirror are deleted.

3. Hold the hand-held transmitter of the sys tem to be operated a distance of approx. 1 to 3 in/2.5 to 8 cm away from the buttons

Seite 113

Interior equipment Controls

113 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

on the interior rearview mirror. The re quired distance depends on the particular hand-held transmitter.

4. Press the button of the desired function on the hand-held transmitter and the button being programmed on the interior rearview mirror simultaneously and hold. The LED on the interior rearview mirror flashes slowly at first.

5. When the LED flashes more rapidly, re lease both buttons. Rapid flashing indi cates that the button on the interior rear view mirror has been programmed. If the LED does not flash faster after 60 seconds, change the distance between the interior rearview mirror and the hand- held transmitter and repeat the step. Multi ple trials at different distances may be nec essary. Wait at least 15 seconds between trials.

6. To program additional functions on other buttons, repeat steps 3 to 5.

The systems can be operated with the buttons on the interior rearview mirror.

Special characteristics of alternating- code radio systems If the system cannot be operated after re peated programming, check whether the sys tem to be operated uses an alternating-code system. Read the operating instructions of the system or press and hold the programmed button on the interior rearview mirror. If the LED on the interior rearview mirror flashes rapidly at first and then lights up continuously for 2 seconds, the system is equipped with an alternating- code system. This flashing LED pattern re peats itself for approx. 20 seconds. In systems with an alternating-code system, the Universal Garage Door Opener and the system must be additionally synchronized.

Please obtain additional information on syn chronization in the operating instructions of the system being set up. The systems will be easier to synchronize with the aid of a second person. Synchronization:

1. Park the vehicle within range of the re mote-controlled system.

2. Program the corresponding button on the interior rearview mirror as described.

3. Identify and press the synchronization but ton on the system being set up. You have approx. 30 seconds for the next step.

4. Press and hold the button on the interior rearview mirror for approx. 3 seconds and then release it. Repeat this step up to three times if necessary to complete the syn chronization procedure. When synchroni zation is completed, the programmed func tion is executed.

Reprogramming individual buttons 1. Switch on the ignition. 2. Hold the hand-held transmitter at a dis

tance of approx. 1 to 3 in/2.5 to 8 cm from the memory buttons. The required distance depends on the par ticular hand-held transmitter.

3. Press the memory button of the Universal Garage Door Opener.

4. If the LED flashes slowly after approx. 20 seconds, press the transmit button on the hand-held transmitter.

5. Release both buttons when the LED flashes rapidly. If the LED does not flash rapidly after ap prox. 60 seconds, change the distance and repeat the step. Canada: if the LED does not flash rapidly after approx. 60 seconds, change the dis tance and repeat the step. If programming

Seite 114

Controls Interior equipment

114 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

was aborted by the hand-held transmitter, hold down the memory button and press and release the button on the hand-held transmitter several times for 2 seconds.

Controls Prior to operation Before operating a unit with the Universal

Garage Door Opener, ensure that there are no people, animals, or objects in the range of movement of the system; otherwise, there is a risk of injury or damage. Also follow the safety instructions of the hand- held transmitter.

The system, such as the garage door, can be operated using the button on the interior rear view mirror with the engine running or the igni tion switched on. When you are within the re ception range of the system, press and hold the button until the function is initiated. The LED on the interior rearview mirror lights up continuously while the radio signal is being transmitted.

Deleting stored functions Press the right and left buttons on the interior rearview mirror simultaneously for approx. 20 seconds until the LED flashes rapidly. All stored functions are deleted. The functions cannot be deleted individually.

Digital compass

1 Adjustment button 2 Display

The display shows you the main or secondary compass direction in which you are driving.

Operating concept Various functions can be called up by pressing the adjustment button with a pointed object such as a pen. The following adjustment op tions are displayed one after the other, de pending on how long the adjustment button is pressed: Press briefly: switch the display on/off. 3 to 6 seconds: set the compass zone. 6 to 9 seconds: calibrate the compass. 9 to 12 seconds: set left-hand/right hand

steering. 12 to 15 seconds: set the language.

Setting compass zones Set the compass zone corresponding to the vehicle's geographic location so that the com pass can function correctly; refer to the world map with compass zones.

Seite 115

Interior equipment Controls

115 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

Press the adjustment button for 34 seconds. The number of the compass zone set is shown in the display. To change the zone setting, briefly press the adjustment button repeatedly until the display shows the number of the compass zone corre sponding to the current location. The compass is operational again after approx. 10 seconds.

Calibrating the digital compass The digital compass must be calibrated in the following situations: An incorrect compass direction is shown. The cardinal direction displayed does not

change even if the direction of travel changes.

Not all compass directions are shown.

Procedure 1. Make sure that there are no large metal ob

jects or overhead power lines in the vicinity of the vehicle and that there is enough space to drive in a circle.

2. Set the currently valid compass zone. 3. Press the adjustment button for 67 sec

onds to call up C. Then drive at least one full circle at a maximum speed of 4 mph/7 km/h. When the system is cali brated, the C is replaced by the compass directions.

Right-hand/left-hand steering The digital compass is set for right-hand or left-hand steering at the factory.

Setting the language Press the adjustment button for 1213 sec onds. Briefly press the adjustment button again to switch between English "E" and Ger man "O". The setting is automatically saved after approx. 10 seconds.

Seite 116

Controls Interior equipment

116 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

Ashtray/cigarette lighter Opening

Pull cover 2 up.

Emptying Take out the insert.

Lighter With the engine running or the ignition switched on, press in the cigarette lighter 1. The lighter can be removed as soon as it pops back out.

Danger of burns Only hold the hot lighter by its head; oth

erwise, there is the danger of getting burned. Switch off the ignition and take the remote control with you when leaving the vehicle so that children cannot use the lighter and burn themselves.

Replace the cover after use Replace the lighter or socket cover after

use; otherwise, objects that fall into the lighter socket or power socket could cause a short circuit.

Connecting electrical devices Note

Do not connect the charger to the socket Do not connect the battery charger to

the socket installed in the vehicle at the factory as this could damage the battery.

Sockets The lighter socket can be used as a socket for electrical equipment while the engine is run ning or when the ignition is switched on. The total load of all sockets must not exceed 140 watts at 12 volt. Avoid damaging the sockets by attempting to insert plugs of unsuitable shape or size.

Front center console

Remove the cover or cigarette lighter.

Rear center console

Remove the cover or cigarette lighter.

Seite 117

Interior equipment Controls

117 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

In storage compartment under center armrest To access the socket: remove the cover.

In cargo area

Fold open the cover.

Cargo area Cargo covers

Do not place objects on the covers Do not place objects on the cover; if you

do so, they may pose a danger to vehicle occu pants during braking or evasive maneuvers or damage the cover.

To load bulky luggage, the covers can be re moved.

Rear cover 1. Detach the securing straps from the tail

gate. 2. Lift the cover slightly, arrow 1, and pull it

back and out of the brackets, arrows 2.

Front cover 1. Push the cover up and out of the brackets

on both sides at the rear, arrow 1.

2. Pull the cover back, up and out of the lat eral brackets on both sides, arrow 2.

Enlarging the cargo area

General information The cargo area can be enlarged by folding down the rear seat backrests. The rear seat backrest is divided at a ratio of 40-20-40. The backrests can be adjusted to 10 different positions between the comfort and transport positions and they can be folded down. In the comfort position, the backrests are tilted back to the greatest possible angle and in the transport position they are nearly vertical. Before mounting a child restraint fixing system, note the instructions, refer to page 52.

Danger of pinching Before folding down the rear seat back

rests, ensure that path of movement of the backrests is clear. Especially when the middle section is folded down, ensure that no one is located in or reaches into the path of move ment of the rear seat backrests. Otherwise, in juries or damage may result.

Seite 118

Controls Interior equipment

118 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

Observe the instructions concerning the safety belt

Observe the instructions concerning the safety belt, refer to page 46. Otherwise, personal pro tection may be compromised.

Outside backrests

1. Reach into the recess and pull the lever to ward the front.

2. Engage the backrest in the desired posi tion or fold it down.

On the left side, the outer and center backrests are adjusted jointly toward the front if both backrests are engaged in the same lock-in po sition. The backrests can be adjusted separately to ward the rear. Note that the center backrest cannot be tilted farther down than the left backrest.

Center backrest only

1. Pull the loop, arrow. 2. Engage the backrest in the desired posi

tion or fold it down.

Folding the backrests back up When the backrests are folded back up, they engage in the transport position. To set the desired backrest tilt or comfort po sition, pull the lever of the left/right backrest or the loop of the center backrest forward.

Locking the backrest Before letting passengers ride in the rear,

engage the seat backrests, locking them in place. Otherwise, there is the danger of an ac cident due to unexpected seat movement.

Partition net Firmly attach the partition net Make sure that the partition net is firmly

attached; otherwise, injuries may result.

The partition net can be attached behind the front or rear seats.

Before installing 1. Remove the pouch with the partition net

from the storage compartment under the cargo floor panel in the cargo area.

2. Take the partition net out of the pouch, un roll it, and unfold it. After use, fold and roll up the partition net in the same manner and place it in the pouch so that it can be stowed back under the cargo floor panel. Ensure that hooks and tensioning buckles do not rest on the rod elements.

3. Unfold the partition net to the point where the rod elements engage.

Mounting eyes Four mounting eyes are located on the back of the rear seat backrests.

Seite 119

Interior equipment Controls

119 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

Installation behind the front seats, ar rows 1.

Installation behind the rear seats, arrows 2.

Label Ensure that the partition net is correctly posi tioned, i.e., do not reverse front and back. The partition net is labeled accordingly.

Installation behind the rear seats 1. If necessary, tilt the rear seat backrests for

ward and remove the front cargo cover, re fer to page 118.

2. Fold open the cover caps 1 of the rear brackets in the headliner to the point where they engage.

3. Insert the rods of the partition net 2 all the way into the holders on both sides and slide forward.

4. Attach the hooks 1 at the bottom of the re taining straps into the eyelets on the rear seat backrest, arrow, on both sides.

5. Lash the partition net tightly. To do this, tighten the retaining straps using the ten sioning buckles.

Installation behind the front seats

1. Fold down the rear seat backrests, refer to Enlarging the cargo area.

2. Fold open the cover caps of the front brackets in the headliner to the point where they engage.

3. Insert the rods of the partition net all the way into the holders on both sides and slide forward.

4. Attach the hooks at the bottom of the re taining straps into the upper eyelets on the rear seat backrest on both sides.

5. Lash the partition net tightly. To do this, tighten the retaining straps using the ten sioning buckles.

Seite 120

Controls Interior equipment

120 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

Removing To remove and stow the partition net, proceed in reverse order. To fold up, press both release buttons, arrows.

Cargo floor panel

Compartment in floor Note the maximum permissible load Do not exceed a maximum load of

55 lbs/25 kg in the storage compartment be neath the cargo floor panel; otherwise, damage may result.

To access the tool kit, for example, lift the stor age compartment at the rear. To lift, reach into the recess on the rear edge of the storage compartment. The storage compartment can be removed if necessary.

Raising the cargo floor panel

Reach under the cargo floor panel on the left, right and at the rear. Fold the panel up and for

ward, pressing it into the gap between the cargo area floor and the rear seat backrest.

Do not apply pressure to the cargo floor panel when it is upright.

Do not apply pressure to the cargo floor panel when it is upright, do not press up or down on it, and do not adjust the rear seat backrests; otherwise, damage may result.

Before closing the tailgate, fold down the cargo floor panel. To do this, pull the cargo floor panel toward the rear, raising it up and out of the gap. The cargo floor panel can be removed if nec essary.

Lashing eyes To secure pieces of luggage with nets or draw straps, lashing eyes are available in the cargo area, refer to page 135.

Multi-function hooks

Hooks designed for hanging shopping bags and totes, for example, are located on the left and right sides of the cargo cover support, ar row.

Do not hang heavy items from the hooks Only hang light bags or suitable objects

from the holders. Otherwise, there is a danger of objects flying about during braking and eva sive maneuvers. Only transport heavy luggage in the trunk if it has been appropriately secured.

Seite 121

Interior equipment Controls

121 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

Ski and snowboard bag General information The ski and snowboard bag is contained in a protective jacket in the cargo area. Follow the installation and operation instruc tions included in the protective jacket.

Seite 122

Controls Interior equipment

122 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

Storage compartments Vehicle equipment This chapter describes all series equipment as well as country-specific and special equipment offered for this model series.Therefore, it also describes equipment that may not be found in your vehicle, for instance due to the selected special equipment or the country version. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems.

Notes No loose objects in the passenger com partment

Do not stow any objects in the passenger compartment without securing them; other wise, they may present a danger to occupants for instance during braking and avoidance ma neuvers.

No non-slip mats on the dashboard Do not use non-slip materials, such as

non-slip mats, on the dashboard, or it could be damaged by the substances in the materials.

Glove compartment Opening

Pull the handle.

The light in the glove compartment switches on.

Close the glove compartment again im mediately

Close the glove compartment immediately af ter use while driving; otherwise, injury may oc cur during accidents.

Closing Fold up the cover.

USB interface for data transfer

Port for importing and exporting data, such as music collections, refer to page 179, on USB devices.

Observe the following when connecting: Do not use force when plugging the con

nector into the USB interface. Do not connect devices such as fans or

lamps to the USB interface. Do not connect a USB hard drive. Do not use the USB interface to recharge

external devices.

Seite 123

Storage compartments Controls

123 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

Center armrest front Storage compartment The center armrest between the front seats contains a compartment with cupholders or the cover for the snap-in adapter, depending on the version. Details on this mobile phone cradle, refer to page 207.

Opening

Pull the center armrest upward.

Adjusting

Slide the center armrest into the desired posi tion.

Center armrest, rear

Pull the center armrest forward at the strap.

When folding up, push the center armrest firmly back into the rear seat backrest.

Connection for an external audio device This can be used to connect an external audio device, such as a CD or MP3 player. AUX-IN port, refer to page 184. USB audio interface, refer to page 185.

Storage compartments Storage compartments

Interior Glove compartment, refer to page 123. Compartments in the center console. Compartments in the doors. Bottle holders in the doors, cupholders, re

fer to page 125.

Cargo area Lashing eyes, refer to page 135. Storage compartment under the cargo

floor panel, refer to page 121. Left and right storage compartments. Multi-function hook, refer to page 121.

Seite 124

Controls Storage compartments

124 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

Storage compartment package For your comfort:

Interior Insertable cupholder, refer to page 125. Front center armrest, refer to page 124. Nets on the backrests of the front seats. Retaining straps in the front door compart

ments. Rear center armrest with integrated cu

pholders.

Cargo area Retaining strap on the left side panel for

securing small items. Retaining straps on the cargo area floor. Insertable partition elements for the stor

age compartment under the cargo floor panel, used to variably subdivide the stor age compartment. With partition net: arrange the partition ele ments in such a way that there is enough space at the rear of the storage compart ment for the partition net.

Storage net next to the storage compart ment on the right in the cargo area.

Clothes hooks The clothes hooks are located at the grab han dles in the rear.

Do not obstruct view When suspending clothing from the

hooks, ensure that it will not obstruct the driv er's vision.

No heavy objects Do not hang heavy objects from the

hooks; otherwise, they may present a danger to passengers during braking and evasive ma neuvers.

Cupholders Notes

Shatter-proof containers and no hot drinks

Use light and shatter-proof containers and do not transport hot drinks. Otherwise, there is the increased danger of injury in an accident.

Unsuitable containers Do not forcefully push unsuitable con

tainers into the cupholders. This may result in damage.

Front In the front door compartments as a bottle

holder for 1-quart/1 liter bottles, for exam ple. Insert the bottle into the bottle holder with the bottom slanted toward the front.

In the center console.

Insertable cupholder. The insertable cupholder is located in the compartment below the center armrest.

Insert the cupholder in the holder on the center console.

Rear In the front door compartments as a bottle

holder for 25-ounce/0.75 liter bottles, for example.

Seite 125

Storage compartments Controls

125 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

Insert the bottle into the bottle holder with the bottom slanted toward the front.

In the center armrest.

Pull the center armrest forward at the strap. To open: press the button. To close: push both covers back in, one after the other.

Seite 126

Controls Storage compartments

126 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

Seite 127

Storage compartments Controls

127 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

Driving tips This section provides you with information

useful in dealing with specific driving and operating conditions.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

Things to remember when driving Vehicle equipment This chapter describes all series equipment as well as country-specific and special equipment offered for this model series.Therefore, it also describes equipment that may not be found in your vehicle, for instance due to the selected special equipment or the country version. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems.

Breaking-in period General information Moving parts need to be broken in to adjust to each other. The following instructions will help achieve a long vehicle life and good economy.

Engine and differential Always obey all official speed limits.

Up to 1,200 miles/2,000 km Do not exceed the maximum engine and road speeds: 4,500 rpm and 100 mph/160 km/h. Avoid full-throttle operation and use of the transmission's kickdown mode for the initial miles.

From 1,200 miles/2,000 km The engine and vehicle speed can gradually be increased.

Tires Due to technical factors associated with their manufacture, tires do not achieve their full traction potential until after an initial breaking- in period.

Drive conservatively for the first 200 miles/300 km.

Brake system Brakes require an initial break-in period of ap prox. 300 miles/500 km to achieve optimized contact and wear patterns between brake pads and discs. Drive cautiously during this break-in period.

Following part replacement The same breaking in procedures should be observed if any of the components mentioned above have to be renewed in the course of the vehicle's operating life.

General driving notes Closing tailgate

Drive with the tailgate closed Only drive with the tailgate closed; other

wise, passengers and other road users may be endangered or the vehicle may be damaged if an accident occurs or during braking or evasive maneuvers. In addition, exhaust fumes may enter the passenger compartment.

If, despite this, the vehicle must be driven with the tailgate open: Drive moderately. Close all windows and the panoramic glass

sunroof. Greatly increase the blower speed.

Hot exhaust system Hot exhaust system High temperatures are generated in the

exhaust system.

Seite 130

Driving tips Things to remember when driving

130 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

Do not remove the heat shields installed and never apply undercoating to them. Make sure that flammable materials, e. g. hay, leaves, grass, etc. do not come in contact with the hot exhaust system during driving, while in idle po sition mode, or when parked. Such contact could lead to a fire, and with it the risk of seri ous personal injury as well as property dam age. Do not touch hot exhaust pipes; otherwise, there is the danger of getting burned.

Mobile communication devices in the vehicle

Mobile communication devices in the ve hicle

It is not recommended to use mobile phones, such as mobile phones without a direct con nection to an external aerial in the vehicle's passenger compartment. Otherwise, the vehi cle electronics and mobile communication de vices can interfere with each other. In addition, there is no assurance that the radiation gener ated during transmission will be discharged from the vehicle interior.

Hydroplaning On wet or slushy roads, a wedge of water can form between the tires and road surface. This phenomenon is referred to as hydroplan ing. It is characterized by a partial or complete loss of contact between the tires and the road surface, ultimately undermining your ability to steer and brake the vehicle.

Hydroplaning When driving on wet or slushy roads, re

duce your speed to prevent hydroplaning.

The risk of hydroplaning increases as the tire tread depth decreases. Minimum tread depth, refer to page 238.

Driving through water Drive though calm water only if it is not deeper than 12 inches/30 cm and at this height, no faster than walking speed, up to 6 mph/10 km/h.

Adhere to water depth and speed limita tions

Do not exceed this water depth and walking speed; otherwise, the vehicle's engine, the electrical systems and the transmission may be damaged.

Braking safely Your vehicle is equipped with ABS as a stand ard feature. Applying the brakes fully is the most effective way of braking in situations when this is neces sary. The vehicle maintains steering responsive ness. You can still avoid any obstacles with a minimum of steering effort. Pulsation of the brake pedal and sounds from the hydraulic circuits indicate that ABS is in its active mode.

Do not let your foot rest on the brake pedal

Do not drive with your foot resting on the brake pedal. Even light but consistent pedal pressure can lead to high temperatures, brake wear and possibly even brake failure.

Objects in the area around the pedals No objects in the area around the pedals Keep floor mats, carpets, and any other

objects out of the area of motion of the pedals; otherwise, the function of the pedals could be impeded while driving Do not place additional floor mats over existing mats or other objects. Only use floor mats that have been approved for the vehicle and can be properly fixed in place.

Seite 131

Things to remember when driving Driving tips

131 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

Ensure that the floor mats are securely fas tened again when they are returned after being removed, such as for cleaning.

Driving in wet conditions When roads are wet or there is heavy rain, briefly exert gentle pressure on the brake pedal every few miles. Ensure that this action does not endanger other road users. The heat generated in this process helps dry the brake discs and pads. In this way braking efficiency will be available when you need it.

Hills Drive long or steep downhill gradients in the gear in which the least braking is required. Otherwise, the brake system may overheat, re sulting in a reduction in the brake system effi ciency. You can increase the engine's braking effect by shifting down, going all the way to first gear, if necessary. Downshifting in manual mode of the automatic transmission, refer to page 66.

Avoid load on the brakes Avoid placing excessive load on the

brake system. Light but consistent brake pres sure can lead to high temperatures, brake wear and possibly even brake failure.

Do not drive in neutral Do not drive in neutral or with the engine

stopped, as doing so disables engine braking. In addition, steering and brake assist is un available with the engine stopped.

Brake disc corrosion Corrosion on the brake discs and contamina tion on the brake pads are furthered by: Low mileage.

Extended periods when the vehicle is not used at all.

Infrequent use of the brakes. Corrosion occurs when the minimum pressure that must be exerted by the pads during brake applications to clean the discs is not reached. Should corrosion form on the brake discs, the brakes will tend to respond with a pulsating ef fect that generally cannot be corrected.

Condensation under the parked vehicle When using the automatic climate control, condensation water develops that exits under neath the vehicle. Therefore, traces of condensed water under the vehicle are normal.

Driving on poor roads BMW X1 combines an all-wheel drive system with the advantages of a normal passenger car.

Do not drive on unpaved terrain Do not drive on unpaved terrain, as oth

erwise the vehicle may be damaged.

For your own safety and the safety of passen gers and the vehicle, adhere to the following points: Familiarize yourself with the vehicle before

driving; never take risks. Adjust speeds according to road condi

tions. The steeper and rougher the road surface is, the lower the speed should be.

When driving on steep uphill and downhill grades: the engine oil and coolant should be filled nearly to the MAX mark.

Use Hill Descent Control HDC, refer to page 99, on steep downhill grades.

Watch for stones, holes, and other obsta cles and drive around these where possi ble.

Seite 132

Driving tips Things to remember when driving

132 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

On bumps and rough roads, avoid contact between the vehicle body and the ground. The maximum ground clearance is 8 in ches/20 cm and may vary with the loaded cargo.

When driving through water, do not exceed the maximum water height of 12 in ches/30 cm and drive at walking speed.

After driving through water, press on the brake pedal several times at low speeds to dry the brakes.

Depending on the prevailing terrain, acti vate Dynamic Traction Control DTC, refer to page 98, briefly.

When the wheels spin, accelerate to ena ble the driving stability control systems to distribute the drive force to the individual wheels.

After driving on poor roads Adhere to the following points to ensure vehi cle safety: Remove excessive accumulations of dirt

and mud from the vehicle body. Clear mud, snow, ice, etc., from the wheels

and tires and check for damage.

Seite 133

Things to remember when driving Driving tips

133 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

Loading Vehicle equipment This chapter describes all series equipment as well as country-specific and special equipment offered for this model series.Therefore, it also describes equipment that may not be found in your vehicle, for instance due to the selected special equipment or the country version. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems.

General information Overloading the vehicle To avoid exceeding the approved carry

ing capacity of the tires, never overload the ve hicle. Overloading can lead to overheating and increases the rate at which damage develops inside the tires. This could result in a sudden loss of tire inflation pressure.

No fluids in the cargo area Make sure that fluids do not leak into the

cargo area; otherwise, the vehicle may be dam aged.

Determining the load limit

1. Locate the following statement on your ve hicles placard: The combined weight of occupants

and cargo should never exceed XXX kg

or YYY lbs. Otherwise, damage to the vehicle and unstable driving situations may result.

2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kilograms or YYY pounds.

4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load ca pacity. For example, if the YYY amount equals 1,000 lbs and there will be four 150 lbs passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 400 lbs: 1,000 lbs minus 600 lbs = 400 lbs.

5. Determine the combined weight of lug gage and cargo being loaded on the vehi cle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transfered to your vehicle. Consult the manual for transport ing a trailer to determine how this may re duce the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.

Seite 134

Driving tips Loading

134 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

Load

The maximum load is the sum of the weight of the occupants and the cargo. The greater the weight of the occupants, the less cargo that can be transported.

Stowing cargo

Very heavy cargo: when the rear seat is not occupied, secure each of the outer safety belts in the opposite buckle.

Heavy cargo: stow as far forward and as low as possible, ideally directly behind the backrests.

Cover sharp edges and corners. Do not pile cargo higher than the top edge

of the backrests. If necessary, fold down the rear backrests

to stow cargo. Use the partition net, refer to page 119, to

protect passengers. Make sure that ob jects cannot penetrate the partition net.

Place protective material around any sharp-edged or pointed objects that could

bump against the rear window while the vehicle is in motion.

Securing cargo Lashing eyes in the cargo area

Securing cargo Smaller and lighter items: secure with re

taining straps, a cargo net or draw straps. Larger and heavy objects: secure with

cargo straps. Cargo straps can be attached to two lash ing eyes on the cargo area side panel, ar rows 1, and two lashing eyes on the cargo area rear panel, arrows 2.

Securing cargo Stow and secure the cargo as described

above; otherwise it may present a danger to the occupants, for instance during braking and avoidance maneuvers. Do not stow any heavy and hard objects in the passenger compartment without securing them; otherwise, they may present a danger to occupants, for instance during braking and avoidance maneuvers. Never exceed either the approved gross vehi cle weight or either of the approved axle loads, as excessive loads can pose a safety hazard, and may also place you in violation of traffic safety laws.

Seite 135

Loading Driving tips

135 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

Use only the lashing eyes pictured to fasten the heavy-duty cargo straps. Do not secure cargo using the upper top tether, refer to page 53, mounting points; otherwise, these may become damaged.

Roof-mounted luggage rack Notes A special rack system is available as an op tional accessory.

Anchorage points The anchorage points are located on the roof railing.

Attachment Follow the installation instructions for the roof- mounted luggage rack. Be sure that adequate clearance is maintained for tilting and opening the panoramic glass sunroof.

Loading Because roof racks raise the vehicle's center of gravity when loaded, they have a major ef fect on vehicle handling and steering re sponse. Therefore, note the following when loading and driving: Do not exceed the approved roof/axle

loads and the approved gross vehicle weight.

Distribute the roof load uniformly. The roof load should not be too large in

area. Always load the heaviest pieces on the

bottom. Fasten the roof-mounted luggage se

curely, for instance using lashing straps.

Do not let objects project into the opening path of the tailgate.

Drive smoothly. Avoid sudden acceleration and braking maneuvers. Take corners gen tly.

Rear luggage rack Notes A special rear rack is available as an optional accessory. It does not require a trailer hitch. Follow the installation instructions for the rear rack.

Anchorage points

The anchorage points are under the covers in the bumper. Remove the covers, refer to page 262.

Seite 136

Driving tips Loading

136 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

Saving fuel Vehicle equipment This chapter describes all series equipment as well as country-specific and special equipment offered for this model series.Therefore, it also describes equipment that may not be found in your vehicle, for instance due to the selected special equipment or the country version. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems.

General information Your vehicle contains advanced technology for the reduction of fuel consumption and emis sions. Fuel consumption depends on a number of dif ferent factors. The implementation of certain measures, driv ing style and regular maintenance, refer to page 247, can have an influence on fuel con sumption and on the environmental impact.

Remove unnecessary cargo Additional weight increases fuel consumption.

Remove attached parts following use Remove unneeded auxiliary mirrors, roof or rear luggage racks after use. Attached parts on the vehicle impair the aero dynamics and increase the fuel consumption.

Closing the windows and panoramic glass sunroof Driving with the panoramic glass sunroof and windows open results in increased air resist ance and raises fuel consumption.

Check the tire inflation pressure regularly Check and, if necessary, correct the tire infla tion pressure, refer to page 232, at least twice a month and before starting on a long trip. Low tire inflation pressure increases rolling re sistance and thus raises fuel consumption and tire wear.

Drive away without delay Do not wait for the engine to warm-up while the vehicle remains stationary. Start driving right away, but at moderate engine speeds. This is the fastest way for the cold engine to reach its operating temperature.

Look well ahead when driving Avoid unnecessary acceleration and braking. By maintaining a suitable distance to the vehi cle driving ahead of you. Driving smoothly and looking ahead reduces fuel consumption.

Avoid high engine speeds Driving at a low engine speed reduces fuel consumption and minimizes wear.

Seite 137

Saving fuel Driving tips

137 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

Use coasting conditions When approaching a red light, take your foot off the accelerator and let the vehicle coast to a halt. On a downhill gradient, take your foot off the accelerator and let the vehicle roll. The flow of fuel is interrupted while coasting.

Switch off the engine during longer stops Switch off the engine during longer stops, e.g., at traffic lights, railroad crossings or in traffic congestion.

Automatic Engine Start/Stop Function The Automatic Start/Stop Function of your ve hicle automatically switches off the engine during a stop. Additional information on the Automatic Engine Start/Stop Function, refer to page 59. If the engine is stopped and then started again, fuel consumption and emissions drop com pared to an engine that runs permanently. Stopping the engine even for just a few sec onds can result in savings. Use of this system can cause premature wear on certain vehicle components. In addition, fuel consumption depends on other factors as well, such as driving style, road conditions, maintenance, and environmental factors.

Switch off any functions that are not currently needed Functions such as seat heating and the rear window defroster require a lot of energy and consume additional fuel, especially in city and stop-and-go traffic. Therefore, switch off these functions if they are not actually needed.

Have maintenance carried out Have vehicles maintained regularly to achieve optimal vehicle economy and operating life. Have the maintenance carried out by your service center. Please also note the BMW Maintenance Sys tem, refer to page 247.

ECO PRO The concept ECO PRO supports the driver in achieving high fuel economy. Engine control and comfort functions, such as the climate control system, are adjusted accordingly. In addition, situation-related information can be displayed that helps the driver achieve lower fuel consumption. The resulting range extension can be dis played in the instrument cluster.

Activating ECO PRO Press the button; the LED above the button lights up.

ECO PRO appears in the instrument cluster and DSC is activated if necessary.

Displays in the instrument cluster

After activation, ECO PRO and the bonus range are displayed in the instrument cluster.

Seite 138

Driving tips Saving fuel

138 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

ECO PRO bonus range The vehicle's cruising range can be extended by adjusting your driving style. This extended range can be displayed as a bo nus range in the instrument cluster. The bonus range is indicated in the range dis play. The bonus range is automatically reset after refueling.

Driving style ECO PRO displays the efficiency of the current driving style in the instrument cluster. ECO PRO not highlighted: efficient driving

style. ECO PRO highlighted: adjust your driving

style, for example by accelerating less quickly.

To drive efficiently: Accelerate less quickly. Brake in advance. Reduce speed to the ECO PRO speed of

80 mph/130 km/h. Automatic transmission: shift from S to D,

or avoid shifting manually.

ECO PRO tip Situation-related tips that indicate measures to achieve optimum fuel economy can be dis played. A reminder is displayed when the ECO PRO speed of 80 mph/130 km/h is exceeded.

Displaying the ECO PRO tip 1. "Vehicle Info" 2. "ECO PRO Tips"

ECO PRO climate control Climate control is adjusted for optimum fuel economy.

To achieve better fuel economy, the actual temperature may vary slightly from the set temperature and the passenger compartment may be heated or cooled more slowly.

Deactivating ECO PRO Press the button again. The LED above the button and the

ECO PRO display in the instrument cluster go out.

Seite 139

Saving fuel Driving tips

139 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

Navigation This chapter contains various examples of how the navigation system can guide you reliably to

your destination.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

Navigation system Vehicle equipment This chapter describes all series equipment as well as country-specific and special equipment offered for this model series.Therefore, it also describes equipment that may not be found in your vehicle, for instance due to the selected special equipment or the country version. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems.

General information The navigation system can determine the pre cise position of the vehicle, with the aid of sat ellites and vehicle sensors, and can reliably guide you to every entered destination.

Entries in stationary vehicle Enter data only when the vehicle is sta

tionary, and always give priority to the applica ble traffic regulations in the event of any con tradiction between traffic and road conditions and the instructions issued by the navigation system. Failure to take to this precaution can place you in violation of the law and put vehicle occupants and other road users in danger.

Opening the navigation system

1. Press the button on the controller. 2. "Navigation"

The navigation system can also be called up directly using the button on the con

troller.

Navigation data Information on navigation data 1. "Navigation"

2. Open "Options". 3. "Navigation system version"

Information is displayed on the data ver sion.

Updating the navigation data

General information Navigation data are stored in the vehicle and can be updated. Current navigation data and the authorization code are available from your service center. Depending on the data volume, a data up

date may take several hours. Update during the trip to preserve battery. During the update, only the basic functions

of the navigation system are available. The status of the update can be viewed. After the updating process is complete, the

system restarts. Remove the medium with the navigation

data after the update.

Performing an update 1. Insert the navigation DVD into the DVD

player with the labeled side facing up. 2. Follow the instructions on the Control Dis

play. 3. Enter the authorization code of the naviga

tion DVD. 4. Change the DVD if necessary. After the trip is interrupted, follow the instruc tions on the Control Display.

Viewing the status 1. Open "Options". 2. "Navigation update"

Seite 142

Navigation Navigation system

142 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

Removing navigation DVD

1. Press button 1. The DVD emerges slightly from the drive.

2. Remove the DVD.

Seite 143

Navigation system Navigation

143 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

Destination entry Vehicle equipment This chapter describes all series equipment as well as country-specific and special equipment offered for this model series.Therefore, it also describes equipment that may not be found in your vehicle, for instance due to the selected special equipment or the country version. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems.

At a glance In entering your destination you can select from the following options: Enter the destination manually, see below. Select the destination from the address

book, refer to page 146. Last destinations, refer to page 147. Special destinations, refer to page 147. Destination entry via map, refer to

page 149. Using the home address as the destina

tion, refer to page 147. Destination entry by voice, refer to

page 150. Destination entry via the Concierge serv

ice, refer to page 149. You can also store a navigation destination on the programmable memory buttons, refer to page 22.

Entries in stationary vehicle Enter data only when the vehicle is sta

tionary, and always give priority to the applica ble traffic regulations in the event of any con tradiction between traffic and road conditions and the instructions issued by the navigation system. Failure to take to this precaution can

place you in violation of the law and put vehicle occupants and other road users in danger.

Manual destination entry General information The system supports you in entering street names and house numbers by automatically completing the entry and providing entry com parisons, refer to page 23. Stored town/city and street names can be called up quickly. If the existing entries should not be

changed, the entries for the state/province and town/city can be skipped.

Destination guidance is started to the town/city center if no street is entered.

Entering a state/province

1. Press the button. 2. "Navigation" 3. "Enter address"

4. Select "State/Province" or the displayed state/province.

Seite 144

Navigation Destination entry

144 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

Entering a town/city 1. Select "Town/City/Postal Code" or the dis

played town/city.

2. Select letters, if necessary. The list is narrowed down further with each entry.

3. Move the controller to the right. 4. Select the name of the town/city from the

list. If there are several towns/cities with the same name:

1. Change to the list of town/city names. 2. Highlight the town/city. 3. Select the town/city.

Entering the postal code 1. Select "Town/City/Postal Code" or the dis

played town/city. 2. Select the symbol. 3. Select the numbers. 4. Change to the list of postal codes and

towns/cities. 5. Highlight the entry. 6. Selecting an entry.

Entering a street and intersection 1. Select "Street" or the displayed street. 2. Enter a street and intersection in the same

way as you would enter a town/city.

If there are several streets with the same name:

1. Change to the list of street names. 2. Highlight the street. 3. Select the street.

Alternative: enter the street address and house number 1. Select "Street" or the displayed street. 2. Enter the street as you would the town/

city. 3. "House number" 4. Select the numbers. 5. Change to the list of house numbers. 6. Select a house number or range of house

numbers.

Street does not exist in the destination city/town The desired street does not exist in the speci fied city/town because it belongs to another part of the city/town.

1. "Navigation" 2. "Enter address" 3. Select "Street" or the displayed street. 4. Change to the list of street names. 5. Select "In" with the state/province cur

rently displayed. All streets of the selected state/province are offered. The associated town/city is displayed after the street name.

Seite 145

Destination entry Navigation

145 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

6. Select the letters. 7. Change to the list of street names. 8. Highlight the street. 9. Select the street.

Starting destination guidance after entering the destination 1. "Accept destination" 2. "Start guidance" or "Add as another

destination" Add, refer to page 151, a destination as a further destination.

Address book Create contacts, refer to page 218.

Selecting a destination from the address book 1. "Navigation" 2. "Address book"

Contacts with addresses are displayed if these addresses have been checked as destinations in the contacts. If the contacts with addresses from the mobile phone are not displayed, they first need to be checked as destinations, refer to page 219.

3. Select a contact in the list or, if desired, with "A-Z search".

4. "Business address" or "Home address"

Storing the destination in the address book After entering the destination, store the desti nation in the address book.

1. "Navigation" 2. "Map" 3. "Guidance" 4. Open "Options". 5. "Store as new contact" or "Add to existing

contact"

6. Select an existing contact, if available. 7. "Business address" or "Home address" 8. Enter "Last name" and, if necessary, "First

name". 9. "Store in vehicle"

Storing the position The current position can be stored in the ad dress book.

1. "Navigation" 2. Open "Options". 3. "Store position as contact" or "Add

position to contact"

Seite 146

Navigation Destination entry

146 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

4. Depending on the selection, choose an ex isting contact from the list. Select the type of address and enter the first and last name.

5. "Store in vehicle"

Editing or deleting an address 1. "Navigation" 2. "Address book" 3. Highlight the entry. 4. Open "Options". 5. "Edit in Contacts" or "Delete entry"

Using the home address as the destination The home address must be stored. Specify the home address, refer to page 211.

1. "Navigation" 2. "Address book" 3. "Home"

4. "Start guidance"

Last destinations At a glance The destinations previously entered are stored automatically. These destinations can be called up and used as a destination for destination guidance.

Calling up the last destination 1. "Navigation" 2. "Last destinations"

Starting destination guidance 1. "Navigation" 2. "Last destinations" 3. Select the destination. 4. "Start guidance"

Editing the destination 1. "Navigation" 2. "Last destinations" 3. Highlight the destination. 4. Open "Options". 5. "Edit destination"

Deleting the last destinations 1. "Navigation" 2. "Last destinations" 3. Highlight the destination. 4. Open "Options". 5. "Delete entry" or "Delete all last

destinations"

Special destinations General information Even with the latest navigation data, informa tion on specific special destinations may have

Seite 147

Destination entry Navigation

147 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

changed; for example, gas stations might not be in operation.

Opening the search for special destinations Selection of special destinations, such as ho tels or tourist attractions.

1. "Navigation" 2. "Points of Interest" 3. Select the search function.

Online Search 1. "Google Local Search" 2. Select a special destination. 3. Select the symbol. 4. "Start guidance"

A-Z search 1. "A-Z search" 2. "Town/City" 3. Select or enter the town/city. 4. "Category" 5. Select the category. 6. "Category details"

For some special destinations, multiple category details can be selected. Move the controller to the left to leave the category details.

7. "Keyword" 8. Enter the keyword.

A list of the special destinations is dis played.

9. Select a special destination. Details are displayed. If multiple details are stored, you can leaf through the pages. If a phone number is available, a connec tion can be established if necessary.

10. Select the symbol. 11. "Start guidance" or "Add as another

destination" Add a destination as a further destination, refer to page 151.

"Start search": if a search term is not entered, the search is repeated with the previous search term.

Category search 1. "Category search" 2. "Town/City" 3. Select or enter the town/city. 4. "Category" 5. Select the category. 6. "Category details"

For some special destinations, multiple category details can be selected. Move the controller to the left to leave the category details.

7. "Start search" A list of the special destinations is dis played.

8. Select a special destination. Details are displayed. If multiple details are stored, you can leaf through the pages. If a phone number is available, a connec tion can be established if necessary.

9. Select the symbol. 10. "Start guidance" or "Add as another

destination" Add a destination as a further destination, refer to page 151.

Display of special destinations List of special destinations: special destina tions are arranged by distance and appear with a directional arrow pointing to the special des tination.

Seite 148

Navigation Destination entry

148 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

In the splitscreen, special destinations of the selected category are displayed in the map view as symbols. The display depends on the scale of the map and the category.

Destination entry via the Concierge service A connection is established to the Concierge service, refer to page 221.

1. "Navigation" 2. "Enter address" 3. Open "Options". 4. "BMW Assist dest. entry"

Displaying special destinations in the map To display symbols of the special destinations in the map view:

1. "Navigation" 2. "Map" 3. Open "Options". 4. "Display Points of Interest" 5. Select the setting.

Destination entry by map Selecting the destination 1. "Navigation" 2. "Map"

The current position of the vehicle is dis played on the map.

3. "Interactive map"

4. Select the destination with crosshairs. To change the scale: turn the control

ler. To shift the map: move the controller in

the required direction. To shift the map diagonally: move the

controller in the required direction and turn it.

Specifying the street If the system does not recognize the street, one of the following pieces of information is displayed: A street name in the vicinity. The county. The coordinates of the destination.

Additional functions Additional functions are available on the inter active map after the controller is pressed.

Select the symbol. "Start guidance" or "Add as another destination"

Seite 149

Destination entry Navigation

149 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

Add a destination as a further destination, refer to page 151.

"Exit interactive map": return to the map view.

"View in northern direction" or "View in driving direction"

"Display destination": the map section around the destination is displayed.

"Display current location": the map section around your current location is displayed.

"Find points of interest": the search for special destinations is started.

Destination entry by voice General information Instructions for voice activation system, re

fer to page 25. When making a destination entry by voice,

you can change between voice operation and iDrive.

To have the available spoken instructions read out loud: Voice commands.

Saying the entries The town/city, street, and house number

can be entered using a single command. Countries, towns and cities, streets, and

intersections can be said as whole words or spelled in the language of the system, refer to page 77. Example: to enter a destination in a US state as a whole word, the system lan guage must be English.

Spell the entry if the spoken language and the language of the system differ.

Say the letters smoothly, and avoid exag gerating the pronunciation and inserting lengthy pauses between the letters.

The methods of entry depend on the navi gation data in use and the country and lan guage settings.

Entering the address in a command

1. Press the button on the steering wheel.

2. Enter address 3. Wait for a request from the system. 4. Say the address in the suggested order. 5. Continue making the entry as prompted by

the system. If necessary, individually name the sepa rate components of the address, e.g., the town/city.

Entering a town/city separately The town/city can be said as a complete word. With the destination entry menu displayed:

1. Press the button on the steering wheel.

2. City or Spell city 3. Wait for the system to prompt you for the

town/city. 4. Say the name of the town/city, or name at

least the first three letters. Depending on the entry, up to 20 towns/ cities may be suggested.

5. Select a location: Select a recommended town/

city: Yes. Select a different town/city: New

entry. Select an entry: Entry ..., for instance,

entry 2. Spell an entry: Spell city.

6. Continue making the entry as prompted by the system.

Seite 150

Navigation Destination entry

150 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

If there are several towns/cities with the same name: Towns/cities of the same name are grouped in a list and displayed as one location followed by an ellipsis.

1. Select an entry: Yes or Entry ..., e. g., En try 2.

2. Select the desired town/city.

Entering a street or intersection separately Enter a street and intersection in the same way as you would enter a town/city.

Entering a house number separately Depending on the data in the navigation sys tem, house numbers up to number 2,000 can be entered.

1. House number 2. Say the house number.

Say each digit separately. 3. Continue making the entry as prompted by

the system.

Starting destination guidance Start guidance

Planning a trip with intermediate destinations New trip A trip can be planned with several intermediate destinations.

1. "Navigation" 2. "Map" 3. Move the controller to the left if necessary. 4. "Guidance" 5. "Enter new destination"

6. Select the type of destination entry.

7. Enter the intermediate destination. 8. "Start guidance"

Entering intermediate destinations A maximum of 30 intermediate destinations can be entered for a trip.

1. "Enter new destination" 2. Select the type of destination entry. 3. Enter the intermediate destination. 4. "Add as another destination"

The intermediate destination is entered in the destination list and is highlighted.

5. Turn the controller until the intermediate destination is located at the desired loca tion in the list.

6. Press the controller.

Starting the trip 1. After all intermediate destinations are en

tered, highlight the first destination. If the second destination, for example, is highlighted when destination guidance is started, the first destination is skipped.

2. "Start guidance" This symbol marks the active leg of the

trip.

Seite 151

Destination entry Navigation

151 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

Storing a trip Up to 30 trips can be stored in the trip list. If necessary, delete existing trips to be able to store new trips.

1. Open "Options". 2. "Store trip" 3. Enter a name for the trip. 4. "OK"

Selecting a stored trip 1. "Navigation" 2. "Stored trips" 3. Select a stored trip. 4. "Start guidance"

Changing the trip direction Intermediate destinations are displayed in re verse order in the list.

1. "Map" 2. "Guidance" 3. Open "Options". 4. "Reverse order of trip dest."

Intermediate destination options 1. "Map" 2. "Guidance" 3. "Display all trip destinations" 4. Select an intermediate destination.

"Edit destination" "Reposition dest. in the trip": move an

intermediate destination to another po sition in the list.

"Delete dest. in the trip" "Go to next dest. in the trip"

Some options are not available for certain trips.

Deleting a stored trip 1. "Navigation" 2. "Stored trips"

3. Highlight the desired trip. 4. Open "Options". 5. "Delete all trips" or "Delete trip"

Opening the last trip 1. "Navigation" 2. "Stored trips" 3. "Last trip" 4. "Start guidance"

Seite 152

Navigation Destination entry

152 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

Destination guidance Vehicle equipment This chapter describes all series equipment as well as country-specific and special equipment offered for this model series.Therefore, it also describes equipment that may not be found in your vehicle, for instance due to the selected special equipment or the country version. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems.

Starting destination guidance 1. "Navigation" 2. Make a destination entry, refer to

page 144. 3. "Accept destination" 4. "Start guidance" The route is shown on the Control Display. The distance to the destination/intermediate destination and the estimated time of arrival are displayed in the map view.

Terminating destination guidance 1. "Navigation" 2. "Map" 3. "Guidance" 4. "Stop guidance"

Continuing destination guidance If the destination was not reached during the last trip, destination guidance can be resumed. "Resume guidance"

Route criteria General information The route calculated can be influenced by

selecting certain criteria. The route criteria can be changed when

the destination is entered and during desti nation guidance.

Road types are part of the navigation data and are taken into consideration when planning a route, e.g., avoid highways.

The recommended route may differ from the route you would take based on per sonal experience.

The settings are stored for the remote control currently in use.

Destination guidance with traffic bulletins, refer to page 159.

Changing the route criteria 1. "Navigation" 2. "Map" 3. "Route preference" 4. Select the criterion:

"Fast route": time-optimized route, being a combination of the shortest possible route and the fastest roads.

"ECO PRO route" or "Efficient route": optimized combination of the fastest and shortest possible route.

"Short route": short distance, irre spective of how fast or slow progress will be.

"Alternative routes": if available, alter native routes are suggested during ac tive destination guidance.

Seite 153

Destination guidance Navigation

153 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

The individual suggestions are high lighted in color.

5. Specify additional criteria for the route, if necessary: "Avoid highways": highways are

avoided wherever possible. "Avoid toll roads": toll roads are

avoided wherever possible. "Avoid ferries": ferries are avoided

where possible.

Route Different views of the route are available during destination guidance: Arrow view. List of route sections. Map view, refer to page 155.

Arrow view The following information is displayed during destination guidance: Large arrow: indicates the current direction

of travel. Street name of the road currently being

driven on. Small arrow: indicates the next change in

direction. Intersection view. Lane information. Traffic bulletins. Distance to the next change in direction.

Street name at the next change in direc tion.

Lane information On multi-lane roads, the recommended lanes are marked in the arrow view by a triangle. Solid triangle: best lane. Empty triangle: possible lane. However,

another lane change may be needed shortly.

Displaying a list of route sections When destination guidance is active, a list of the route sections can be displayed. The driv ing distance and traffic bulletins are displayed for each route section.

1. "Navigation" 2. "Route information" 3. Highlight a route section.

The route section is displayed on the split screen.

Bypassing a section of the route Calculate a new route for a route section.

1. "Navigation" 2. "Route information" 3. "New route for"

Seite 154

Navigation Destination guidance

154 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

4. Turn the controller. Enter the number of kilometers within which you would like to return to the original route.

5. Press the controller.

Resuming the original route If the route section should no longer be by passed:

1. "Navigation" 2. "Route information" 3. "New route for:" 4. "Remove blocking"

Gas station recommendation The remaining range is calculated and gas sta tions along the route are displayed if needed. Even with the latest navigation data, informa tion on individual special destinations may have changed; for example, gas stations might not be in operation.

1. "Navigation" 2. "Route information" 3. "Recommended refuel"

A list of the gas stations is displayed. 4. Highlight a gas station.

The position of the gas station is shown on the split screen.

5. Select the gas station. 6. Select the symbol. 7. "Start guidance": destination guidance to

the selected gas station is started. "Add as another destination": the gas sta tion is added to the route.

Destination guidance through voice instructions Switching spoken instructions on/off The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.

1. "Navigation" 2. "Map" 3. "Voice instructions"

Repeating a spoken instruction 1. "Navigation" 2. "Map" 3. Highlight the symbol. 4. Press the controller twice.

Volume of spoken instructions Turn the volume knob while giving an instruc tion until the desired volume is set. The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.

Saving the spoken instructions on the programmable memory buttons The function for switching the spoken instruc tions on/off can be stored on a programmable memory button, refer to page 22, for quick ac cess.

Map view Selecting the map view 1. "Navigation" 2. "Map"

Seite 155

Destination guidance Navigation

155 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

At a glance

1 Function bar 2 Route section with traffic obstruction 3 Traffic sign for traffic obstruction 4 Planned route 5 Current location 6 Upper status field 7 Lower status field

Lines in the map Streets and routes are displayed in different colors and styles depending on their classifica tion. Dashed lines represent railways and ferry connections. Country borders are indicated by thin lines.

Traffic obstructions Small triangles along the planned route indi cate route sections with traffic obstructions, depending on the map scale. The direction of the triangles indicates the direction of the ob struction. The traffic signs indicate the significance of the obstruction. Red traffic sign: the obstruction affects the

planned route or direction. Grey traffic sign: the obstruction does not

affect the planned route or direction. Traffic bulletins, refer to page 157.

Planned route After destination guidance is started, the plan ned route is displayed on the map.

Status fields Show/hide: press the controller. Upper status field: time, telephone, and en

tertainment details. Lower status field: symbol for active desti

nation guidance, status of traffic bulletins, time of arrival, and distance to destination.

Function bar The following functions are available in the function bar:

Symbol Function

Start/end destination guidance.

Switch spoken instructions on/ off.

Change the route criteria.

Search for a special destina tion.

Display traffic bulletins.

Open the interactive map.

Set the map view.

Change the scale.

To change to the function bar, move the con troller to the left.

Changing the map section "Interactive map"

To shift the map: move the controller in the required direction.

To shift the map diagonally: move the con troller in the required direction and turn it.

Changing the scale 1. Select the symbol. 2. To change the scale: turn the controller.

Seite 156

Navigation Destination guidance

156 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

Automatically scaled map scale In the map view facing north, turn the control ler in any direction until the AUTO scale is dis played. The entire route between the current location and the destination is displayed on the map.

Settings for the map view The settings are stored for the remote control currently in use.

1. "Navigation" 2. "Map" 3. Open "Options". 4. "Settings" 5. To set the map view: "Day/night mode"

Select and create the necessary settings depending on the light conditions. "Traffic conditions/gray map" active: the setting is disregarded.

"Satellite images" Depending on availability and resolution, satellite images are displayed at scales of approx. 1 mile to 600 miles/2 km to 1,000 km.

"Perspective view in 3D" Prominent areas that are contained in the navigation data are displayed on the map in 3D.

"Traffic conditions/gray map" The map is optimized for displaying traffic bulletins, refer to page 158. Symbols for the special destinations are no longer displayed.

Map view for splitscreen The map view can be selected for the split screen independently from the main screen.

1. Open "Options". 2. "Split screen"

3. Move the controller to the right repeatedly until the split screen is selected.

4. Select "Split screen content" or the scale. 5. Select the map view.

"Arrow display" "Map facing north" "Map direction of travel" "Map view with perspective" "Position" "Exit ramp view": selected blind drive

ways are displayed three dimension ally.

"Traffic conditions/gray map" 6. To change the scale: select the split

screen and turn the controller.

Traffic bulletins At a glance Display the traffic bulletins from radio sta

tions that broadcast the TI Traffic Informa tion of a traffic information service. Infor mation on traffic obstructions and hazards is updated continuously. Certain BMW models equipped with navi gation have the capability to display real- time traffic information. If your system has this capability the following additional terms and conditions apply: An End-User shall no longer have the right to use the Traffic Data in the event that the End-User is in material breach of the terms and conditions contained herein. A. Total Traffic Network, a division of Clear Channel Broadcasting, Inc. (Total Traffic Network) holds the rights to the traffic in cident data and RDS-TMC network through which it is delivered. You may not modify, copy, scan or use any other method to reproduce, duplicate, republish, transmit or distribute in any way any por

Seite 157

Destination guidance Navigation

157 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

tion of traffic incident data. You agree to in demnify, defend and hold harmless BMW of North America, LLC. (BMW NA) and Total Traffic Network, Inrix, Inc (and their affiliates) against any and all claims, dam ages, costs or other expenses that arise di rectly or indirectly out of (a) your unauthor ized use of the traffic incident data or the RDS-TMC network, (b) your violation of this directive and/or (c) any unauthorized or unlawful activities by you in connection herewith. B. Total Traffic Network traffic data is infor mational only. User assumes all risk of use. Total Traffic Network, BMW NA, and their suppliers make no representations about content, traffic and road conditions, route usability, or speed. C. The licensed material is provided to li censee as is, and where is. Total Traf fic Network, including, but not limited to, any and all third party providers of any of the licensed material, expressly disclaims, to the fullest extent permitted by law, all warranties or representations with respect to the licensed material (including, without limitation, that the licensed material will be error-free, will operate without interruption or that the traffic data will be accurate), ex press, implied or statutory, including, with out limitation, the implied warranties of merchantability, non-infringement fitness for a particular purpose, or those arising from a course of dealing or usage of trade. D. Neither Total Traffic Network, Inrix, Inc. or BMW NA will be liable to you for any in direct, special, consequential, exemplary, or incidental damages (including, without limitation, lost revenues, anticipated reve nues, or profits relating to the same) arising from any claim relating directly or indirectly to use of the traffic data, and even if Total Traffic Network, Inrix, Inc., or BMW NA are aware of the possibility of such damages. These limitations apply to all claims, in cluding, without limitation, claims in con

tract and tort (such as negligence, product liability and strict liability). Some states do not allow the exclusion or limitation of inci dental or consequential damages, so those particular limitations may not apply to you.

The traffic bulletins are indicated on the map by symbols.

The traffic bulletins for the surrounding area are stored in a list.

The symbol in the function bar of the map view turns red if there are traffic bulle tins that affect the calculated route.

Switching the reception on/off 1. "Navigation" 2. Open "Options". 3. "Receive Traffic Info"

Opening the list of traffic bulletins 1. "Navigation" 2. "Map" 3. "Traffic Info"

First, traffic bulletins for the calculated route are displayed. The traffic bulletins are sorted by their dis tance from the current position of the vehi cle.

4. Select a traffic bulletin. "More information": display additional

information. 5. Scroll to the next or previous traffic bulletin

if required.

Traffic bulletins on the map "Traffic conditions/gray map" active: The Control Display changes to a black and white display. This enables a better view of the traffic bulletins. The day/night mode is disre

Seite 158

Navigation Destination guidance

158 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

garded in this setting. Symbols and special destinations are not displayed.

1. "Navigation" 2. "Map" 3. Open "Options". 4. "Settings" 5. "Traffic conditions/gray map"

Symbols in the map view Depending on the scale of the map and the lo cation of the traffic obstruction along the route, the symbols for the traffic obstructions are dis played.

Additional information in the map view Depending on the map scale, a traffic obstruc tion's length, direction, and impact are dis played in the map using triangles or gray bars along the calculated route. Red: traffic congestion Orange: stop-and-go traffic Yellow: heavy traffic Green: clear roads Gray: general traffic bulletins such as road

construction The displayed information depends on the par ticular traffic information service.

Filtering traffic bulletins You can set which traffic bulletins appear on the map.

1. "Navigation" 2. "Map" 3. Open "Options".

4. "Traffic Info categories" 5. Select the desired category.

Traffic bulletins of the selected category are displayed on the map. Traffic bulletins that are relevant to the

route are always shown. For your own safety, traffic bulletins that

notify you of potentially dangerous situa tions, such as wrong-way drivers, cannot be hidden.

Destination guidance with traffic bulletins

General information Detour suggestions from the navigation sys tem can be manually accepted when using semi-dynamic destination guidance. When us ing dynamic destination guidance, they are au tomatically accepted for route guidance.

Semi-dynamic destination guidance When traffic bulletin reception is switched on, semi-dynamic destination guidance is active. The destination guidance system takes the available traffic bulletins into account. A mes sage is displayed depending on the route, the traffic bulletins, and the possible detour routes. If possible, a detour is offered in case of traffic obstructions. The upper part of the message shows: Symbol of the first traffic obstruction, pos

sibly with the distance to the beginning of the obstruction.

Seite 159

Destination guidance Navigation

159 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

Total length of the traffic obstructions on the route.

Time by which the trip is extended due to the traffic obstructions.

The lower part of the message shows: Detour recommendation with the distance

to the beginning of the detour. Difference between the length of the new

route compared to the original route. Time gained if the detour is taken com

pared to the original route with the traffic obstructions.

Both the original route, shown in white, and the detour are displayed on the split screen.

Accepting the detour "Detour"

In the event of special hazards, e. g., objects on the road, a message is displayed without a de tour suggestion. Detours can also be accepted if the traffic messages are called up in the list.

1. "Navigation" 2. "Map" 3. "Traffic Info" 4. "Detour information" 5. "Detour"

Dynamic destination guidance The route is automatically changed in the event of traffic obstructions. The system does not point out traffic ob

structions along the original route. Traffic bulletins continue to be displayed

on the map. Depending on road type and the kind and

extent of the traffic obstruction, the calcu lated route may lead through the traffic ob struction.

Dangerous situations are displayed regard less of the setting.

Activating dynamic destination guidance 1. "Navigation" 2. Open "Options". 3. "Dynamic guidance"

Seite 160

Navigation Destination guidance

160 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

What to do if... Vehicle equipment This chapter describes all series equipment as well as country-specific and special equipment offered for this model series.Therefore, it also describes equipment that may not be found in your vehicle, for instance due to the selected special equipment or the country version. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems.

What to do if... The current transmission position cannot

be displayed? The vehicle is located in an unrecognized region, is in a poor reception area, or the system is currently determining the posi tion. Reception is usually best when you have an unobstructed view of the sky.

The destination without street information is not used for route guidance? When city has been input, no downtown can be determined. Input any street in the selected city and start destination guid ance.

The destination is not used for route guid ance? The destination data are not contained in the navigation data. Select a destination that is as close as possible to the original.

Letters for destination input cannot be se lected? The stored data do not contain the data of the destination. Select a goal that is as close as possible to the original.

Is the map displayed in shades of gray? "Traffic conditions/gray map" active:

The Control Display changes to a black and white display. This enables a better view of the traffic bulletins.

Spoken instructions are no longer output during route guidance in front of intersec tions? The area has not yet been fully recorded, or you have left the recommended route and the system requires a few seconds to calculate a new route suggestion.

Seite 161

What to do if... Navigation

161 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

Entertainment This chapter helps assure your enjoyment when receiving radio stations and playing CDs, DVDs,

and tracks from the music collection.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

Tone Vehicle equipment This chapter describes all series equipment as well as country-specific and special equipment offered for this model series.Therefore, it also describes equipment that may not be found in your vehicle, for instance due to the selected special equipment or the country version. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems.

General information The sound settings are stored for the remote control currently in use.

Treble, bass, balance, and fader "Treble": treble adjustment. "Bass": depth adjustment. "Balance": left/right volume distribution. "Fader": front/rear volume distribution.

Setting treble, bass, balance, and fader 1. "CD/Multimedia", "Radio" or "Settings" 2. "Tone"

3. Select the desired tone settings.

4. To adjust: turn the controller. 5. To store: press the controller.

Equalizer Setting for individual audio frequency ranges.

Adjusting the equalizer 1. "CD/Multimedia", "Radio" or "Settings" 2. "Tone" 3. "Equalizer" 4. Select the desired setting.

5. To adjust: turn the controller. 6. To store: press the controller.

Seite 164

Entertainment Tone

164 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

Multi-channel playback, surround Choose between stereo and multi-channel playback, surround.

Setting multi-channel playback, surround 1. "CD/Multimedia", "Radio" or "Settings" 2. "Tone" 3. "Surround"

When surround is activated, multi-channel playback is simulated when a stereo audio track is played.

Volume "Speed volume": speed-dependent vol

ume control. "PDC": volume of the PDC signal com

pared to the entertainment sound output. "Gong": volume of the signal, such as the

safety belt reminder, compared to the en tertainment sound output.

"Microphone": volume of the microphone during a phone call.

"Loudspeak.": volume of the loudspeakers during a phone call.

The following volumes are only stored for the respective paired telephone: "Microphone", "Loudspeak.".

Adjusting the volume 1. "CD/Multimedia", "Radio" or "Settings" 2. "Tone" 3. "Volume settings" 4. Select the desired volume setting.

5. To adjust: turn the controller. 6. To store: press the controller.

Resetting the tone settings All tone settings can be reset to the default setting.

1. "CD/Multimedia", "Radio" or "Settings" 2. "Tone" 3. "Reset"

Seite 165

Tone Entertainment

165 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

Radio Vehicle equipment This chapter describes all series equipment as well as country-specific and special equipment offered for this model series.Therefore, it also describes equipment that may not be found in your vehicle, for instance due to the selected special equipment or the country version. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems.

Controls

1 Volume, on/off 2 Change wave band 3 Change entertainment sources 4 Change station/track 5 Programmable memory buttons

Sound output Switching on/off When the ignition is switched off: press ON/OFF button on the radio.

Muting When the ignition is switched on or the engine is running: press the ON/OFF button on the radio.

AM/FM station Selecting a station 1. "Radio" 2. "FM" or "AM" 3. Select the desired station.

All saved stations are stored for the remote control currently in use.

Changing the station Turn the controller and press it or

Press the button

or Press the buttons on the steering wheel, refer to page 12.

Storing a station 1. "Radio" 2. "FM" or "AM"

Seite 166

Entertainment Radio

166 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

3. Highlight the desired station.

4. Press the controller for an extended period. 5. Select the desired memory location. The stations are stored for the remote control currently in use. The stations can also be stored on the pro grammable memory buttons, refer to page 22.

Selecting a station manually Station selection via the frequency.

1. "Radio" 2. "FM" or "AM" 3. "Manual" 4. To select the frequency: turn the control

ler.

To store the station: press the controller for an extended period.

Renaming a station An FM station with changing station names can be renamed.

1. "Radio" 2. "FM"

3. Select the desired station. 4. Open "Options". 5. "Rename to:"

If necessary, wait for the desired name to be displayed.

The selected station name is added to the list of current stations and stored stations.

RDS RDS broadcasts additional information, such as the station name, in the FM wave band.

Switching the RDS on/off 1. "Radio" 2. "FM" 3. Open "Options". 4. "RDS"

The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.

HD Radio reception Many stations broadcast both analog and digi tal signals. License conditions HD Radio Technology manufactured under li cense from iBiquity Digital Corporation. U.S. and Foreign Patents. HD Radio and the HD, HD Radio, and Arc logos are proprietary trade marks of iBiquity Digital Corp.

Seite 167

Radio Entertainment

167 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

Activating/deactivating digital radio reception 1. "Radio" 2. "FM" or "AM" 3. Open "Options". 4. "HD Radio Reception" The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.

This symbol is displayed in the status line when the audio signal is digital. When tuning to a station with a digital signal, it may take several seconds for the station to be played back in digital quality. Note on HD stations whose station name ends in ...HD or with ...HD1: In areas in which the station is not continu ously received in digital mode, the playback switches between analog and digital reception. In this case, switch off digital radio reception. Note on HD multicast stations whose station name ends in ...HD2, ...HD3, ...: In areas in which the station is not continu ously received in digital mode, the audible sig nal may be interrupted for several seconds. This is reception related.

Displaying additional information Some stations broadcast additional informa tion on the current track, such as the name of the artist.

1. Select the desired station. 2. Open "Options". 3. "Station info"

Selecting a substation This symbol indicates that a main station

also broadcasts additional substations. The station name of the main station ends in HD1. Station names of the substations end in HD2, HD3, etc.

1. Select the desired station.

2. Press the controller. 3. Select the substation. When reception is poor, the substation is muted.

Satellite radio General information The channels are offered in predefined pack ages. The packages must be enabled by tele phone.

Navigation bar overview

Symbol Function

Change the list view.

Select the category.

Direct channel entry

Timeshift

Open the My Favorites cate gory/open a favorite.

Manage the favorites.

Traffic Jump

The functions of the navigation bar symbols can also be stored on the programmable mem ory buttons, refer to page 22.

Managing a subscription To be able to enable or unsubscribe from the channels, you must have reception. It is usually at its best when you have an unobstructed view of the sky. The channel name is displayed in the status line.

Seite 168

Entertainment Radio

168 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

Enabling channels The Unsubscribed Channels category contains all disabled channels.

1. "Radio" 2. "Satellite radio" 3. "Category"

4. Select the Unsubscribed Channels cate gory.

5. Select the desired channel. The phone number and an electronic serial number, ESN, are displayed.

6. Select the phone number to have the channel enabled.

You can unsubscribe from the channels again via this phone number.

Unsubscribing from channels 1. "Radio" 2. "Satellite radio" 3. Open "Options".

4. "Manage subscription"

5. The phone number and an electronic serial number, ESN, are displayed.

6. Call Sirius to unsubscribe from the chan nels.

Selecting channels You can only listen to enabled channels. The selected channel is stored for the remote control currently in use.

Via the iDrive 1. "Radio" 2. "Satellite radio" 3. Select "All channels" or the desired cate

gory. 4. Select the desired channel.

Via the button on the radio Press the button. The next channel is selected.

Seite 169

Radio Entertainment

169 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

Via direct channel entry 1. "Radio" 2. "Satellite radio" 3. "Set channel" 4. Turn the controller until the desired chan

nel is reached and press the controller.

Storing a channel 1. "Radio" 2. "Satellite radio" 3. If necessary, open "All channels" or the de

sired category. 4. Select the desired channel. 5. Press the controller again. 6. Press the controller again to confirm the

highlighted channel.

7. Select the desired memory location. The channels are stored for the remote control currently in use. The channels can also be stored on the pro grammable memory buttons, refer to page 22.

Changing the list view The list view changes every time the first sym bol on the navigation bar is pressed. Information on the channel is displayed.

Symbol Meaning

Channel name

Artist

Track

Selecting a category 1. "Radio" 2. "Satellite radio" 3. "Category" 4. Select the desired category.

Timeshift Approx. one hour of the program being broad cast on the channel currently being listened to is stored in a buffer. Prerequisite: the signal must be available. The stored audio track can be played with a delay following the live broadcast. When the buffer is full, the older tracks are overwritten. The buffer is cleared when a new channel is selected.

Opening the timeshift function 1. "Radio" 2. "Satellite radio" 3. "Replay - Time shift"

The red arrow shows the current playback position.

The time difference to the live broadcast is displayed next to the buffer bar.

For live transmissions "live".

Timeshift menu

Symbol Function

Go to the live broadcast

Playback/pause

Seite 170

Entertainment Radio

170 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

Symbol Function

Next track

Previous track

Fast forward

Reverse

Automatic timeshift deactivated/ activated

Automatic timeshift When the function is activated, audio playback is stopped automatically in the event of: Incoming and outgoing telephone calls. Activation of the voice activation system. Muting. The audio playback then continues with a time delay. To activate:

1. "Radio" 2. "Satellite radio" 3. "Replay - Time shift" 4. "Automatic time shift" To deactivate:

"Automatic time shift"

Storing favorites Up to 30 favorites can be stored in the favor ites list. Available favorites are artist, track, game, league, and team.

Storing the artist, track, or game It is only possible to store favorites that are currently being broadcast. The channel infor mation must be available.

1. "Radio" 2. "Satellite radio" 3. If necessary, open "All channels" or the de

sired category.

4. Select the desired channel. 5. Press the controller again. 6. Select the artist, track, or game.

Storing the league or team Leagues or teams can be added to the favor ites from a selection list.

1. "Radio" 2. "Satellite radio" 3. "Manage favorites" 4. "Add sports information"

5. Select the league. 6. Select "Add all teams" or the desired team.

Opening the favorites If an activated favorite is played back, the fol lowing message appears for approx. 20 sec onds "Favorite alert!".

"Favorites" Select the symbol while the message is shown.

The displayed favorite is played.

Seite 171

Radio Entertainment

171 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

If there is no message, the system changes to the My Favorites category. All favorites cur rently being broadcast can be selected from a list.

Managing the favorites

Activating/deactivating the favorites Favorites can be activated and deactivated globally and individually.

1. "Satellite radio" 2. "Manage favorites" 3. Select "Activate alert" or the desired favor

ites. The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.

Deleting favorites 1. "Satellite radio" 2. "Manage favorites" 3. Highlight the desired favorite. 4. Open "Options". 5. "Delete entry"

Traffic Jump Traffic and weather information for a selected region is broadcast every few minutes.

Selecting a region 1. "Radio" 2. "Satellite radio" 3. Open "Options". 4. "Set jump" 5. Select the desired region. The region is stored for the remote control cur rently in use.

Activating/deactivating the jump 1. "Radio" 2. "Satellite radio" 3. "Jump to:"

Information for the selected region is broad cast as soon as it is available. A new panel opens. Canceling the Traffic Jump: "Cancel".

Symbol Meaning

Information will be broadcast shortly.

Information is currently being broadcast.

Select one of the symbols to deactivate Traffic Jump.

Automatic update About twice a year, Sirius performs an update of the channel names and positions. The up date takes place automatically and may take several minutes.

Notes Reception may not be available in some

situations, such as under certain environ mental or topographic conditions. The sat ellite radio has no influence on this.

The signal may not be available in tunnels or underground garages; next to tall build ings; or near trees, mountains or other powerful sources of radio interference.

Stored stations General information It is possible to store up to 40 stations.

Calling up a station 1. "Radio" 2. "Presets" 3. Select the desired station.

Seite 172

Entertainment Radio

172 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

Storing a station The station currently selected is stored.

1. "Radio" 2. "Presets" 3. "Store station"

4. Select the desired memory location. The list of stored stations is stored for the re mote control currently in use. The stations can also be stored on the pro grammable memory buttons, refer to page 22.

Deleting a station 1. "Radio" 2. "Presets" 3. Select the desired station. 4. Open "Options". 5. "Delete entry"

Seite 173

Radio Entertainment

173 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

CD/multimedia Vehicle equipment This chapter describes all series equipment as well as country-specific and special equipment offered for this model series.Therefore, it also describes equipment that may not be found in your vehicle, for instance due to the selected special equipment or the country version. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems.

Controls

1 Volume, on/off 2 Eject CD/DVD 3 CD/DVD drive 4 Change the entertainment source 5 Change station/track 6 Programmable memory buttons

Sound output Switching on/off When the ignition is switched off: press ON/OFF button on the radio.

Muting When the ignition is switched on or the engine is running: press the ON/OFF button on the radio.

CD/DVD Playback

Loading the CD/DVD player Insert the CD/DVD with the printed side up. Playback begins automatically. Reading can take a few minutes with com pressed audio files.

Starting playback A CD/DVD is contained in the CD/DVD player.

1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "CD/DVD" 3. Select the desired CD or DVD.

Symbol Meaning

CD/DVD player

Playable formats DVD: DVD-ROM, DVD-R, DVD+R, DVD-

RW, DVD+RW, DVD-R DL, DVD+R DL, DVD audio (video part only), DVD video.

CD: CD-ROM, CD-R, CD-RW, CD-DA. Compressed audio files: MP3, WMA, AAC,

M4A.

Seite 174

Entertainment CD/multimedia

174 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

Audio playback

Selecting the track using the button Press the button for the appropriate direction as often as necessary until

the desired track is played back.

Selecting the track using the iDrive

Audio CDs

Select the desired track to begin playback.

CDs/DVDs with compressed audio files Depending on the data, some letters and num bers of the CD/DVD may not be displayed cor rectly.

1. Select the directory if necessary. To change to a higher level directory: move the controller to the left.

2. Select the desired track to begin playback.

Displaying information on the track

If information about a track has been stored, it is displayed automatically: Interpret. Album track. Number of tracks on the CD/DVD. File name of track.

Random playback 1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "CD/DVD" 3. Select the desired CD or DVD.

Seite 175

CD/multimedia Entertainment

175 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

4. Open "Options". 5. "Random"

CDs/DVDs with compressed audio files: all tracks within the selected directory are played in random order. Random mode is switched off when the audio source is changed and the ignition is switched off.

Fast forward/reverse Press and hold the button.

Video playback

Country codes Only DVDs with the code of the home region can be played back; also refer to the informa tion on the DVD.

Code Region

1 USA, Canada

2 Japan, Europe, Middle East, South Af rica

3 Southeast Asia

4 Australia, Central and South America, New Zealand

5 Northwest Asia, North Africa

6 China

0 All regions

Playback The video image is displayed on the Control Display up to a speed of approx. 2 mph/3 km/h; in some countries, it is only displayed while the handbrake is set or the automatic transmission is in position P.

DVD video 1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "CD/DVD" 3. Select a DVD with video content. 4. "DVD menu"

5. Start the DVD via the DVD menu.

Video menu To open the video menu: turn the controller during playback. Press the controller when "Back" is displayed.

Symbol Function

Open DVD menu

Starting playback

Pause

Stop

Next chapter

Previous chapter

Fast forward

Reverse

Seite 176

Entertainment CD/multimedia

176 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

In fast forward/reverse: the speed increases every time the controller is pressed. To stop, start playback.

DVD menu 1. If necessary, turn the controller to open the

video menu. 2. "DVD menu"

The DVD menu is displayed. The display depends on the contents of the DVD.

3. To select menu items: move the controller and press it.

To change to the video menu: turn the control ler and press it.

DVD settings For some DVDs, settings can only be made via the DVD menu; refer also to the information on the DVD.

Selecting the language The languages that are available depend on the DVD.

1. Turn the controller during playback. 2. Open "Options". 3. "Audio/language"

4. Select the desired language.

Selecting the subtitles The subtitles that are available depend on the DVD.

1. Turn the controller during playback. 2. Open "Options". 3. "Subtitles" 4. Select the desired language or "Do not

display subtitles".

Setting the brightness, contrast and color 1. Turn the controller during playback. 2. Open "Options". 3. "Display settings" 4. "Brightness", "Contrast" or "Color"

5. Turn the controller until the desired setting is reached and press the controller.

Selecting the zoom Display the video image on the entire screen.

1. Turn the controller during playback. 2. Open "Options".

Seite 177

CD/multimedia Entertainment

177 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

3. "Additional options" 4. "Zoom mode"

Selecting a track DVD video:

1. Turn the controller when the DVD menu is displayed.

2. Open "Options". 3. "Additional options" 4. "Select title" 5. Select the desired track.

Selecting the camera angle The availability of a different camera angle de pends on the DVD and the current DVD track.

1. Turn the controller during playback. 2. Open "Options". 3. "Additional options" 4. "Viewing angle" 5. Select the desired camera angle.

Opening the main menu, back These functions are not contained on every DVD. Therefore, they may not be available for use.

Notes

CD/DVD player Do not remove the cover BMW CD/DVD players and changers are

officially designated Class 1 laser products. Do not operate if the cover is damaged; otherwise, severe eye damage can result.

CDs and DVDs Use of CDs/DVDs Do not use self-recorded CDs/DVDs

with labels applied, as these can be come detached during playback due to heat buildup and can cause irrep arable damage to the device.

Only use round CDs/DVDs with a standard diameter of 4.7 in/12 cm and do not play CDs/DVDs with an adapter, e.g., single CDs; otherwise, the CDs or the adapter may jam and no longer eject.

Do not use combined CDs/DVDs, e.g., DVD Plus, as the CDs/DVDs can jam and will no longer eject.

General malfunctions CD/DVD players have been optimized for

performance in vehicles. In some instances they may be more sensitive to faulty CDs/ DVDs than stationary devices would be.

If a CD/DVD cannot be played, first check whether it has been inserted correctly.

Humidity High levels of humidity can lead to condensa tion on the CD/DVD or the laser's scan lens, and temporarily prevent playback.

Malfunctions involving individual CDs/ DVDs If malfunctions occur only with particular CDs/ DVDs, this can be due to one of the following causes:

Seite 178

Entertainment CD/multimedia

178 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

Self-recorded CDs/DVDs Possible reasons for malfunctions with

self-recorded CDs/DVDs are inconsistent data creation or recording processes, or poor quality or old age of the blank CD/ DVD.

Only label CDs/DVDs on the upper side with a pen intended for this purpose.

Damage Avoid fingerprints, dust, scratches and

moisture. Store CDs/DVDs in a sleeve. Do not subject CDs/DVDs to temperatures

over 122 /50 , high humidity or direct sunlight.

CDs/DVDs with copy protection CDs/DVDs are often provided with a copy pro tection feature by the manufacturer. This can mean that some CDs/DVDs cannot be played or can only be played to a limited extent.

MACROVISION This product contains copyrighted technology that is based on multiple registered US patents and the intellectual property of the Macrovision Corporation and other manufacturers. The use of this copy protection must be approved by Macrovision. Media protected by this product - unless otherwise agreed with Macrovision - may only be used for private purposes. Copy ing of this technology is prohibited.

DTS Digital Surround

Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent Numbers: 5,451,942; 5,956,674; 5,974,380; 5,978,762; 6,487,535 & and other patents granted and registered in the USA and worldwide. DTS and the logo are registered trademarks & DTS Digital Surround and the DTS logos are trademarks of DTS Inc. DTS, Inc. All rights reserved.

Music collection Storing music

General information Music tracks from CDs/DVDs and USB devices can be stored in the music collection on a hard disc in the vehicle and played from there. Audio CD: tracks are converted into a com

pressed audio format. If available, informa tion on the album, such as the artist, is stored as well.

CD/DVD or USB device with compressed audio files: the entire content of the CD/DVD or the USB device is stored in the vehicle as an album. The WMA, MP3, M4A, and AAC formats are stored. Individual tracks and directories can be deleted later, Deleting a track and directory, refer to page 183. Tracks with DRM copy protection can be stored but cannot be played back.

Backing up music data Regularly back up the music data; other

wise, it could be lost if there is a fault on the hard disc.

Music recognition technology and re lated data are provided by Grace

note. Gracenote is the industry standard in music recognition technology and related con tent delivery. For more information, please visit www.gracenote.com. CD and music-related data from Gracenote, Inc., copyright 2000, Gracenote up to now. Gracenote-Software Copyright 2000, Grace note up to now. This product and service may practice one or more of the following U.S. Pat ents: #5,987,525; #6,061,680; #6,154,773, #6,161,132, #6,230,192, #6,230,207, #6,240,459, #6,330,593, and other patents is sued or pending. Some services supplied un der license from Open Globe, Inc. for U.S. Pat ent: #6,304,523.

Seite 179

CD/multimedia Entertainment

179 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

Storing from a CD/DVD 1. Insert a CD or DVD into the CD/DVD

player. 2. "CD/Multimedia" 3. "CD/DVD" 4. Select the symbol for the CD/DVD

player. 5. "Store in vehicle"

The music collection is displayed and the first track of the CD/DVD is played back. During the storage process, the tracks are played in se quence. Observe the following during the storage proc ess: Do not switch to the CD/DVD player and do not remove the CD/DVD from the CD/DVD player as this will interrupt the storage process. You can switch to the other audio sources without interrupting the storage process. Tracks from the current CD/DVD that have already been stored can be called up.

Interrupting storage 1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "CD/DVD"

3. "Storing..."

4. "Cancel storing" The storage process is interrupted and can be continued at any time.

Continuing the storage process 1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "CD/DVD" 3. Select the symbol for the CD/DVD

player. 4. "Continue storing" Storage of the CD/DVD continues at the begin ning of the track at which storage was inter rupted.

Album information During storage, information such as the name of the artist is stored with the track, if this infor mation is available in the vehicle database or on the CD. To update the database, contact your service center.

Storing from a USB device To store music, a suitable device must be con nected to the USB interface in the glove com partment. Suitable devices: USB mass storage devi

ces, such as USB flash drives or MP3 play ers with a USB interface.

Unsuitable devices: USB hard drives, USB hubs, USB memory card readers with mul tiple inserts, Apple iPod/iPhone. Music from the Apple iPod/iPhone can be played

Seite 180

Entertainment CD/multimedia

180 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

via the USB audio interface in the center armrest.

File systems: standard file systems for USB devices are supported. The FAT 32 format is recommended.

1. Connect the USB device to the USB inter face in the glove compartment, refer to page 123.

2. "CD/Multimedia" 3. "Music collection" 4. Open "Options". 5. "Music data import/export" 6. "Import music (USB)"

Playing music

Music search All tracks for which additional information has been stored can be accessed by the music search. Tracks without additional information can be called up via the corresponding album, refer to page 182.

1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "Music collection"

3. "Music search"

4. Select the desired category.

5. Select the desired entry. Select "A-Z search", refer to page 23,

and input the desired entry. Select the desired entry from the list.

6. Select other categories if you wish. The tracks found are listed in alphabetical order. Not all categories need to be selected. For example, to search for all tracks by a cer tain artist, call up that artist only. All of the tracks by that artist are then displayed.

7. "Start play" The list of tracks is repeated automatically.

Restarting the music search "New search"

Seite 181

CD/multimedia Entertainment

181 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

Music search by voice Instructions for voice activation system, refer to page 25.

1. Press the button on the steering wheel.

2. Music search 3. Open the desired category, e. g., Select

artist. 4. Say the desired entry in the list. 5. Select other categories if you wish. To select a track directly: Title ... Say the voice command and the name of the desired track in a single command.

Current playback The list of tracks that was generated last by the music search, or the album that was se lected last.

1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "Music collection" 3. "Current playback"

4. Select the desired track, if necessary.

Top 50 The 50 most frequently played tracks.

1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "Music collection" 3. "Top 50" 4. Select the desired track, if necessary.

Albums All stored albums, listed in order of their stor age dates.

Symbol Format

Audio CD

Compressed audio files

1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "Music collection" 3. Select the desired album.

Depending on the album, the tracks or the subdirectories of the album are displayed. The first track is played automatically, if possible.

4. Change directories if needed to select tracks. To go up a level in the directory: move the controller to the left.

Random playback All tracks of the selection are played back in random order.

1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "Music collection"

Seite 182

Entertainment CD/multimedia

182 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

3. Open "Options". 4. "Random"

Managing music

Albums

Renaming an album The name of the album, if available, is automat ically entered when the album is stored. If the name is not available, it can be changed later if desired.

1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "Music collection" 3. Highlight the desired album. 4. Open "Options". 5. "Rename album"

6. Select the letters individually.

Deleting an album An album cannot be deleted while a track from that album is being played.

1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "Music collection" 3. Highlight the desired album. 4. Open "Options". 5. "Delete album"

Deleting a track and directory A track cannot be deleted while it is being played. A directory cannot be deleted while a track from that directory is being played.

1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "Music collection" 3. Highlight the directory or track. 4. Open "Options". 5. "Delete folder" or "Delete track"

Free memory capacity Display the free memory capacity in the music collection.

1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "Music collection" 3. Open "Options". 4. "Free memory"

Music collection

Backing up the music collection The entire music collection can be stored on a USB device. Make sure there is enough free memory capacity on the USB device. Depending on the number of tracks, backing up the music collection may take several

Seite 183

CD/multimedia Entertainment

183 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

hours. Therefore, it is best to perform the backup during a long trip.

1. Starting the engine. 2. Connect the USB device to the USB inter

face in the glove compartment, refer to page 123.

3. "CD/Multimedia" 4. "Music collection" 5. Open "Options". 6. "Music data import/export"

7. "Backup music on USB"

Storing the music collection in the vehicle When storing from the USB device, the exist ing music collection in the vehicle is replaced.

1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "Music collection" 3. Open "Options". 4. "Music data import/export" 5. "Restore music from USB"

Deleting the music collection 1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "Music collection" 3. Open "Options". 4. "Delete music collection"

External devices At a glance

Symbol Meaning

AUX-IN port

USB audio interface

Music interface for smartphones

Bluetooth audio

AUX-IN port

At a glance For connecting audio devices, e.g., MP3

player. The sound is output on the vehicle loudspeakers.

Recommendation: use medium tone and volume settings on the audio device. The tone depends on the quality of the audio files.

Connecting

The AUX-IN port is in the center console.

Seite 184

Entertainment CD/multimedia

184 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

Connect the headphone connector or line-out connector of the device to the AUX-IN port.

Playback 1. Connect the audio device, switch it on and

select a track on the audio device. 2. "CD/Multimedia" 3. If necessary, "External devices" 4. "AUX front" Sound is output on the vehicle loudspeakers.

Volume The volume of the sound output is dependent on the audio device. If this volume differs markedly from the volume of the other audio sources, it is advisable to adjust the volumes.

Adjusting the volume 1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. If necessary, "External devices" 3. "AUX front" 4. "Volume"

5. Turn the controller until the desired volume is set and press the controller.

USB audio interface/music interface for smartphones

At a glance It is possible to connect external audio devices. They can be operated via iDrive.The sound is output on the vehicle loudspeakers.

Connectors for external devices Connection via USB audio interface: Apple

iPod/iPhone, USB devices, e.g., MP3 play ers, USB flash drives, or mobile phones that are supported by the USB audio inter face.

Connection via snap-in adapter, refer to page 207, when equipped with the music interface for smartphones: Apple iPhone or mobile phones. Playback is only possible if no audio device is connected to the analog AUX-IN port.

Due to the large number of different audio de vices available on the market, it cannot be en sured that every audio device/mobile phone is operable on the vehicle. Ask your service center about suitable audio devices/mobile phones.

Audio files Standard audio files can be played back: MP3. WMA. WAV (PCM). AAC, M4A. Playback lists: M3U, WPL, PLS.

File system Standard file systems for USB devices are supported. The FAT 32 format is recom mended.

Seite 185

CD/multimedia Entertainment

185 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

Connecting

The USB audio interface is in the center con sole.

Connection of Apple iPod/iPhone via USB audio interface Connect using a flexible adapter cable. Connect the Apple iPod/iPhone to the USB in terface. The Apple iPod/iPhone menu structure is sup ported by the USB audio interface.

Connection of a USB device via the USB audio interface Connect using a flexible adapter cable to pro tect the USB audio interface and the USB de vice against physical damage. Connect the USB device to the USB interface.

After connecting for the first time Information on all music tracks, e.g. artist or type of music, as well as playback lists are transmitted into the vehicle. This may take some time, depending on the USB device and the number of tracks. During transmission, the tracks can be called up via the file directory.

Number of tracks Information from up to four USB devices or for approx. 36,000 tracks can be stored in the ve hicle. If a fifth device is connected or if more than 36,000 tracks are stored, information on existing tracks may be deleted.

Copy protection Music tracks with integrated Digital Rights Management (DRM) cannot be played.

Playback 1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "External devices" 3. Select the or symbol.

The playback starts with the first track. The CD cover belonging to the track may ap pear on the Control Display after several sec onds.

Track search Selection is possible via: Playback lists. Information: type of music, artist, and, if

available, composer, album, track. Additionally for USB devices: file directory,

composer. Tracks are displayed if they have been saved in the Latin alphabet.

Starting the track search 1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "External devices" 3. Select the or symbol. 4. "Search" 5. Select the desired category, e.g., "Genre"

or "Artist". All entries are displayed in a list.

Seite 186

Entertainment CD/multimedia

186 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

Open "A-Z search" and input the de sired entry. When a letter is entered, the results are filtered using this letter as the first letter. If multiple letters are entered, all results that contain that se quence are displayed.

Select the desired entry from the list.

6. Select other categories if you wish. Not all categories need to be selected. For example, if all of the tracks by a certain ar tist are to be displayed, call up that artist only. All of the tracks by that artist are then displayed.

7. "Start play"

Restarting a track search "New search"

Playback lists Calling up playback lists.

1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "External devices" 3. Select the or symbol. 4. "Playlists"

Current playback List of tracks currently being played.

1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "External devices" 3. Select the or symbol. 4. "Current playback"

Random playback The current list of tracks is played back in ran dom order.

1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "External devices" 3. Open "Options". 4. "Random"

Fast forward/reverse Press and hold the button.

Notes Do not expose the audio device to extreme en vironmental conditions, such as very high tem peratures; refer to the audio device operating instructions. Depending on the configuration of the audio files, e.g., bit rates greater than 256 kbit/s, the files may not play back correctly in each case.

Information on connection The connected audio device is supplied

with a max. power of 500 mA if supported by the device. Therefore, do not addition ally connect the device to a socket in the vehicle; otherwise, playback may be com promised.

Do not use force when plugging the con nector into the USB interface.

Do not connect devices such as fans or lamps to the USB audio interface.

Do not connect USB hard drives. Do not use the USB audio interface to re

charge external devices.

Bluetooth audio

At a glance Music files on external devices such as au

dio devices or mobile phones can be played back via Bluetooth.

Seite 187

CD/multimedia Entertainment

187 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

Use of a mobile phone as an audio source, refer to page 198.

Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc.

The sound is output on the vehicle loud speakers.

The volume of the sound output is de pendent on the device. If necessary, adjust the volume on the device.

Up to four external devices can be paired with the vehicle.

Requirements The device is suitable. Information at

www.bmwusa.com/bluetooth. The device is ready for operation. The ignition is switched on. Bluetooth is activated on the vehicle, refer

to page 197, and on the device. Bluetooth presettings must be made on

the device, such as for a connection with out confirmation or visibility; refer to the device operating instructions.

A number with at least four and a maximum of 16 digits is defined as the Bluetooth passkey. It is only required once for pairing.

Pairing and connecting Pairing a device To avoid becoming distracted and pos

ing an unnecessary hazard both to your own vehicle's occupants and to other road users, only pair the device while the vehicle is station ary.

1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "Bluetooth (audio)" 3. If necessary, "Bluetooth audio". 4. "Add new phone"

The Bluetooth name of the vehicle is dis played.

5. Perform additional steps on the device, re fer to the device operating instructions: for instance, search for or connect the Blue tooth device or a new device. The Bluetooth name of the vehicle appears on the device display.

6. Select the Bluetooth name of the vehicle on the device display. You are prompted by the iDrive or device to enter the same Bluetooth passkey.

7. Enter the passkey and confirm.

Seite 188

Entertainment CD/multimedia

188 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

8. Select the desired functions with which the device is to be connected, for instance "Audio".

9. "OK"

If pairing was successful, the device is dis played as connected. White symbol : the device is active as an audio source. If pairing was unsuccessful: What to do if..., re fer to page 190.

Connecting a specific device A device that has already been paired can be connected as an active audio source. Connecting is not possible when data is ex changed via a mobile phone connected via Bluetooth.

Requirements If necessary, activate the audio connection of the desired device from the list of paired devi ces.

1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "Bluetooth (audio)" 3. If necessary, "Bluetooth audio". 4. Select the desired device from the list of

paired devices. 5. Open "Options". 6. "Configure phone" 7. Activate "Audio". 8. "OK"

Connecting the device 1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "Bluetooth (audio)" 3. If necessary, "Bluetooth audio". 4. Select the desired device from the list of

paired devices.

White symbol : the device is active as an audio source.

Playback

General information The display of music track information de

pends on the device. Operation can takes place on the device or

iDrive. Playback is interrupted when data is ex

changed via a mobile phone connected via Bluetooth.

Starting playback 1. Connect the device. 2. "CD/Multimedia" 3. "External devices"

Seite 189

CD/multimedia Entertainment

189 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

4. Select the symbol.

5. Select the desired track from the list, if necessary.

Playback menu Depending on the particular device, some of the functions may not be available.

Symbol Function

Next track Fast forward: press and hold the symbol.

Previous music track Reverse: press and hold the symbol.

Disconnecting the audio connection 1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "Bluetooth (audio)" 3. Highlight the desired device. 4. Open "Options". 5. "Configure phone" 6. "Audio" 7. "OK"

Unpairing a device 1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "Bluetooth (audio)" 3. If necessary, "Bluetooth audio". 4. Highlight the device that is to be unpaired.

5. Open "Options". 6. "Remove phone from list"

What to do if... Information on suitable devices can be found at www.bmwusa.com/bluetooth. Suitable mobile phones, refer to page 196. The device is not supported by the vehicle. Perform a software update, refer to

page 191, if needed. The device could not be paired or connected. Do the Bluetooth passkeys on the device

and the vehicle match? Enter the same passkey on the device and via iDrive.

Did it take longer than 30 seconds to enter the passkey? Repeat the pairing proce dure.

Are too many Bluetooth devices con nected to the device or vehicle? Delete connections with other devices if neces sary.

Is the mobile phone in power-save mode or does it have only a limited remaining bat tery life? Charge the mobile phone in the snap-in adapter or via a charging cable.

Depending on the mobile phone, it is pos sible that only one device can be con nected to the vehicle. Unpair the con nected device from the vehicle and pair and connect only one device.

The device no longer reacts? Switch the device off and on again.

Repeat the pairing procedure.

Seite 190

Entertainment CD/multimedia

190 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

Music cannot be played back. Start the program for playing back music

data on the device and select a track on the device if necessary.

Switch the radio on and off again. Music files can only be played back softly. Adjust the volume settings on the device. Playback is disturbed when buttons are pressed or by other messages on the device. Switch off the button tones and other sig

nal tones on the device. Playback is interrupted by a telephone call or traffic bulletin and is not resumed automati cally. Switch the radio on and off again. Playback is not possible if the mobile phone is connected via Bluetooth Audio while it is also connected via the USB interface or the snap-in adapter. Disconnect one of the two connections; for

example, disconnect the audio connection, refer to page 190, and restart playback.

If all points in this list have been checked and the required function is still not available, please contact the hotline or service center.

Software Update The vehicle supports various external devices depending on the current software version. With a software update, the vehicle can sup port new mobile phones or new external de vice, for example. USB.

Software updates and related current infor mation is available at www.bmw.com/ update.

Displaying the current version The currently installed software is displayed.

1. "Settings" 2. "Software update"

3. "Show current version" Select desired version to display additional in formation.

Updating software via USB The software may only be updated when the vehicle is stationary.

1. Store the file for the software-update in the main director of a USB flash drive.

2. Insert the USB flash drive into the USB au dio interface in the center console. An up date via the USB interface in the glove compartment is not possible.

3. "Settings" 4. "Software update" 5. "Update software"

6. "Start update" 7. "OK" All listed software updates are installed.

Restoring the previous version The software version prior to the last software update can be restored. The previous version can only be restored when the vehicle is stationary.

1. "Settings" 2. "Software update" 3. "Restore previous version" 4. "OK" Double-click. All listed software updates are removed.

Seite 191

CD/multimedia Entertainment

191 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

Note While the software is being updated or a previ ous version is being restored, BMW Assist, Of fice functions, and the connected devices are temporarily unavailable. Wait several minutes for the functions to become available again.

Seite 192

Entertainment CD/multimedia

192 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

Seite 193

CD/multimedia Entertainment

193 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

Communication All of the options available to you for mobile

communication with family, friends, business partners, and service providers are described in

this chapter.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

Telephone Vehicle equipment This chapter describes all series equipment as well as country-specific and special equipment offered for this model series.Therefore, it also describes equipment that may not be found in your vehicle, for instance due to the selected special equipment or the country version. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems.

At a glance The concept Mobile phones or other external devices such as audio players can be connected to the vehi cle via Bluetooth. Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Blue tooth SIG, Inc. After these devices are paired once, they are recognized automatically when the ignition is switched on as soon as they are in the vehicle and can then be operated via iDrive, the but tons on the steering wheel, and via voice acti vation. Depending on their functionality, external devi ces can be used via the vehicle as a telephone or as an audio source. The telephone functions are described in the following. Operating the audio functions, refer to page 187. Up to four external devices can be paired. Certain functions may need to be enabled by the mobile phone provider or service provider.

Using the mobile phone while driving Make entries only when traffic and road

conditions allow. Do not hold the mobile phone in your hand while you are driving; use the hands-free system instead. If you do not ob serve this precaution, you can endanger the vehicle occupants and other road users.

Snap-in adapter The snap-in adapter is used to: Hold the mobile phone. Recharge the battery. Connect the mobile phone to an outside

antenna of the vehicle. This provides for better network reception and consistent sound quality.

Approved mobile phones Details on which mobile phones and external devices with a Bluetooth interface are sup ported by the mobile phone preparation pack age can be obtained at www.bmwusa.com/ bluetooth.

Displaying the vehicle identification number and software part number The vehicle identification number and software part number are needed to determine which mobile phones are supported by the mobile phone preparation package. The software ver sion of the mobile phone may also be required.

1. "Telephone" 2. Open "Options". 3. "Bluetooth info" 4. "Display system information" These approved mobile phones with a certain software version, support the vehicle functions described below. Malfunctions may occur with other mobile phones or software versions. Do not operate a mobile phone that is con nected to the vehicle on the mobile phone key pad, as this may lead to a malfunction. A software update, refer to page 191, can be performed if necessary.

Seite 196

Communication Telephone

196 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

Notes At high temperatures, the charging function of the mobile phone may be limited and functions may not be executed. When using the mobile phone via the vehicle, note the operating instructions of the mobile phone.

Pairing/unpairing the mobile phone General information The following functions are available: Use of a mobile phone as a telephone. Use of a mobile phone as an additional te

lephone. Use of a mobile phone as an audio source. Use of an audio device as an audio source,

refer to page 187.

Requirements The mobile phone is suitable, refer to

page 196. The mobile phone is ready for operation. Bluetooth is activated in the vehicle and on

the mobile phone. Bluetooth presettings may need to be

made on the mobile phone, e.g., for a con nection without confirmation or visibility, refer to the mobile phone operating in structions.

Deactivate Bluetooth audio if necessary. A number with at least four and a maximum

of 16 digits was defined as the Bluetooth passkey. It is only required once for pairing.

The ignition is switched on.

Activating/deactivating Bluetooth Bluetooth is not permitted everywhere. Com ply with all safety guidelines and regulations.

1. "Telephone" 2. Open "Options". 3. "Bluetooth"

Additional functions

Activating/deactivating the additional functions Activate the functions before pairing to be able to use them in the vehicle. Information on suit able mobile phones, refer to page 196, that support this function.

1. "Telephone" 2. "Bluetooth (phone)" 3. Open "Options". 4. "Configure Bluetooth" 5. Select the desired additional function.

"Additional telephone" "Office" "Bluetooth audio"

6. "OK" An additional function cannot be assigned to a telephone while it is deactivated.

Additional telephone A mobile phone can be used as an additional telephone. The additional telephone can be used to ac cept incoming calls, refer to page 201. While a

Seite 197

Telephone Communication

197 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

call is active on the additional telephone, re ceived calls are displayed on the Control Dis play.

Audio source A mobile phone can be used as an audio source.

Pairing and connecting a mobile phone

Pairing the mobile phone To avoid becoming distracted and pos

ing an unnecessary hazard both to your own vehicle's occupants and to other road users, only pair the mobile phone while the vehicle is stationary.

1. "Telephone" 2. "Bluetooth (phone)" 3. "Add new phone"

The Bluetooth name of the vehicle is dis played.

4. To perform additional steps on the mobile phone, refer to the mobile phone operating instructions: for instance, search for or connect the Bluetooth device or a new de vice. The Bluetooth name of the vehicle appears on the mobile phone display.

5. Select the Bluetooth name of the vehicle on the mobile phone display.

6. You are prompted by the iDrive or mobile phone to enter the same Bluetooth pass key. Enter the passkey and confirm. or Compare the control number on the vehi cle display with the control number on the mobile phone display. Confirm the control number on the mobile phone and in the ve hicle. "OK"

7. Select the functions for which the mobile phone is to be used.

8. "OK" If the pairing was successful, the mobile phone appears at the top of the list of mobile phones. The functions supported by the mobile phone and audio device are displayed as symbols when paired. White symbol: the function is active. Gray symbol: the function is inactive.

Symbol Function

Telephone.

Additional telephone.

Audio source.

Four mobile phones can be paired with the ve hicle at once. Three mobile phones can be connected with the vehicle at once. If pairing was unsuccessful: What to do if..., re fer to page 199.

Following the initial pairing The mobile phone is detected/connected

in the vehicle within a short period of time when the engine is running or the ignition is switched on.

The phone book entries of the telephone stored on the SIM card or mobile phone are transmitted to the vehicle after detec tion, depending on the mobile phone.

Four mobile phones can be paired. Specific settings may be necessary in

some mobile phones, e.g., authorization or a secure connection; refer to the mobile phone operating instructions.

Connecting a particular mobile phone 1. "Telephone" 2. "Bluetooth (phone)"

Seite 198

Communication Telephone

198 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

3. Select the mobile phone that is to be con nected.

The functions assigned to the mobile phone before unpairing are assigned to the mobile phone when it is reconnected. These functions are deactivated in a mobile phone that is al ready connected.

Configuring the mobile phone Additional functions can be activated or deacti vated for paired and connected mobile phones.

1. "Telephone" 2. "Bluetooth (phone)" 3. Highlight the mobile phone to be config

ured. 4. Open "Options". 5. "Configure phone" 6. At least one function must be selected.

"Telephone" "Additional telephone" "Audio"

7. "OK" If a function has already been assigned to an other connected mobile phone, the function is deactivated in that mobile phone and the mo bile phone is unpaired when the function is as signed to a new mobile phone.

Swapping the telephone and additional telephone The function of the telephone and additional telephone can be swapped automatically.

1. "Telephone" 2. "Bluetooth (phone)" 3. "Swap phone/addit. phone"

Unpairing the mobile phone 1. "Telephone" 2. "Bluetooth (phone)"

3. Highlight the mobile phone that is to be unpaired.

4. Open "Options". 5. "Remove phone from list"

What to do if... Information on suitable mobile phones, refer to page 196. The mobile phone could not be paired or con nected. Is Bluetooth activated in the vehicle and on

the mobile phone? Activate Bluetooth in the vehicle and on the mobile phone.

Do the Bluetooth passkeys on the mobile phone and the vehicle match? Enter the same passkey on the mobile phone and via iDrive.

Did it take longer than 30 seconds to enter the passkey? Repeat the pairing proce dure.

Are too many Bluetooth devices con nected to the mobile phone or vehicle? De lete connections with other devices if nec essary.

Is the audio connection activated? Deacti vate the audio connection.

Is the mobile phone in power-save mode or does it have only a limited remaining bat tery life? Charge the mobile phone in the snap-in adapter or via the charging cable.

Depending on the mobile phone, it is pos sible that only one mobile phone can be connected to the vehicle. Unpair the con

Seite 199

Telephone Communication

199 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

nected mobile phone from the vehicle and pair and connect only one mobile phone.

The mobile phone no longer reacts. Switch the mobile phone off and on again. Is the ambient temperature too high or

low? Do not expose the mobile phone to extreme environmental conditions.

The telephone functions are not available. Is the mobile phone paired as an additional

telephone and is the additional telephone function deactivated? Activate the func tion.

Is an outgoing call not possible? Connect the mobile phone as a telephone.

No phone book entries or only some phone book entries are displayed, or they are incom plete. Transmission of the phone book entries is

not yet complete. It is possible that only the phone book en

tries of the mobile phone or the SIM card are transmitted.

It may not be possible to display phone book entries with special characters.

The number of phone book entries to be stored is too high.

Is the data volume of the contact too large, e. g., due to stored information such as notes? Reduce the data volume of the con tact.

Is the mobile phone connected as an audio source or additional telephone? The mo bile phone must be connected as a tele phone.

The phone connection quality is poor. The strength of the Bluetooth signal on the

mobile phone can be adjusted, depending on the mobile phone.

Insert the mobile phone into the snap-in adapter or place it in the area of the center console.

Adjust the volume of the microphone and loudspeakers separately.

If all points in this list have been checked and the required function is still not available, con tact Customer Relations or the service center.

Controls Adjusting the volume

Turn the knob until the desired volume is se lected. The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.

The vehicle automatically adjusts the volume of the microphone on the telephone and the volume of the called party. Depending on the mobile phone, the volumes may need to be ad justed. The settings can only be created during a call and must be adjusted separately for each telephone. The settings are deleted when the telephone is unpaired.

1. "Settings" 2. "Tone" 3. "Volume settings" 4. Select the desired setting: "Microphone"

or "Loudspeak." 5. To adjust: turn the controller. 6. To store: press the controller.

Seite 200

Communication Telephone

200 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

Incoming call

Receiving calls If the number of the caller is stored in the phone book and is transmitted by the network, the name of the contact is displayed. Other wise, only the phone number is displayed. If more than one phone number is assigned to a contact, only the name of the contact is dis played. For calls on the additional telephone, the num ber is only displayed if it is transmitted by the network. An incoming call to one of the telephones is automatically rejected if there is an active call on the other telephone.

Accepting a call Press the button on the steering wheel.

or "Accept"

Rejecting a call "Reject"

Ending a call Press the button on the steering wheel.

or

1. "Telephone"

2. "End call"

Entering a phone number

Dialing a number 1. "Telephone" 2. "Dial number" 3. Select the digits individually. 4. Select the symbol.

The phone number can also be entered by voice.

Calls with multiple parties

General information You can switch between calls or connect two calls to a single conference call. These func tions must be supported by the mobile phone and service provider.

Accepting a call while speaking to another party This function might have to be activated by the service provider and the mobile phone must be adjusted accordingly.

Seite 201

Telephone Communication

201 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

If a second call comes in during an ongoing call, a call waiting signal is sounded.

"Accept" The call is accepted and the existing call is put on hold.

Establishing a second call Establish an additional call during an active call.

1. "Telephone" 2. "Active calls" 3. "Hold"

The existing call is put on hold.

4. Dial the new phone number or select it from a list.

"Return" The call on hold is resumed.

Switching between two calls, hold call The active call is displayed in color. The call on hold is displayed in gray.

"Swap calls" The call on hold is resumed.

Establishing a conference call Two calls can be connected to a single tele phone conference call.

1. Establish two calls. 2. "Conference call"

When terminating a conference call, both calls are ended. If one call is terminated by another party, the other call can be continued.

Switching the microphone to mute When a call is active, the microphone can be muted.

1. "Telephone" 2. "Active calls" 3. "Microphone mute" A microphone that has been switched to mute is automatically reactivated: When a new connection is established. When switching between call parties.

DTMF suffix dialing DTMF suffix dialing can be used for gaining ac cess to network services or for controlling de vices, e.g., to make a remote inquiry of an an swering machine. The DTMF code is needed for this purpose.

1. "Telephone" 2. Select the contact from a list or "Dial

number". 3. "Keypad dialing" 4. Enter the DTMF code via iDrive.

Phone book

Displays The phone book accesses the contacts and shows all contacts for which a phone number has been stored. The entries can be selected to make a call.

1. "Telephone" 2. "Phone book" A symbol indicates the storage location of the contacts.

Seite 202

Communication Telephone

202 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

Calling a contact

Symbol Meaning

Contact with one stored phone number.

Contact with more than one stored phone number.

Call not possible; mobile phone without reception or network, or Service Request is active.

For contacts with one stored phone number: select the required contact. The connection is being established. For contacts with more than one stored phone number: select the required contact and the phone number. The connection is being estab lished.

Editing a contact Changing the entries in "Contacts". When a contact is changed, the changes are not stored on the mobile phone. A copy of the entry is stored in the vehicle.

1. Highlight the contact. 2. Open "Options". 3. "Edit entry" The contact can be edited.

Redialing

General information The list of dialed numbers in the mobile phone is transmitted to the vehicle depending on the mobile phone. Possibly only those numbers are displayed that were dialed from the vehicle. The 20 phone numbers dialed last are dis played. The sorting order of the phone num bers depends on the particular mobile phone.

Dialing a number via the instrument cluster This is possible if a call is not currently active.

1. Press the button on the steering wheel.

2. Select the desired phone number. The connection is established.

Dialing the number via the iDrive 1. "Telephone" 2. "Redial"

3. Select the desired entry and the phone number if necessary.

The connection is established.

Deleting a single entry or all entries The deletion of entries depends on your par ticular mobile phone.

1. Highlight the entry. 2. Open "Options". 3. "Delete entry" or "Delete list"

Seite 203

Telephone Communication

203 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

Saving an entry in the contacts 1. Highlight the entry. 2. Open "Options". 3. "Store as new contact" or "Add to existing

contact" 4. Select the contact if necessary. 5. Select the type of number: "Home",

"Business", "Mobile" or "Other" 6. Complete the entries if necessary. 7. "Store contact"

Received calls

Displaying calls The 20 calls that were last received are dis played.

1. "Telephone" 2. "Received calls"

Calling a number from the list Selecting an entry. The connection is established.

Deleting a single entry or all entries The deletion of entries depends on your par ticular mobile phone.

1. Highlight the entry. 2. Open "Options". 3. "Delete entry" or "Delete list"

Saving an entry in the contacts 1. Highlight the entry. 2. Open "Options". 3. "Store as new contact" or "Add to existing

contact" 4. Select the contact if necessary. 5. Select the type of number: "Home",

"Business", "Mobile" or "Other" 6. Complete the entries if necessary. 7. "Store contact"

Hands-free system

General information Calls that are being made on the hands-free system can be continued on the mobile phone and vice versa.

From the mobile phone to the hands- free system Calls that were begun outside of the Bluetooth range of the vehicle can be continued on the hands-free system with the ignition switched on. Depending on the mobile phone, the system automatically switches to the hands-free sys tem. If the system does not switch over automati cally, follow the instructions on the mobile phone display; refer also to the mobile phone operating instructions.

From the hands-free system to the mobile phone Calls that are made on the hands-free system can in some cases be continued on the mobile phone; this depends on the mobile phone. Follow the instructions on the mobile phone display; refer also to the mobile phone operat ing instructions.

Seite 204

Communication Telephone

204 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

Voice operation General information Vehicles equipped with the voice activation system: operation, refer to page 25. Vehicles not equipped with the voice activation system: depending on the equipment, the mo bile phone can be voice operated as described below. The list of short commands in the Owner's Manual does not apply to this type of voice op eration.

The concept The mobile phone can be operated without

taking your hands from the steering wheel. In many cases, the entries are accompa

nied by announcements or questions. ... Verbal instructions to use with the voice

operation system. ... Identifies the answers generated by

the voice operation system.

Using voice activation

Activating the voice activation system

1. Press the button on the steering wheel.

2. Say the command.

Terminating the voice activation system

Press the button on the steering wheel or Cancel.

Possible commands

Having possible commands read aloud Press the button on the steering wheel.

Help.

Possible commands are announced. The digits from zero to nine are recognized. The digits can be spoken separately or com bined in a sequence to accelerate the entry.

Using alternative commands The system often recognizes a number of dif ferent commands to run a function; for in stance: Dial name or Name

Example: dialing a phone number

1. Press the button on the steering wheel.

2. Dial number The system says: Please say the number .

3. For instance, 123 456 790 The system says: 123 456 790. Con tinue?.

4. Dial The system says: Dialing number.

Calling

Dialing a phone number 1. Dial number 2. Say the phone number. 3. Dial

Correcting the phone number The sequence of digits can be deleted after the system has repeated the digits. Correct number The command can be repeated as often as necessary.

Deleting a phone number Delete All digits entered up to that point are deleted.

Seite 205

Telephone Communication

205 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

Redialing Redial

Voice phone book Depending on how your vehicle is equipped, it may be necessary to create your own voice phone book. The entries must be entered using voice acti vation and are separate from the memory in the mobile phone. Up to 50 entries can be set up.

Saving an entry 1. Save name 2. Say the name. Do not exceed the speaking

duration of approx. 2 seconds. 3. Say the phone number after being

prompted to do so by the system. 4. Save

Deleting an entry 1. Delete name 2. Say the name after being prompted to do

so. 3. Confirm the prompt: Yes

Deleting all entries 1. Delete phone book 2. Confirm the prompt: Yes 3. Confirm the prompt again: Yes

Reading and selecting entries 1. Read phonebook 2. When the desired entry is read aloud: say

Dial number

Selecting an entry 1. Dial name 2. Say the name after being prompted to do

so. 3. Confirm the prompt: Yes

Adjusting the volume

Turn the knob during an announcement.

The volume remains constant even if the volume of other audio sources is changed.

The volume is stored for the remote con trol currently in use.

Notes Do not use voice operation to initiate an Emer gency Request. In stressful situations, the voice and vocal pitch can change. This can un necessarily delay the establishment of a tele phone connection. Instead, use the SOS button, refer to page 257, in the vicinity of the interior mirror.

Environmental conditions Say the commands, numbers, and letters

smoothly and with normal volume, empha sis, and speed.

Always say commands in the language of the system. The language for the mobile phone voice operation is preset and cannot be changed in the Control Display.

Keep the doors, windows, and glass sun roof closed to prevent noise interference.

Avoid making other noise in the vehicle while speaking.

Seite 206

Communication Telephone

206 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

Snap-in adapter General information More information on compatible snap-in adapters that support the functions of the mo bile phone is available at the service center.

Notes At high temperatures, the charging function of the mobile phone may be limited and functions may not be executed. When using the mobile phone via the vehicle, note the operating instructions of the mobile phone.

Installation position In the center armrest.

Inserting/removing the snap-in adapter 1. Press button 1 and remove the cover.

2. Insert the snap-in adapter at the front, ar row 1, and press down, arrow 2, until it en gages.

3. To remove the snap-in adapter: press but ton 1.

Inserting the mobile phone 1. Depending on the mobile phone, remove

the protective cap from the antenna con nector and from the USB connection of the mobile phone.

2. With the buttons facing up, slide the mo bile phone up toward the electrical con tacts and press it down until it engages.

The battery is charged beginning with the radio ready state of the vehicle.

Seite 207

Telephone Communication

207 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

Removing the mobile phone

Press the button and remove the mobile phone.

Seite 208

Communication Telephone

208 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

Office Vehicle equipment This chapter describes all series equipment as well as country-specific and special equipment offered for this model series.Therefore, it also describes equipment that may not be found in your vehicle, for instance due to the selected special equipment or the country version. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems.

At a glance General information Contacts, appointments, tasks, notes, text messages, and e-mails from the mobile phone can be displayed on the Control Display if the mobile phone provides compatible support of these functions and the necessary Bluetooth standards. Information about which mobile phones sup port the Office functions can be found at www.bmwusa.com/bluetooth. A limited num ber of compatible mobile phones is available for Office. Contents are only displayed in full length when the vehicle is stationary. The mobile phone has read-access only.

Do not use Office while driving To avoid becoming distracted and pos

ing an unnecessary hazard to your vehicle's occupants and to other road users, never at tempt to use the controls or enter information unless traffic and road conditions allow this.

Requirements A suitable mobile phone is paired with the

vehicle and connected. In some mobile phones, data access must be confirmed on the mobile phone.

The time, time zone, and date, refer to page 75, are correctly set on the Control Display and on the mobile phone, for in stance to correctly display appointments.

Office is activated, refer to page 197.

Updating Data are updated every time the mobile phone is connected to the vehicle. Appointment en tries, tasks, notes and reminders can be up dated separately.

1. "Office" 2. "Current office", "Calendar", "Tasks",

"Notes" or "Reminders" 3. Open "Options". 4. "Update data"

Mobile phone data are transmitted again to the vehicle.

Office information The number of unread messages and active tasks as well as the upcoming appointments are displayed.

1. "Office" 2. "Current office" 3. Select the desired entry to display details.

Seite 209

Office Communication

209 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

Contacts Note Equipment version with the mobile phone preparation package.

At a glance Contacts can be created and edited. The con tacts from the mobile phone are displayed as well if this function is supported by the mobile phone. The addresses can be adopted as des tinations for navigation and the phone num bers can be dialed.

Displaying contacts

General information 1. "Office" 2. "Contacts"

All contacts are listed in alphabetical order. Depending on the number of contacts, an A-Z search is offered, refer to page 23. A symbol indicates the storage location of the contacts.

Symbol Storage location

No sym bol

In the vehicle; the address has not been checked as a destination.

In the vehicle; the address has been checked as a destination.

Mobile phone.

Dialing phone numbers 1. Select the desired contact. 2. Select the phone number.

The connection is established.

Editing a contact 1. Select the desired contact. 2. "Edit contact"

3. Change the entries. 4. "Store contact in vehicle" When a contact is edited, the changes are not stored on the mobile phone. A copy of the en try is stored in the vehicle.

Selecting the contact as a navigation destination 1. Select the desired contact. 2. Select the address.

When contacts from the mobile phone are used, the address may need to be matched to the navigation data contained in the ve hicle. In this case: Correct the address.

3. "Start guidance" or "Add as another destination"

Checking the address as a destination An address that is to be used for destination guidance must match the navigation data con

Seite 210

Communication Office

210 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

tained in the vehicle. The address can be checked for this purpose.

1. Select the desired contact and highlight the address.

2. Open "Options". 3. "Check as destination" 4. Correct and store the address if necessary. If the address is corrected and stored, a copy of it is stored in the vehicle. The address is not changed on the mobile phone.

New contact

General information A contact can have up to 8 phone numbers, 2 addresses, 3 e-mail addresses and one Inter net address.

1. "Office" 2. "Contacts" 3. Open "Options". 4. "New contact"

5. The entry fields are still filled with the pre vious entries: "Delete input fields"

6. Fill in the entry fields: select the symbol next to the entry field.

7. Enter the text and assign the contact type. 8. If the vehicle is equipped with a navigation

system: enter the address. Only addresses contained in the navigation data in the ve hicle can be entered. This ensures that destination guidance is possible for all ad dresses.

If necessary, "Accept address". 9. "Store contact in vehicle"

Contact types Various contact types can be assigned to phone numbers and addresses.

Symbol Meaning

Home phone number.

Business phone number.

Mobile phone number.

Other phone number.

Home address.

Business address.

Specifying the home address A home address can be stored. It appears at the top of the contact list.

1. "Office" 2. "Contacts" 3. "Home" 4. Create a contact. 5. "Store contact in vehicle"

Selecting the sorting order of the names Names can be displayed in a different order.

1. "Office" 2. "Contacts" 3. Open "Options". 4. "Display: last, first name" or "Display: first,

last name" Depending on how the contacts were stored on the mobile phone, the sorting order of the names may differ from the selected sorting or der.

Seite 211

Office Communication

211 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

Show contact pictures Pictures stored with the contacts are stored in the vehicle when the mobile phone is con nected to the vehicle. The number of transmit ted pictures depends on the mobile phone. The mobile phone must support this function.

1. "Office" 2. "Contacts" 3. Open "Options". 4. "Configure Bluetooth" 5. "Show images" Display of all contact pictures is activated or deactivated.

Deleting contacts Only contacts that are stored in the vehicle are deleted. The contacts on the mobile phone cannot be deleted.

1. "Office" 2. "Contacts" 3. Highlight the contact. 4. Open "Options". 5. "Delete contact" or "Delete all contacts" 6. If necessary. "Yes"

Messages General information Whether or not text messages and e-mails from the mobile phone are displayed depends on whether transmission from the mobile phone to the vehicle is supported. Text mes sages and e-mails may not be supported by the service provider, or the function may need to be enabled separately. After the mobile phone is first paired, transmission may take several minutes. Messages are only displayed in full length when the vehicle is stationary. Messages from the additional telephone are not transmitted.

Displaying messages 1. "Office" 2. "Messages" A symbol identifies the type of message.

Symbol Message type

Text messages.

My Info

Message from the Concierge serv ice.

E-mail from mobile phone.

Filtering the message list The message list can be filtered if more than one type of message exists.

1. "Filter:"

2. Select the type of message. "All"

All messages are displayed. "E-mail"

Only e-mails from the mobile phone are displayed.

"Service message" Only messages from the BMW Assist Concierge service and My Info are dis played.

"Text message" Only text messages from the mobile phone are displayed.

Seite 212

Communication Office

212 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

Deleting messages Messages from the Concierge service and My Info can be deleted. Delete a message:

1. "Office" 2. "Messages" 3. Select the desired message. 4. Open "Options". 5. "Delete message" Delete all messages:

1. "Office" 2. "Messages" 3. Open "Options". 4. "Delete all messages" or "Delete service

messages"

Text messages

Calling the sender of a text message 1. Select the desired message. 2. Select the symbol.

Saving the sender in the contacts 1. Highlight the desired message. 2. Open "Options". 3. "Store as new contact" or "Add to existing

contact"

Using contact data Contact data from appointments, tasks, text messages, e-mails, and notes can be saved or selected, refer to page 216.

Reading the text message out loud Read the text message out loud, refer to page 216.

My Info

Selecting additional functions Additional functions are available when a mes sage is selected.

Sym bol

Function

"Start guidance" or "Add as another destination"

"Call" If the message contains a number, the connection is established.

"Select phone number" If the message contains more than one number, select the desired number from the list. The connec tion is established.

Message from the Concierge service

Storing an address 1. Select the desired message. 2. Open "Options". 3. "Store contact in vehicle"

Selecting additional functions Additional functions are available when a mes sage is selected.

Sym bol

Function

"Start guidance" or "Add as another destination"

"Call" If the message contains a number, the connection is established.

Seite 213

Office Communication

213 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

Sym bol

Function

"Select phone number" If the message contains more than one number, select the desired number from the list. The connec tion is established.

"Further information" Display additional information.

E-mail

Displaying e-mails 1. "Office" 2. "Messages" 3. Select the desired e-mail.

Displaying e-mail contacts If the sender and recipient of an e-mail are transmitted by the mobile phone, this informa tion is displayed in the e-mail.

"Sender/Recipient" If the e-mail addresses are stored in the con tacts, the contact is displayed. Select the con tact to display details. If the e-mail addresses are not stored in the contacts, only the e-mail address is displayed.

Using contact data Contact data from appointments, tasks, text messages, e-mails, and notes can be saved or selected, refer to page 216.

Deactivating the full display When an e-mail is opened in the vehicle, the e- mail is fully transmitted to the vehicle. This may result in charges.

1. "Office" 2. "Messages"

3. Open "Options". 4. "Fully download e-mails"

Only a part of the e-mail from the mobile phone is loaded into the vehicle.

Reading the e-mail out loud Read the e-mail out loud, refer to page 216.

Calendar Display the calendar Appointments during the last 20 days and the next 50 days can be displayed.

1. "Office" 2. "Calendar"

The appointments on the current day are displayed.

Selecting the calendar day 1. Select the date.

2. Select the desired day or date. "Next day" "Date:" "Previous day" "Today"

Display the appointment 1. Select the desired appointment. 2. Scroll through the appointment if neces

sary: Turn the controller.

Seite 214

Communication Office

214 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

Select the symbol.

Using contact data Contact data from appointments, tasks, text messages, e-mails, and notes can be saved or selected, refer to page 216.

Reading the appointment out loud Read the appointment out loud, refer to page 216.

Tasks Displaying the task list Display tasks that are due within the next 90 days.

1. "Office" 2. "Tasks"

Sorting the task list 1. Select the header in the task list.

2. Select the sorting criterion: "Priority (!)" "Subject" "Due date"

Displaying the task 1. Select the desired task. 2. Scroll in the task if necessary:

Turn the controller. Select the symbol.

Using contact data Contact data from appointments, tasks, text messages, e-mails, and notes can be saved or selected, refer to page 216.

Reading the task out loud Read the task out loud, refer to page 216.

Notes Displaying notes 1. "Office" 2. "Notes"

All notes are displayed.

Displaying the note 1. Select the desired note.

2. Scroll in the note if necessary: Turn the controller. Select the symbol.

Using contact data Contact data from appointments, tasks, text messages, e-mails, and notes can be saved or selected, refer to page 216.

Reading the note out loud Read the note out loud, refer to page 216.

Seite 215

Office Communication

215 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

Reminders Displaying reminders Reminders of pending appointments and tasks are displayed. After an appointment or after a task is due, the reminder is no longer dis played.

1. "Office" 2. "Reminders" 3. Select the desired reminder. The corresponding appointment or the task are displayed.

Using contact data At a glance Contact data from appointments, tasks, text messages, emails, and notes can be stored or selected.

Displaying contact or selecting phone number 1. "Use contact data" 2. Display the contact or select the phone

number: Select the contact to display contact

details. Select the phone number to establish a

connection directly.

Storing contact data 1. "Use contact data" 2. Highlight the phone number or e-mail ad

dress. 3. Open "Options". 4. "Add to existing contact" or "Store as new

contact"

Reading out loud Text messages, e-mails, appointment entries, tasks, and notes can be read out loud.

1. Select the desired message, appointment, task, or note.

2. Select the symbol. The following options are available during reading: "Pause"

Interrupt reading. Select again to restart reading.

"Back to beginning" Start reading the message again from the beginning.

Select the symbol. Go back one paragraph.

Select the symbol. Skip a paragraph.

To end reading, turn the controller to the left.

What to do if... Information on suitable mobile phones, refer to page 196. Appointments, tasks, notes, text messages, or e-mails from the mobile phone are not dis played. The mobile phone is not capable of the

missing function or is not connected cor rectly.

The Office function is deactivated. The mobile phone is connected as an addi

tional phone. Appointments are older than 20 days or

are more than 50 days in the future. The tasks have been marked as completed

or have a due date that lies more than 90 days in the future.

Seite 216

Communication Office

216 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

Depending on the number of stored ap pointments, task notes, and messages in the mobile phone, not all are displayed in the vehicle.

Not all appointments and tasks from the mo bile phone are displayed at the right time? The time zone, time, or date is incorrectly

set on the Control Display and mobile phone.

The e-mail attachment is not displayed. E-mails are transmitted without an attach

ment. Entries are not displayed in full length. Text were already transmitted from the

mobile phone in a shortened form. Synchronization between the mobile

phone and vehicle may take several mi nutes.

The contact pictures are not being displayed? Up to 200 contact pictures can be stored in

the vehicle. The E-mail is displayed with a delay? Check the e-mail settings on the telephone

and adjust if necessary. If all points in this list have been checked and the required function is still not available, please contact the hotline or service center.

Seite 217

Office Communication

217 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

Contacts Vehicle equipment This chapter describes all series equipment as well as country-specific and special equipment offered for this model series.Therefore, it also describes equipment that may not be found in your vehicle, for instance due to the selected special equipment or the country version. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems.

Note Equipment version without the mobile phone preparation package.

General information Contacts can be created and edited. The con tacts from the mobile phone are displayed as well if this function is supported by the mobile phone. The addresses can be adopted as des tinations for navigation and the phone num bers can be dialed.

New contact 1. "Contacts" 2. "New contact"

3. The entry fields are still filled with the pre vious entries: "Delete input fields"

4. Fill in the entry fields: select the symbol next to the entry field.

5. Enter the text, refer to page 23. In vehicles equipped with a navigation sys tem: it is only possible to enter addresses that are contained in the vehicle navigation data. This ensures that destination guid ance is possible for all addresses.

6. If necessary, "Store". 7. "Store contact in vehicle"

Specifying the home address A home address can be stored. It appears at the top of the contact list.

1. "Home" 2. Create a contact. 3. "Store contact in vehicle"

My contacts General information List of all contacts stored in the vehicle.

Displaying contacts 1. "Contacts"

Seite 218

Communication Contacts

218 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

2. "My contacts"

All contacts are listed in alphabetical order. Depending on the number of contacts, an A-Z search is offered, refer to page 23. A symbol indicates the storage location of the contacts:

Symbol Storage location

No sym bol

In the vehicle; the address has not been checked as a destination.

In the vehicle; the address has been checked as a destination.

Mobile phone.

Dialing a phone number 1. Select the desired contact. 2. Select the phone number.

The connection is established.

Editing a contact 1. Select the desired contact. 2. "Edit contact"

3. Change the entries.

4. Move the controller to the left. 5. "Yes" If a contact from the mobile phone is edited, the changes are not stored on the mobile phone. A copy of the entry is stored in the ve hicle, and only this copy is displayed. Under certain circumstances, a contact entry with the same name is created.

Selecting the contact as a navigation destination 1. Select the desired contact. 2. Select the address.

When contacts from the mobile phone are used, the address may need to be matched to the navigation data contained in the ve hicle. In this case: Correct the address.

3. "Start guidance" or "Add as another destination"

Checking the address as a destination An address that is to be used for destination guidance must match the navigation data con tained in the vehicle. The address can be checked for this purpose.

1. Select the desired contact and highlight the address.

2. Open "Options". 3. "Check as destination" 4. Correct and store the address if necessary. If the address is corrected and stored, a copy of it is stored in the vehicle. The address is not changed on the mobile phone.

Selecting the sorting order of the names Names can be displayed in a different order.

1. "My contacts" 2. Open "Options".

Seite 219

Contacts Communication

219 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

3. "Display: last, first name" or "Display: first, last name"

Depending on how the contacts were stored on the mobile phone, the sorting order of the names may differ from the selected sorting or der.

Exporting/importing contacts Contacts can be exported and imported via Personal Profile, refer to page 30.

Deleting contacts Only contacts that are stored in the vehicle are deleted. The contacts on the mobile phone cannot be deleted.

1. "My contacts" 2. Highlight the contact. 3. Open "Options". 4. "Delete contact" or "Delete all contacts"

Seite 220

Communication Contacts

220 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

ConnectedDrive Vehicle equipment This chapter describes all series equipment as well as country-specific and special equipment offered for this model series.Therefore, it also describes equipment that may not be found in your vehicle, for instance due to the selected special equipment or the country version. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems.

TeleService General information TeleService supports communication with your service center. Data on the vehicle's service requirements

can be sent directly to the service center. In this way, the service center can plan its work in advance. This shortens the dura tion of the service appointment.

In the event of a breakdown, data on the vehicle's condition can be sent directly to Roadside Assistance.

The service varies by country. Connection costs may ensue. Services may be restricted abroad.

Requirements Different variants of TeleService may be imple mented in the vehicle. The following condi tions must always be met: Wireless reception is available. The ignition is switched on. A current ConnectedDrive subscription or

a vehicle equipped with intelligent Emer gency Request.

Concierge service General information The Concierge service offers information on events, gas stations, and hotels, and provides phone numbers and addresses. Hotels can be booked directly using the Concierge service. The Concierge service is part of the optional Convenience Plan.

Starting the Concierge service 1. "BMW Assist" or "ConnectedDrive" 2. "Concierge"

3. "Start service" A voice connection is established with the Concierge service. Phone numbers and ad dresses can be transmitted to the vehicle.

Messages Information on messages, refer to page 212.

Roadside Assistance At a glance BMW Roadside Assistance can be contacted if assistance is needed in the event of a break down. Roadside Assistance can also be contacted via a Check Control message, refer to page 80.

Seite 221

ConnectedDrive Communication

221 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

Starting Roadside Assistance without TeleService 1. "BMW Assist" or "ConnectedDrive" 2. "Roadside Assistance"

The Roadside Assistance number is dis played. If the mobile phone is paired, a connection is established to Roadside As sistance.

Starting Roadside Assistance with TeleService

General information In vehicles equipped with TeleService, support is first offered by TeleService Diagnosis and then, if necessary, by TeleService Help.

1. "BMW Assist" or "ConnectedDrive" 2. "Roadside Assistance" 3. "Start service"

TeleService Diagnosis TeleService Diagnosis enables the wireless transmission of detailed vehicle data that are important for vehicle diagnosis. These data are transmitted automatically.

After the data are transmitted, the voice con nection to Roadside Assistance is re-estab lished.

BMW Online At a glance A business search can be opened via BMW Online. License conditions This product contains NetFront Browser soft ware of ACCESS Co., Ltd. Copyright 2007 ACCESS Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. NetFront is a trademark or registered trade mark of ACCESS CO., LTD., in Japan and other countries. This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group.

Requirements Subscription to the optional Convenience

Plan. The date setting on the Control Display is

current. The vehicle is located within wireless net

work coverage.

Starting BMW Online 1. "BMW Assist" or "ConnectedDrive" 2. "BMW Online"

3. If necessary, "OK". The BMW Online home page is displayed.

Seite 222

Communication ConnectedDrive

222 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

Operating BMW Online To start a search: Turn the controller to highlight an element. Press the controller to display an element.

Opening the start page 1. Open "Options". 2. "Display start page"

Loading a new page 1. Open "Options". 2. "Reload"

Cancel 1. Open "Options". 2. "Cancel loading"

Customer Relations At a glance Contact Customer Relations for information on all aspects of your vehicle.

Calling Customer Relations

Vehicle not equipped with TeleService 1. "BMW Assist" or "ConnectedDrive" 2. "Customer Relations" The Customer Relations phone number is dis played. If the mobile phone is paired, a connec tion is established to Customer Relations.

Vehicle equipped with TeleService 1. "BMW Assist" or "ConnectedDrive" 2. "Customer Relations" 3. "Start service"

Service Request At a glance Sends information to your service partner to request the arrangement of a service appoint ment. The TeleService data is transmitted dur ing a Service Request. If possible, your service partner will establish contact with you.

Starting a Service Request 1. "BMW Assist" or "ConnectedDrive" 2. "Service Request" 3. "Start service"

A Service Request can be started via a Check Control message, refer to page 80.

Automatic Service Request The TeleService data necessary for servicing the vehicle are automatically sent to your serv ice partner prior to the service deadline. If pos sible, the service partner will contact you and a service appointment can be arranged.

Seite 223

ConnectedDrive Communication

223 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

To check when your service partner was noti fied:

1. "Vehicle Info" 2. "Vehicle status"

3. Open "Options". 4. "Last Service Request"

TeleService Report Transmits technical data when needed from your vehicle to BMW at regular intervals; these are evaluated for the continued development of BMW products. TeleService Report is activated in vehicles that meet certain technical conditions and that have a current ConnectedDrive subscription; it is free of charge. Neither personal nor position data are trans mitted. To check when your service partner was noti fied:

1. "Vehicle Info" 2. "Vehicle status" 3. "Options" 4. "Last Teleservice Info"

Services status Displaying available services Display of all services available in the vehicle.

1. "BMW Assist" or "ConnectedDrive" 2. "Service Status"

3. "Available services"

Updating BMW Assist Manual update of TeleService.

1. "BMW Assist" or "ConnectedDrive" 2. "Service Status" 3. "Update BMW Assist"

Data transfer During the updating of BMW services, display the status of the data transfer.

1. "BMW Assist" or "ConnectedDrive" 2. Open "Options". 3. "Data transfer"

Apps At a glance Certain software applications of a suitable mo bile phone can be integrated in the vehicle. These software applications are displayed on the Control Display. They are operated via iDrive.

Requirements The mobile phone is suitable. The mobile phone operating system sup

ports the software applications of Apps. Software applications are installed on the

mobile phone and ready to use.

Seite 224

Communication ConnectedDrive

224 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

Corresponding mobile wireless contract. Any additionally incurred costs are not a part of Apps.

Use only BMW approved software applica tions; otherwise, it may result in malfunc tions.

Information about suitable mobile phones, available software applications and their instal lation can be found at www.bmw.com/connec tivity or at the service center.

Create the entries. Make entries only when traffic and road

conditions allow. Otherwise, the vehicle occu pants and other road users may be put in dan ger because of the distraction from driving. For reasons of safety, some software applica tions are usable only while the vehicle is sta tionary.

Operating Apps 1. Connect the mobile phone via the snap-in

adapter or via the USB audio interface. 2. "ConnectedDrive" 3. Select the desired software application.

Displaying status Information about the currently available soft ware applications can be displayed.

1. "ConnectedDrive" 2. "BMW apps"

Notes The ranges of Apps that can be displayed

on the Control Display depend on the range of installed software applications on the mobile phone.

The data transmission of the software ap plications from the mobile phone to the ve hicle can last some time. Some software applications depend on the speed of the available Internet connection of the mobile phone.

Some mobile phones cannot simultane ously use Apps and the Bluetooth hands- free system. If necessary, restart the software applica tion on the mobile phone after a phone conversation.

Remote Services With Remote Services, a connection can be established between a mobile phone and the vehicle. This connection can be used, for ex ample, to lock and unlock the vehicle. Depending on the vehicle, additional functions may be available. To be able to use the functions, the My BMW Remote app must be downloaded. Operation takes place via the app. Alternatively, the functions can also be used via the ConnectedDrive Hotline. The operating instructions for the My BMW Remote app can be found on the Connected Drive portal or at www.bmw.com.

Seite 225

ConnectedDrive Communication

225 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

Mobility In order to always ensure your mobility, you will

find important information on operating fluids, wheels and tires, maintenance and Roadside

Assistance in the following.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

Refueling Vehicle equipment This chapter describes all series equipment as well as country-specific and special equipment offered for this model series.Therefore, it also describes equipment that may not be found in your vehicle, for instance due to the selected special equipment or the country version. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems.

General information Refuel promptly At the latest, refuel at a range below

30 miles/50 km; otherwise, the engine function is not ensured and damage may occur.

Notes Switch off the engine before refueling Always switch off the engine before refu

eling; otherwise, fuel cannot be added to the tank and a message will be displayed.

Observe when handling fuel Take all precautionary measures and

observe all applicable regulations when handling fuel.

Do not carry any spare fuel containers in your vehicle. They can develop a leak and cause an explosion or cause a fire in the event of an accident.

Fuel cap Opening 1. Briefly press the rear edge of the fuel filler

flap.

2. Turn the fuel cap counterclockwise. 3. Place the fuel cap in the bracket attached

to the fuel filler flap.

Closing 1. Fit the fuel cap and turn it clockwise until

you clearly hear a click. 2. Close the fuel filler flap.

Do not pinch the retaining strap Do not pinch the retaining strap attached

to the cap; otherwise, the cap cannot be closed properly and fuel vapors can escape.

A message is displayed if the cap is loose or missing.

Seite 228

Mobility Refueling

228 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

Manually unlocking fuel filler flap In the event of a malfunction, the fuel filler flap can be released manually:

1. Press the cover out of the cargo area side panel at the rear and remove it.

2. Take the button with the fuel pump symbol out of the holder toward the front and pull. This releases the fuel filler flap.

Observe the following when refueling When refueling, insert the filler nozzle com pletely into the filler pipe. Lifting up the fuel pump nozzle during refueling causes: Premature pump shutoff. Reduced efficiency in the fuel-vapor recov

ery system. The fuel tank is full when the filler nozzle clicks off the first time.

Do not overfill the fuel tank Do not overfill the fuel tank; otherwise,

escaping fuel may harm the environment or damage the vehicle.

Handling fuels Follow the safety instructions provided at

gas stations; otherwise, there is a danger of personal injury and property damage.

Fuel tank capacity X1 sDrive28i: approx. 16.1 US gal/61 liters.

X1 xDrive28i/X1 xDrive35i: ap prox. 16.6 US gal/63 liters.

Seite 229

Refueling Mobility

229 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

Fuel Vehicle equipment This chapter describes all series equipment as well as country-specific and special equipment offered for this model series.Therefore, it also describes equipment that may not be found in your vehicle, for instance due to the selected special equipment or the country version. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems.

Fuel recommendation Gasoline For the best fuel economy, the gasoline should be sulfur-free or very low in sulfur content. Do not use fuels that are labeled at the fuel pump as containing metals.

Only refuel with lead-free gasoline with out metal additives

Do not refuel with leaded gasoline or gasoline with metal additives, e. g., manganese or iron; otherwise, the catalytic converter and other components will be permanently damaged.

Fuels with a maximum ethanol content of 10 %, i.e., E10, may be used for refueling. The ethanol should fulfill the following quality standards: US: ASTM 4806xx CAN: CGSB-3.511xx xx: always adhere to the currently applicable standard.

Do not refuel with ethanol E85 Do not refuel with E85, i.e., fuel with an

ethanol content of 85 %, or with Flex Fuel, as this would damage the engine and fuel supply system.

The engine is knock controlled. Therefore, you can refuel with different gasoline qualities.

Gasoline quality BMW recommends AKI 91.

Minimum fuel grade BMW recommends AKI 89.

Minimum fuel grade Do not fill up with fuel below the speci

fied minimum quality; otherwise, the engine may not run properly.

If you use gasoline with this minimum AKI rat ing, the engine may produce knocking sounds when starting at high outside temperatures. This has no effect on the engine life.

Minimum fuel grade The use of poor-quality fuels may result

in harmful engine deposits or damage. Addi tionally, problems relating to drivability, start ing and stalling, especially under certain envi ronmental conditions such as high ambient temperature and high altitude, may occur. If drivability problems are encountered, we rec ommend switching to a high quality gasoline brand and a higher octane grade AKI num ber for a few tank fills. To avoid harmful en gine deposits, it is highly recommended to purchase gasoline from BP or Top Tier retail ers. Failure to comply with these recommendations may result in the need for unscheduled main tenance.

Seite 230

Mobility Fuel

230 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

Seite 231

Fuel Mobility

231 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

Wheels and tires Vehicle equipment This chapter describes all series equipment as well as country-specific and special equipment offered for this model series.Therefore, it also describes equipment that may not be found in your vehicle, for instance due to the selected special equipment or the country version. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems.

Tire inflation pressure Safety information It is not merely the tires' service life, but also driving comfort and, to a great extent, driving safety that depend on the condition of the tires and the maintenance of the specified tire pres sure.

Checking the pressure Only check the tire inflation pressure when the tires are cold. This means after a maximum of 1.25 miles/2 km driving or when the vehicle has been parked for at least 2 hours. When the tires are warm, the tire inflation pressure is higher.

Check the tire inflation pressure regularly Regularly check the tire inflation pres

sure and correct it as needed: at least twice a month and before a long trip. If you fail to ob serve this precaution, you may be driving on tires with incorrect tire pressures, a condition that may not only compromise your vehicle's driving stability, but also lead to tire damage and the risk of an accident.

After adjusting the tire inflation pressure, reset the Tire Pressure Monitor, refer to page 93, or reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor, refer to page 91.

Pressure specifications The tables below provide all the correct infla tion pressures for the specified tire sizes at ambient temperature. The inflation pressures apply to the tire sizes approved and tire brands recommended by BMW; a list of these is available from your service center. For correct identification of the right tire infla tion pressures, observe the following: Tire sizes of your vehicle. Maximum allowable driving speed.

Tire inflation pressures for driving up to 100 mph or 160 km/h For normal driving up to 100 mph/160 km/h, adjust pressures to the respective tire inflation pressures listed on the following pages in the column for traveling speeds up to 100 mph/ 160 km/h to achieve optimum driving comfort. These tire inflation pressures can also be found on the driver's side door pillar when the driver's door is open.

Do not exceed the maximum permissible speed

The maximum permissible speed for these tire pressures is 100 mph/160 km/h. Do not ex ceed this speed; otherwise, tire damage and accidents may occur.

Seite 232

Mobility Wheels and tires

232 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

Tire inflation pressures for driving above 100 mph or 160 km/h

Adjust the tire inflation pressures To drive at maximum speeds in excess of

100 mph/160 km/h, adjust pressures to the re spective tire inflation pressures listed on the following pages in the column for traveling

speeds including those exceeding 100 mph or 160 km/h. Otherwise, tire damage and acci dents could occur.

Observe all national and local maximum speed limits; otherwise, violations of the laws could occur.

Tire inflation pressures X1 sDrive28i

Tire inflation pressure values up to 100 mph/160 km/h

Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI

All pressure specifications in the table are indicated in bar/PSI with cold tires. Cold = ambient temperature

225/50 R 17 94 H M+S A/S RSC 225/50 R 17 94 V RSC 225/50 R 17 94 H M+S RSC

2.2/32 2.6/38

225/45 R 18 91 V M+S A/S RSC 225/45 R 18 91 V RSC 225/45 R 18 91 H M+S RSC

2.4/35 2.8/41

Front: 225/45 R 18 91 V RSC Rear: 255/40 R 18 95 V RSC

2.4/35 -

- 2.6/38

Front: 225/40 R 19 89 W RSC Rear: 255/35 R 19 92 W RSC

2.6/38 -

- 2.8/41

Compact wheel: T 135/80 R 17 102 M

Speeds of up to 50 mph/ 80 km/h 4.2/60

Tire inflation pressure values over 100 mph/160 km/h Without high-speed tuning feature

Seite 233

Wheels and tires Mobility

233 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI

All pressure specifications in the table are indicated in bar/PSI with cold tires. Cold = ambient temperature

225/50 R 17 94 H M+S A/S RSC 225/45 R 18 91 V M+S A/S RSC 225/50 R 17 94 V RSC 225/45 R 18 91 V RSC 225/50 R 17 94 H M+S RSC 225/45 R 18 91 H M+S RSC

2.4/35 2.9/42

Front: 225/45 R 18 91 V RSC Rear: 255/40 R 18 95 V RSC

2.4/35 -

- 2.9/42

Front: 225/40 R 19 89 W RSC Rear: 255/35 R 19 92 W RSC

2.6/38 -

- 2.9/42

Compact wheel: T 135/80 R 17 102 M

Speeds of up to 50 mph/ 80 km/h 4.2/60

With high-speed tuning feature

Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI

All pressure specifications in the table are indicated in bar/PSI with cold tires. Cold = ambient temperature

225/50 R 17 94 V RSC 225/50 R 17 94 H M+S RSC

2.4/35 2.9/42

225/45 R 18 91 W RSC 225/45 R 18 91 H M+S RSC

2.6/38 3.1/45

Front: 225/45 R 18 91 V RSC Rear: 255/40 R 18 95 V RSC

2.6/38 -

- 2.9/42

Seite 234

Mobility Wheels and tires

234 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI

Front: 225/40 R 19 89 W RSC Rear: 255/35 R 19 92 W RSC

2.8/41 -

- 3.1/45

Compact wheel: T 135/80 R 17 102 M

Speeds of up to 50 mph/ 80 km/h 4.2/60

Tire inflation pressures X1 xDrive28i/X1 xDrive35i

Tire inflation pressure values up to 100 mph/160 km/h

Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI

All pressure specifications in the table are indicated in bar/PSI with cold tires. Cold = ambient temperature

225/50 R 17 94 H M+S A/S RSC 225/50 R 17 94 H RSC 225/50 R 17 94 H M+S RSC

2.2/32 2.6/38

225/45 R 18 91 V M+S A/S RSC 225/45 R 18 91 V RSC 225/45 R 18 91 H M+S RSC

2.4/35 2.8/41

Front: 225/45 R 18 91 V RSC Rear: 255/40 R 18 95 V RSC

2.4/35 -

- 2.6/38

Front: 225/40 R 19 89 W RSC Rear: 255/35 R 19 92 W RSC

2.6/38 -

- 2.8/41

Compact wheel: T 135/80 R 17 102 M

Speeds of up to 50 mph/ 80 km/h 4.2/60

Tire inflation pressure values over 100 mph/160 km/h Without high-speed tuning feature

Seite 235

Wheels and tires Mobility

235 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI

All pressure specifications in the table are indicated in bar/PSI with cold tires. Cold = ambient temperature

225/50 R 17 94 H M+S A/S RSC 225/50 R 17 94 H RSC 225/50 R 17 94 H M+S RSC

2.4/35 2.9/42

225/45 R 18 91 V M+S A/S RSC 225/45 R 18 91 V RSC 225/45 R 18 91 H M+S RSC

2.6/38 3.1/45

Front: 225/45 R 18 91 V RSC Rear: 255/40 R 18 95 V RSC

2.6/38 -

- 2.9/42

Front: 225/40 R 19 89 W RSC Rear: 255/35 R 19 92 W RSC

2.6/38 -

- 2.9/42

Compact wheel: T 135/80 R 17 102 M

Speeds of up to 50 mph/ 80 km/h 4.2/60

With high-speed tuning feature

Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI

All pressure specifications in the table are indicated in bar/PSI with cold tires. Cold = ambient temperature

225/50 R 17 94 V RSC 225/50 R 17 94 H M+S RSC

2.6/38 3.0/44

225/45 R 18 91 W RSC 225/45 R 18 91 H M+S RSC

2.8/41 3.2/46

Front: 225/45 R 18 91 V RSC Rear: 255/40 R 18 95 V RSC

2.8/41 -

- 3.0/44

Seite 236

Mobility Wheels and tires

236 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI

Front: 225/40 R 19 89 W RSC Rear: 255/35 R 19 92 W RSC

3.0/44 -

- 3.2/46

Compact wheel: T 135/80 R 17 102 M

Speeds of up to 50 mph/ 80 km/h 4.2/60

Tire identification marks Knowledge of the labeling on the side of the tire makes it easier to identify and choose the right tires.

Tire size Example: 225/45 R 17 91 V 225: nominal width in mm 45: aspect ratio in % R: radial tire code 17: rim diameter in inches 91: load rating, not for ZR tires V: speed rating, before the R on ZR tires

Speed letter Q = up to 100 mph/160 km/h T = up to 118 mph/190 km/h H = up to 131 mph/210 km/h V = up to 150 mph/240 km/h W = up to 167 mph/270 km/h Y = up to 186 mph/300 km/h

Tire Identification Number Tires with DOT codes meet the guidelines of the U.S. Department of Transportation. DOT code: DOT xxxx xxx 2313 xxxx: manufacturer code for the tire brand xxx: tire size and tire design 2313: tire age

Tire age The tire manufacturing date is contained in the tire identification mark: DOT ... 2313 means that the tire was manufactured in the week 23 of 2013. BMW recommends that you replace all tires af ter 6 years at most, even if some tires may last for 10 years.

Uniform Tire Quality Grading Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width. For example: Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A

DOT Quality Grades Treadwear Traction AA A B C Temperature A B C

Conform to Federal Safety Requirements All passenger car tires must conform to

Federal Safety Requirements in addition to these grades.

Treadwear The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified gov ernment test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half (1 1/2) times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance

Seite 237

Wheels and tires Mobility

237 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart signifi cantly from the norm due to variations in driv ing habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate.

Traction The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance. The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.

Temperature The temperature grades are A, the highest, B, and C, representing the tire's resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the ma terial of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law.

Temperature grade for this tire The temperature grade for this tire is es

tablished for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinfla tion, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.

RSC Run-flat tires The symbol identifying run-flat tires is a circle with the letters RSC on the sidewall, refer to page 240.

M+S Winter and all-season tires. These have better winter properties than summer tires.

XL Designation for specially reinforced tires.

Tire tread Summer tires Do not drive with a tire tread depth of less than 0.12 in/3 mm. There is an increased danger of hydroplaning if the tread depth is less than 0.12 in/3 mm.

Winter tires Do not drive with a tire tread depth of less than 0.16 in/4 mm. Below a tread depth of 0.16 in/4 mm, tires are less suitable for winter operation.

Minimum tread depth

Wear indicators are distributed around the tire's circumference and have the legally re quired minimum height of 0.063 in/1.6 mm.

They are marked on the side of the tire with TWI, Tread Wear Indicator.

Seite 238

Mobility Wheels and tires

238 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

Tire damage General information Inspect your tires often for damage, foreign objects lodged in the tread, and tread wear.

Notes Driving over rough or damaged road surfaces, as well as debris, curbs and other obstacles can cause serious damage to wheels, tires and suspension parts. This is more likely to occur with low-profile tires, which provide less cush ioning between the wheel and the road. Be careful to avoid road hazards and reduce your speed, especially if your vehicle is equipped with low-profile tires. Indications of tire damage or other vehicle de fects: Unusual vibrations during driving. Unusual handling such as a strong ten

dency to pull to the left or right. Damage can be caused by driving over curbs, road damage and similar situations.

In case of tire damage If there are indications of tire damage, re

duce your speed immediately and have the wheels and tires checked right away; other wise, there is the increased risk of an accident. Drive carefully to the next service center or tire shop. If necessary, have the vehicle towed. Otherwise, tire damage can present a life- threatening hazard to vehicle occupants and other road users.

Repair of tire damage For safety reasons, the manufacturer of

your vehicle recommends that you do not have damaged tires repaired; they should be re placed. Otherwise, damage can occur as a re sult.

Changing wheels and tires Mounting

Information on mounting tires Have mounting and balancing performed

only by a service center or tire specialist. If this work is not carried out properly, there is the danger of subsequent damage and related safety hazards.

Wheel and tire combination Information on the right wheel and tire combi nation and rim version for your vehicle can be obtained from the service center. Incorrect wheel and tire combinations impair the function of a variety of systems such as ABS or DSC. To maintain good handling and vehicle re sponse, use only tires with a single tread con figuration from a single manufacturer. Following tire damage, have the original wheel and tire combination remounted on the vehicle as soon as possible.

Approved wheels and tires The manufacturer of your vehicle recom

mends that you use only wheels and tires that have been approved for your particular vehicle model. For example, despite having the same official size ratings, variations can lead to body con tact and with it, the risk of severe accidents. The manufacturer of your vehicle cannot eval uate non-approved wheels and tires to deter mine if they are suited for use, and therefore cannot ensure the operating safety of the vehi cle if they are mounted.

Wheels with electronics for TPM Tire Pressure Monitor When mounting new tires or changing from summer to winter tires or vice versa, only use wheels with TPM electronics; otherwise, the

Seite 239

Wheels and tires Mobility

239 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

Tire Pressure Monitor will not be able to detect a flat tire, refer to page 93. Your service center will be glad to advise you.

Recommended tire brands

For each tire size, the manufacturer of your ve hicle recommends certain tire brands. These can be identified by a star on the tire sidewall. With proper use, these tires meet the highest standards for safety and handling.

Retreaded tires The manufacturer of your vehicle does not rec ommend the use of retreaded tires.

Retreaded tires Possibly substantial variations in the de

sign and age of the tire casing structures can limit service life and have a negative impact on road safety.

Winter tires The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends winter tires for winter roads or at temperatures below +45 /+7 . Although so-called all-season M+S tires do provide better winter traction than summer tires, they do not provide the same level of per formance as winter tires.

Maximum speed of winter tires If the maximum speed of the vehicle is higher than the permissible speed for the winter tires, then display a corresponding sign in the field

of vision. You can obtain this sign from the tire specialist or from your service center.

Maximum speed for winter tires Do not exceed the maximum speed for

the winter tires; otherwise, tire damage and ac cidents can occur.

Run-flat tires For your own safety, only use run-flat tires. Your service center will be glad to advise you.

Rotating wheels between axles The manufacturer of your vehicle advises against swapping wheels between the front and rear axles. This can impair the handling characteristics. Rotating the tires is not permissible when us ing different types of tires.

Storage Store wheels and tires in a cool, dry place with as little exposure to light as possible. Always protect tires against all contact with oil, grease and fuels. Do not exceed the maximum tire inflation pres sure indicated on the side wall of the tire.

Run-flat tires Label

RSC label on the tire sidewall.

Seite 240

Mobility Wheels and tires

240 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

The wheels are composed of special rims and tires that are self-supporting, to a limited de gree. The support of the sidewall allows the tire to remain drivable to a restricted degree in the event of a pressure loss.

Driving with a damaged tire: Flat Tire Monitor FTM, refer to page 91 Tire Pressure Monitor TPM, refer to

page 93

Changing run-flat tires For your own safety, only use run-flat tires. No spare tire is available in the case of a flat tire. Your service center will be glad to advise you.

Snow chains Only certain fine-link snow chains have been tested by BMW, classified as safe for use and recommended. Consult your service center for more information. Snow chains must be mounted in pairs and on the rear wheels only. Observe the manufacturer's instructions when mounting snow chains. Do not exceed a speed of 30 mph/50 km/h when using snow chains. Do not initialize the Flat Tire Monitor if snow chains are mounted; otherwise, the instrument might issue an incorrect reading. When driving with snow chains, it can be bene ficial to temporarily activate DTC, refer to page 98.

Seite 241

Wheels and tires Mobility

241 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

Engine compartment Vehicle equipment This chapter describes all series equipment as well as country-specific and special equipment offered for this model series.Therefore, it also

describes equipment that may not be found in your vehicle, for instance due to the selected special equipment or the country version. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems.

Important features in the engine compartment

1 Coolant expansion tank246 2 Vehicle identification number 3 Filler neck for washer fluid for the head

lamp and window washer system65

4 Jump-starting, positive terminal 5 Filler neck for engine oil, refer to Adding

engine oil

Hood Opening the hood

Working in the engine compartment Never attempt to perform any service or

repair operations on your vehicle without the necessary professional technical training.

If you are unfamiliar with the statutory guide lines, have any work on the vehicle performed only by a service center. If this work is not carried out properly, there is the danger of subsequent damage and related safety hazards.

Seite 242

Mobility Engine compartment

242 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

Risk of damage Before opening the hood, ensure that the

wiper arms with wiper blades are folded onto the window; otherwise, damage may occur.

1. Pull the lever.

2. Lift the hood all the way. 3. Press the release handle and open the

hood.

Closing the hood

Drop the hood from a height of ap prox. 16 in/40 cm. It must be clearly heard to engage.

Hood open when driving If you see any signs that the hood is not

completely closed while driving, pull over im mediately and close it securely.

Danger of pinching Make sure that the closing path of the

hood is clear; otherwise, injuries may result.

Engine oil General information Engine oil consumption depends on the driv ing style and the conditions of use. A highly sporty driving style, for example, results in considerably higher engine oil consumption. Therefore, regularly check the engine oil level after refueling. Depending on the engine, the vehicle uses electronic oil measurement or dip stick meas urement.

Checking the engine oil level Your car is equipped with an electronic engine oil level check.

Requirements The engine must be running and warm af

ter the vehicle has been driven for at least 6.2 miles/10 km.

The vehicle is stopped or being driven on a level roadway.

Display in the instrument cluster 1. Lightly press button 1 in the turn indicator

lever up or down repeatedly until the ap

Seite 243

Engine compartment Mobility

243 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

propriate symbol appears in the display, accompanied by the word "OIL".

2. Press button 2 in the turn indicator lever. The oil level is checked and the reading displayed.

Possible displays

Symbol Function

Oil level OK.

Oil level is being checked. This can take about 3 minutes if the car is at a standstill on a level surface, or about 5 mi nutes while the car is on the move.

Oil at minimum level: Add a maximum quantity of 1 US quart/1 liter of engine oil, refer to page 245, at the next opportunity.

Symbol Function

Oil level is too high. Overfilling oil damages the en gine. Have the vehicle checked immediately.

The oil level sensor is defec tive. Do not add engine oil. It is possible to continue driv ing. Note the newly calculated remaining mileage until the next oil service, refer to page 78. Have the system checked as soon as possible.

Display via iDrive 1. "Vehicle Info" 2. "Vehicle status"

3. "Engine oil level"

Possible messages "Engine oil level OK" "Measurement not possible at this time." "Measuring engine oil level..."

Duration with the engine running: ap prox. 3 minutes. Duration while driving: approx. 5 minutes. If engine oil was added, it may take up to 30 minutes to obtain an oil level reading.

"Engine oil level below minimum. Add 1 quart!"

Seite 244

Mobility Engine compartment

244 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

Add a maximum quantity of 1 US quart/1 li ter of engine oil at the next opportunity, re fer also to Adding engine oil below.

"Engine oil level too high! Have this checked."

Too much engine oil Have the vehicle checked immedi

ately; otherwise, surplus oil can lead to en gine damage.

"Measurement inactive. Have this checked." Do not add engine oil. It is possi ble to continue driving. Note the newly cal culated remaining mileage until the next oil service, refer to page 78. Have the system checked as soon as possible.

Adding engine oil

Filler neck

Add a maximum quantity of 1 US quart/1 liter of oil only after a corresponding message ap pears on the Control Display.

Add oil promptly Add oil within the next 125 miles/200 km;

otherwise, engine damage could result.

Too much engine oil Have the vehicle checked immediately;

otherwise, surplus oil can lead to engine dam age.

Protect children Keep oil, grease, etc., out of reach of chil

dren and heed the warnings on the containers to prevent health risks.

Oil types for refilling

Notes No oil additives Do not use oil additives as these may

cause engine damage.

Viscosity classes of engine oils When selecting an engine oil, ensure that

the engine oil belongs to one of the SAE vis cosity classes 0W-40, 0W-30, 5W-40, or 5W-30, or malfunctions or engine damage may occur.

The engine oil quality is critical for the life of the engine. Due to national regulations, some oil types are not available in every country.

Approved oil types

Gasoline engine

BMW High Performance SAE 5W-30

BMW Longlife-01

BMW Longlife-01 FE

Further information on approved oil types can be obtained from the service center.

Alternative oil types If the approved engine oils are not available, up to 1 US quart/liter of an oil with the following specification can be used:

Gasoline engine

API SM or a higher quality standard

Seite 245

Engine compartment Mobility

245 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

Coolant General information

Danger of burns from hot engine Do not open the cooling system while

the engine is hot; otherwise, escaping coolant may cause burns.

Suitable additives Only use suitable additives; otherwise,

engine damage may occur. The additives are harmful to your health.

Coolant consists of water and additives. Not all commercially available additives are suitable for your vehicle. Ask your service cen ter for suitable additives.

Checking the coolant level 1. Do not open the hood until the engine has

cooled down. 2. Turn the expansion tank cap counterclock

wise slightly to allow any accumulated

pressure to escape; then continue turning to open.

3. The filling level indicator 1 in the filler neck indicates the coolant level. The coolant level is correct if it is between the arrows of the respective reservoir label 2.

4. If the coolant is low, slowly add coolant up to the specified level; do not overfill.

5. Turn the cap until there is an audible click. 6. Have the cause of the coolant loss elimi

nated as soon as possible.

Disposal Comply with the appropriate environ mental protection regulations when dis

posing of coolant additives.

Seite 246

Mobility Engine compartment

246 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

Engine oil change The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends having the engine oil changed by your service center.

Maintenance Vehicle equipment This chapter describes all series equipment as well as country-specific and special equipment offered for this model series.Therefore, it also describes equipment that may not be found in your vehicle, for instance due to the selected special equipment or the country version. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems.

BMW Maintenance System

The maintenance system provides information on required maintenance measures and thus provides support in maintaining road safety and the operational reliability of the vehicle.

Condition Based Service CBS Sensors and special algorithms take into ac count the driving conditions of your vehicle. Based on this, Condition Based Service deter mines the maintenance requirements. The system makes it possible to adapt the amount of maintenance you need to your user profile. Details on the service requirements, refer to page 78, can be displayed on the Control Dis play.

On the Control Display, the remaining distan ces and times for selected maintenance re quirements and any legally required deadlines can be displayed individually, refer to page 78.

Service data in the remote control Information on the required maintenance is continuously stored in the remote control. Your service center will read out this data and suggest the right array of service procedures for your vehicle. Therefore, hand your service specialist the re mote control that you used most recently.

Setting the correct date Make sure the date is set correctly, refer

to page 76; otherwise, the effectiveness of CBS Condition Based Service is not ensured.

Storage periods Storage periods during which the vehicle bat tery was disconnected are not taken into ac count. If this occurs, have a service center update the time-dependent maintenance procedures, such as checking brake fluid and, if necessary, changing the engine oil and the microfilter/ activated-charcoal filter.

Service and Warranty Information Booklet for US models and Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models Please consult your Service and Warranty In formation Booklet for US models and Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian mod els for additional information on service re quirements.

Seite 247

Maintenance Mobility

247 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

Maintenance and repair should be performed by your service center. Make sure to have reg ular maintenance procedures recorded in the vehicle's Service and Warranty Information Booklet for US models, and in the Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian mod els. These entries are proof of regular mainte nance.

Socket for OBD Onboard Diagnosis

Socket for Onboard Diagnosis The socket for Onboard Diagnosis may

only be used by the service center, by work shops that operate according to the specifica tions of the vehicle manufacturer with appro priately trained personnel, and by other authorized persons. Otherwise, its use may lead to vehicle malfunctions.

On the driver's side is an OBD socket for checking the primary components in the vehi cle emissions.

Emissions The warning lamp lights up:

Emissions are deteriorating. Have the vehicle checked as soon as possible.

The warning lamp flashes under certain circumstances: This indicates that there is excessive mis firing in the engine.

Reduce the vehicle speed and have the system checked immediately; otherwise, serious engine misfiring within a brief pe riod can seriously damage emission con trol components, in particular the catalytic converter.

Display of the previously described malfunctions on Canadian models.

Fuel cap The indicator lamp lights up. If the fuel cap is not properly tight ened, the OBD system may conclude

that fuel vapor is escaping. If the cap is then tightened, the display should go out in a short time.

Seite 248

Mobility Maintenance

248 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

Replacing components Vehicle equipment This chapter describes all series equipment as well as country-specific and special equipment offered for this model series.Therefore, it also describes equipment that may not be found in your vehicle, for instance due to the selected special equipment or the country version. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems.

Tool kit

The tool kit is stowed under the cargo floor panel and storage compartment in the cargo area.

Wiper blade replacement Do not fold down the wipers without wiper blades

Do not fold down the wipers if wiper blades have not been installed; this may damage the windshield.

Front 1. To change the wiper blades, fold up the

wiper arms, refer to page 64.

2. Fold up and hold the wiper arm.

3. Squeeze the locking spring, arrows 1, and fold out the wiper blade, arrow 2.

4. Take the wiper blade out of the catch mechanism toward the front.

5. Insert the new wiper blade in reverse order, making sure it engages.

Risk of damage Before opening the hood, ensure that the

wiper arms with wiper blades are folded onto the window; otherwise, damage may occur.

Seite 249

Replacing components Mobility

249 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

Rear

1. Fold up and hold the wiper arm. 2. Squeeze the locking spring, arrows 1, and

fold out the wiper blade, arrow 2. 3. Take the wiper blade out of the catch

mechanism toward the front.

Lamp and bulb replacement Notes

Lamps and bulbs Lamps and bulbs make an essential contribu tion to vehicle safety. The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends that you entrust corresponding procedures to the service center if you are unfamiliar with them or they are not described here. You can obtain a selection of replacement bulbs at the service center.

Danger of burns Only change bulbs when they are cool;

otherwise, there is the danger of getting burned.

Working on the lighting system When working on the lighting system,

you should always switch off the lights af fected to prevent short circuits. To avoid possible injury or equipment damage when replacing bulbs, observe any instructions provided by the bulb manufacturer.

Do not perform work/bulb replacement on xenon headlamps

Have any work on the xenon lighting system, including bulb replacement, performed only by a service center. Due to the high voltage present in the system, there is the danger of fatal injuries if work is carried out improperly.

Do not touch the bulbs Do not touch the glass of new bulbs with

your bare hands, as even minute amounts of contamination will burn into the bulb's surface and reduce its service life. Use a clean tissue, cloth or something similar, or hold the bulb by its base.

Light-emitting diodes LED Light-emitting diodes installed behind translu cent lenses serve as the light source for many of the controls, displays and other equipment in your vehicle. These light-emitting diodes, which operate us ing a concept similar to that applied in conven tional lasers, are officially designated as Class 1 light-emitting diodes.

Do not remove the covers Do not remove the covers, and never

stare into the unfiltered light for several hours; otherwise, irritation of the retina could result.

Headlamp glass Condensation can form on the inside of the headlamps in cool or humid weather. When you drive with the lights switched on, the con densation evaporates after a short time. The headlamps do not need to be changed. If the condensation in the headlamps does not evaporate after trips with the lights switched on, and the amount of moisture in the head lamps increases, for example if water droplets form, have them checked by your service cen ter.

Seite 250

Mobility Replacing components

250 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

Removing the headlamp cover The high beam bulbs can be replaced via the engine compartment, and the low beam and turn signal bulbs can be replaced via a folding cover in the wheel arch.

1 High beam cover 2 Low beam cover 3 Turn signal bulb socket

To remove the covers: High beams: fold out the bracket, arrow 4,

and take the cover out of the guide. Low beams: unscrew the cover, arrow 5.

Attach the covers carefully When attaching the covers, proceed

carefully; otherwise, leaks may occur, causing damage to the headlamp system.

Proceed in reverse order when attaching the covers.

Access via the wheel arch For low beams and turn signals only:

1. Turn the wheel inward. 2. Open the folding cover in the wheel arch.

To open the locks, turn them counter

clockwise all the way using a coin, for ex ample.

Halogen headlamps

Low beams and high beams Wear protective goggles and gloves Halogen bulbs are pressurized. There

fore, wear protective goggles and gloves. Oth erwise, there is a danger of injuries if the bulb is accidentally damaged during replacement.

The low beams and high beams have separate covers. H7 bulb, 55 watt

1. Switch off the lamps and take the remote control out of the ignition lock.

2. Low beam: open the folding cover in the wheel arch, refer to page 251.

3. Remove the corresponding cover, refer to page 251.

4. Unplug the connector from the bulb. 5. Slide the wire bracket sideways out of the

anchor, arrow 1, and fold down, arrow 2.

6. Remove the bulb.

Seite 251

Replacing components Mobility

251 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

7. Insert the new bulb. 8. Fold up the wire bracket and lock it. 9. Plug in the connector. 10. Reattach the cover. 11. Low beam: attach the folding cover in the

wheel arch.

Parking and roadside parking lamps 5-watt bulb, W5W

1. Switch off the lamps and take the remote control out of the ignition lock.

2. Remove the high beam cover, refer to page 251.

3. Pull out the bulb socket, see arrow.

4. Pull off the bulb and replace it. 5. Insert the bulb socket. 6. Reattach the cover.

Xenon headlamps

Xenon headlamps Because of the long life of these bulbs, the likelihood of failure is very low. Switching the lamps on and off frequently shortens their life. If a xenon bulb fails, switch on the front fog lamps and continue the trip with great care. Comply with local regulations.

Do not perform work/bulb replacement on xenon headlamps

Have any work on the xenon lighting system, including bulb replacement, performed only by a service center.

Due to the high voltage present in the system, there is the danger of fatal injuries if work is carried out improperly.

Parking lamps and roadside parking lamps, daytime running lights H8 bulb, 35 watt

1. Switch off the lamps and take the remote control out of the ignition lock.

2. Remove the high beam cover, refer to page 251.

3. Turn the bulb by approx. 90, see arrow, and pull it out.

4. Disconnect the plug, change the bulb and reconnect the plug.

5. Insert the bulb and turn it until it stops. 6. Reattach the cover.

Seite 252

Mobility Replacing components

252 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

Turn signals, front 21-watt bulb, PY21W

1. Switch off the lamps and take the remote control out of the ignition lock.

2. Open the folding cover in the wheel arch, refer to page 251.

3. Turn the turn signal bulb socket 1 to the left and remove it.

4. Apply gentle pressure to the bulb while turning it to the left for removal and re placement.

5. Insert the turn signal bulb socket 1 and turn it all the way to the right.

6. Attach the folding cover in the wheel arch.

Turn signal in exterior mirror Follow the general instructions on lamps and bulbs, refer to page 250. The turn signals in the exterior mirrors use LED technology. Contact your service center in the event of a malfunction.

Tail lamps The tail lamps consist of two parts. One part is in the tailgate and the other is in the fender. P21W bulbs, 21 watt

1 Backup lamp 2 Roadside parking lamp/tail lamp LED 3 Brake lamp 4 Turn signal 5 Inner brake lamp

If bulb 2 is defective, please contact the serv ice center.

Lamps in fender All bulbs are integrated in a central bulb holder.

1. Switch off the lamps and take the remote control out of the ignition lock.

2. Press the cover out of the rear cargo area side trim and remove it.

3. Disengage the bulb holder by pressing down the upper clip, arrow 1.

Seite 253

Replacing components Mobility

253 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

On the right side, take the button with the fuel pump symbol out of the holder toward the front if necessary.

4. Squeeze the lower clips, arrows 2, and take out the bulb holder.

5. Apply gentle pressure to the bulb while turning it to the left for removal and re placement.

6. Re-engage the bulb holder so that it audi bly clicks into place.

7. Replace the cover.

Inside brake lamps in the tailgate 1. Switch off the lamps and take the remote

control out of the ignition lock. 2. Take the warning triangle out of the

bracket, refer to page 258. 3. Release the screws of the tailgate panel,

arrows.

4. Unclip the tailgate panel by pulling it down ward.

5. Push out the handle for opening manually in the event of an electrical malfunction, re fer to page 36, insert it through the open ing, and take off the panel.

6. Release the bulb holder with the clip, see arrows, and remove it.

7. Apply gentle pressure to the bulb while turning it to the left for removal and re placement.

8. Re-engage the bulb holder so that it audi bly clicks into place.

9. Insert the handle for opening manually through the tailgate panel opening and press it in.

10. Reattach the tailgate panel.

License plate lamp, center brake lamp, and roadside parking lamp/tail lamp These lamps are made using LED technology. Contact your service center in the event of a malfunction.

Changing wheels Notes Your vehicle is equipped with run-flat tires, re fer to page 240, as standard equipment. They do not need to be replaced immediately in the event of a puncture. No spare tire is available in the case of a flat tire. When mounting new tires or changing from summer to winter tires or vice versa, use run- flat tires for your own safety. Suitable tools for changing the wheels are available from the service center as an acces sory.

Seite 254

Mobility Replacing components

254 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

Jacking points for the vehicle jack

The jacking points for the vehicle jack are lo cated in the positions shown.

Vehicle battery Maintenance The battery is maintenance-free, i.e., the elec trolyte will last for the life of the battery. Your service center will be glad to advise you on questions regarding the battery.

Battery replacement Use approved vehicle batteries Only use vehicle batteries that have been

approved for your vehicle by the manufacturer; otherwise, the vehicle could be damaged and systems or functions may not be fully availa ble.

After a battery replacement, have the battery registered on the vehicle by your service cen ter to ensure that all comfort functions are fully available.

Charging the battery

Note Do not connect the charger to the socket Do not connect the battery charger to

the socket installed in the vehicle at the factory as this could damage the battery.

General information Ensure that the battery is sufficiently charged to achieve the full battery life. It may be necessary to charge the battery in the following cases: When the vehicle is frequently used to

drive short distances. When the vehicle has not been driven for

more than one month.

Starting aid terminals Only charge using the starting aid terminals, refer to page 259, in the engine compartment while the engine is switched off.

Power failure After a temporary power loss, some equipment needs to be reinitialized. Individual settings need to be reprogrammed: Seat and mirror memory: store the posi

tions again, refer to page 48. Time: update, refer to page 75. Date: update, refer to page 76. Radio station: save again, refer to

page 166. Navigation system: wait for the navigation

system to be operational. Panoramic glass sunroof: it may only be

possible to tilt the roof. Have the system initialized by the service center.

Digital compass: recalibrate, refer to page 115.

xDrive: the system automatically initializes as you drive. During this time, indicator lamps light up. If the lamps do not disap pear during the current trip, have the sys tem checked.

Disposing of old batteries Have old batteries disposed of by your service center or bring them to a recy cling center.

Seite 255

Replacing components Mobility

255 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

Maintain the battery in an upright position for transport and storage. Secure the battery so that it does not tip over during transport.

Fuses Replacing fuses Never attempt to repair a blown fuse and

do not replace a defective fuse with a substi tute of another color or amperage rating; this could lead to a circuit overload, ultimately re sulting in a fire in the vehicle.

Access to fuse box:

1. Open the glove compartment. 2. Release the damper from the bottom

holder by applying pressure toward the front, arrow 1.

3. Unlock the glove compartment by pressing on both tabs, arrows 2, and fold down.

A pair of plastic tweezers is found on the cur rent distributor. Information on the fuses can be found on the back of the cover. Spare fuses are available from the service cen ter.

Seite 256

Mobility Replacing components

256 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

Breakdown assistance Vehicle equipment This chapter describes all series equipment as well as country-specific and special equipment offered for this model series.Therefore, it also describes equipment that may not be found in your vehicle, for instance due to the selected special equipment or the country version. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems.

Hazard warning flashers

The button for the hazard warning system is located on the center console.

Do not fold in the exterior mirrors While driving and when using the turn

signal/hazard warning flashers, do not fold in the exterior mirrors; otherwise, the additional turn signal lamps in the exterior mirrors will not be in the appropriate position and will be diffi cult to detect.

Intelligent Emergency Request Requirements Radio readiness is switched on. The Assist system is operable.

The SIM card integrated in the vehicle is activated.

ConnectedDrive subscription is available. Only press the SOS button in an emergency.

Emergency Request not guaranteed For technical reasons, the Emergency

Request cannot be guaranteed under unfavor able conditions.

Initiating an Emergency Request 1. Press the cover briefly to open it.

2. Press the SOS button until the LED in the button lights up.

The LED lights up: an Emergency Request was initiated. If the circumstances allow this, remain in the vehicle until the connection has been established.

The LED flashes if the connection to the BMW Assist Response Center has been established. Once the BMW Response Center has re ceived your Emergency Request, the BMW Response Center contacts you and takes further steps to help you. Even if you are unable to respond, the BMW Response Center can take further steps to help you under certain circum stances.

Seite 257

Breakdown assistance Mobility

257 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

For this purpose, data that are used to de termine the necessary rescue measures, such as the current position of the vehicle if it can be established, are transmitted to the BMW Response Center.

If the LED is flashing but the BMW Re sponse Center cannot be heard on the hands-free system, the hands-free system may be malfunctioning. However, the BMW Response Center may still be able to hear you.

Initiating an Emergency Request automatically Under certain conditions, an Emergency Re quest is automatically initiated immediately af ter a severe accident. Automatic Collision Noti fication is not affected by pressing the SOS button.

Roadside Assistance Service availability Roadside Assistance can be reached around the clock in many countries. You can obtain as sistance there in the event of a vehicle break down.

Roadside Assistance The Roadside Assistance, refer to page 221, phone number can be viewed on the iDrive or a connection to Roadside Assistance can be es tablished directly.

Warning triangle

On the inside of the tailgate. To remove, press on the tab, arrow.

First aid kit

The first aid kit is located in a storage compart ment on the right side in the cargo area.

Some of the articles contained in the first aid pouch have a limited service life. Check the expiration dates of the contents regularly and replace any items promptly.

Jump-starting Notes If the battery is discharged, an engine can be started using the battery of another vehicle and two jumper cables. Only use jumper ca bles with fully insulated clamp handles. To prevent personal injury or damage to both vehicles, adhere strictly to the following proce dure.

Seite 258

Mobility Breakdown assistance

258 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

Do not touch live parts To avoid the risk of potentially fatal in

jury, always avoid all contact with electrical components while the engine is running.

Preparation 1. Check whether the battery of the other ve

hicle has a voltage of 12 volts and approxi mately the same capacitance in Ah. This information can be found on the battery.

2. Switch off the engine of the assisting vehi cle.

3. Switch off any electronic systems/power consumers in both vehicles.

Bodywork contact between vehicles There must not be any contact between

the bodies of the two vehicles, otherwise there is a danger of shorting.

Starting aid terminals Connecting order Connect the jumper cables in the correct

order; otherwise, there is the danger of injury from sparking.

The so-called starting aid terminal in the en gine compartment acts as the battery's posi tive terminal. Pull the cover up and off.

The body ground or a special nut acts as the negative terminal.

Connecting jumper cables 1. Pull off the cap of the BMW starting aid ter

minal. 2. Attach one terminal clamp of the positive

jumper cable to the positive terminal of the battery, or to the corresponding starting aid terminal of the vehicle providing assis tance.

3. Attach the other end of the cable to the positive terminal of the battery, or to the corresponding starting aid terminal of the vehicle to be started.

4. Attach one terminal clamp of the negative jumper cable to the negative terminal of the battery, or to the corresponding engine or body ground of the vehicle providing as sistance.

5. Attach the other end of the cable to the negative terminal of the battery, or to the corresponding engine or body ground of the vehicle to be started.

Starting the engine Never use spray fluids to start the engine.

1. Start the engine of the assisting vehicle and let it run for several minutes at an in creased idle speed.

2. Start the engine of the vehicle being started in the usual way. If the first starting attempt is not success ful, wait a few minutes before making an

Seite 259

Breakdown assistance Mobility

259 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

other attempt in order to allow the dis charged battery to recharge.

3. Let both engines run for several minutes. 4. Disconnect the jumper cables in the re

verse order. Check the battery and recharge if necessary.

Tow-starting and towing Observe applicable laws and regulations Observe applicable laws and regulations

for tow-starting and towing.

No additional passengers Do not transport any passengers other

than the driver in a vehicle that is being towed.

Automatic transmission, 8-gear: transporting your vehicle

Note Your vehicle is not permitted to be towed. Therefore, contact a service center in the event of a breakdown.

Do not have the vehicle towed Have your vehicle transported on a load

ing platform only; otherwise, damage may oc cur.

Tow truck

Do not lift the vehicle Do not lift the vehicle by the tow fitting or

body and chassis parts; otherwise, damage may result.

Use the tow fitting screwed in at the front for maneuvering the vehicle only.

Towing your vehicle

Observe before towing your vehicle Light towing vehicle The towing vehicle must not be lighter

than your vehicle, or it will not be possible to control vehicle response.

Attaching the tow bar/tow rope correctly Attach the tow bar or tow rope to the tow

fitting; connecting it to other vehicle parts may cause damage.

Automatic transmission, 6-gear Selector lever in position N.

Adhere to the towing speed and distance Do not exceed a towing speed of

40 mph/70 km/h and a towing distance of 90 miles/150 km or damage to the transmis sion can occur.

Being towed Follow the towing instructions Follow all towing instructions, or vehicle

damage or accidents may occur.

Make sure that the ignition is switched on; otherwise, the low beams, tail lamps, turn signals, and windshield wipers may be un available.

Do not tow the vehicle with the rear axle tilted, as the front wheels could turn.

When the engine is stopped, there is no power assist. Consequently, more force

Seite 260

Mobility Breakdown assistance

260 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

needs to be applied when braking and steering.

Larger steering wheel movements are re quired.

Switch on the hazard warning system, de pending on local regulations.

If the electrical system has failed, clearly identify the vehicle being towed by placing a sign or a warning triangle in the rear win dow.

Tow truck

sDrive Vehicles with automatic transmission, 6-gear.

Have your vehicle transported with a tow truck with a so-called lift bar or on a flat bed.

xDrive

Towing a vehicle with xDrive Do not tow a vehicle with xDrive with just

the front or rear axle raised; otherwise, the wheels could lock up and the transfer case could be damaged.

Towing other vehicles

General information Light towing vehicle Your vehicle must not be lighter than the

vehicle being towed; otherwise, it will not be possible to control vehicle response.

Attaching the tow bar/tow rope correctly Attach the tow bar or tow rope to the tow

fitting; connecting it to other vehicle parts may cause damage.

Switch on the hazard warning system, de pending on local regulations.

If the electrical system has failed, clearly identify the vehicle being towed by placing a sign or a warning triangle in the rear win dow.

Towing methods Do not lift the vehicle Do not lift the vehicle by the tow fitting or

body and chassis parts; otherwise, damage may result.

Tow bar The tow fittings used should be on the same side on both vehicles. Should it prove impossible to avoid mounting the tow bar at an offset angle, please observe the following: Clearance and maneuvering capability will

be sharply limited during cornering. The tow bar will generate lateral forces if it

is attached offset.

Tow rope When starting to tow the vehicle, make sure that the tow rope is taut. To avoid jerking and the associated stresses on the vehicle components when towing, al ways use nylon ropes or nylon straps.

Seite 261

Breakdown assistance Mobility

261 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

Attaching the tow rope correctly Only secure the tow rope on the tow fit

ting; otherwise, damage can occur when it is secured on other parts of the vehicle.

Tow fitting The screw-in tow fitting should always be car ried in the vehicle. It can be screwed in at the front or rear of the BMW. It is located in the tool kit under the cargo floor cover and storage compartment in the cargo area, refer to page 249. It is stored with the tool kit under the cargo floor cover in the cargo area, refer to page 249.

Tow fitting, information on use Use only the tow fitting provided with

the vehicle and screw it all the way in. Use the tow fitting for towing on paved

roads only. Avoid lateral loading of the tow fitting, e.g.,

do not lift the vehicle by the tow fitting. Otherwise, damage to the tow fitting and the vehicle can occur.

Screw thread

Press on the lower part of the cover. The cover is pushed out at the top edge and can be pulled out.

Tow-starting

Note Do not tow-start your vehicle.

Due to the automatic transmission, the engine cannot be started by tow-starting. Have the cause of the starting difficulties rem edied.

Seite 262

Mobility Breakdown assistance

262 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

Care Vehicle equipment This chapter describes all series equipment as well as country-specific and special equipment offered for this model series.Therefore, it also describes equipment that may not be found in your vehicle, for instance due to the selected special equipment or the country version. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems.

Car washes Notes

Steam jets or high-pressure washers When using steam jets or high-pressure

washers, hold them a sufficient distance away and use a maximum temperature of 140 /60 . Holding them too close or using excessively high pressures or temperatures can cause damage or preliminary damage that may then lead to long-term damage. Follow the operating instructions for the high- pressure washer.

Do not direct steam or high-pressure washers toward the decorative labels applied by the manufacturer; otherwise, damage may result.

Cleaning sensors/cameras with high- pressure washers

When using high-pressure washers, do not spray the exterior sensors and cameras, for Park Distance Control or the backup camera, for instance, for extended periods of time and only from a distance of at least 12 in/30 cm.

Regularly remove foreign bodies, such as leaves, from the area below the windshield when the hood is open.

Wash your vehicle frequently, particularly in winter. Intense soiling and road salt can damage the vehicle.

Washing in automatic car washes Give preference to cloth car washes or those that use soft brushes in order to avoid paint damage.

Notes Note the following: Make sure that the wheels and tires are not

damaged by the transport mechanisms. Fold in the exterior mirrors; otherwise, they

may be damaged, depending on the width of the vehicle.

Deactivate the rain sensor, refer to page 63, to avoid unintentional wiper acti vation.

Move the rear window wiper to its resting position, deactivate it, and protect it against damage. Ask the car wash operator about any necessary protective measures.

Remove additional attachments, for in stance a spoiler or telephone antenna, if there is a risk that these may be damaged.

Guide rails in car washes Avoid car washes with guide rails higher

than 4 in/10 cm; otherwise, the vehicle body could be damaged.

Before driving into a car wash The vehicle is able to roll if the following steps are taken.

Automatic transmission 1. Release the handbrake, refer to page 61. 2. Drive into the car wash.

Seite 263

Care Mobility

263 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

3. Depress the brake pedal if necessary. 4. Engage the selector lever or transmission

position N. 5. Switch the engine off. 6. Leave the remote control in the ignition

lock so that the vehicle can roll. In 8-gear automatic transmissions, transmis sion position P is engaged automatically. Automatically after approx. 30 minutes. When the remote control is removed from

the ignition lock.

Headlamps Do not rub dry and do not use abrasive or

caustic cleansers. Soak areas that have been soiled e.g. due

to insects, with shampoo and wash off with water.

Thaw ice with de-icing spray; do not use an ice scraper.

After washing the vehicle After washing the vehicle, apply the brakes briefly to dry them; otherwise, braking action can be reduced and corrosion of the brake discs can occur. Fully remove any residue from the windows to prevent obstruction of view from streaking, wiping noises, and wiper wear.

Vehicle care Car care products BMW recommends using cleaning and care products from BMW, since these have been tested and approved.

Car care and cleaning products Follow the instructions on the container.

When cleaning the interior, open the doors or windows.

Only use products intended for cleaning vehi cles. Cleansers can contain substances that are dangerous and harmful to your health.

Vehicle paint Regular care contributes to driving safety and value retention. Environmental influences in areas with high air pollution or natural contami nants, such as tree resin or pollen, can have an impact on the vehicle paint. Tailor the fre quency and extent of your car care to these in fluences. Immediately remove aggressive substances, such as spilled fuel, oil, grease, or bird drop pings, to prevent damage to or discoloration of the paintwork.

Leather care Remove dust from the leather often, using a cloth or vacuum cleaner. Otherwise, particles of dust and road grime chafe in pores and folds, and lead to increased wear and premature degradation of the leather surface. To guard against discoloration, such as from clothing, provide leather care roughly every two months. Clean light-colored leather more frequently as dust and dirt are more noticeable. Use leather care products; otherwise, dirt and grease will gradually break down the protective layer of the leather surface. Suitable care products are available from the service center.

Upholstery material care Vacuum regularly with a vacuum cleaner. If they are very dirty, e.g., beverage stains, use a soft sponge or microfiber cloth with a suita ble interior cleaner.

Seite 264

Mobility Care

264 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

Clean the upholstery down to the seams using large sweeping motions. Avoid rubbing the material vigorously.

Damage from Velcro fasteners Open Velcro fasteners on pants or

other articles of clothing can damage the seat covers. Ensure that any Velcro fasteners are closed.

Caring for special components

Light-alloy wheels When cleaning the wheels on the vehicle, only use a neutral wheel rim cleaner with a pH value of 5 to 9. Do not use abrasive cleaners or a steam jet hotter than 140 /60 ; otherwise, damage may result. Adhere to the manufac turer instructions. Aggressive, acidic, or alkaline cleaners may destroy the protective coating of neighboring components such as the brake disc.

Chrome surfaces Carefully clean components such as the radia tor grille or door handles with an ample supply of water, possibly with shampoo added, partic ularly when they have been exposed to road salt.

Rubber components Aside from water, treat only with rubber cleansers. When cleaning rubber seals, do not use any silicon-containing car care products in order to avoid damage or reduced noise damping.

Fine wood parts Clean fine wood facing and fine wood compo nents only with a moist rag. Then dry with a soft cloth.

Plastic components These include:

Imitation leather surfaces. Headliner. Lamp lenses. Instrument cluster cover. Matte black spray-coated components. Painted parts in the interior. Clean with a microfiber cloth. Moisten the cloth lightly with water if neces sary. Do not soak the headliner.

Do not use cleansers that contain alcohol or solvents

Do not use cleansers that contain alcohol or solvents, such as lacquer thinners, heavy-duty grease removers, fuel, or such; this could lead to surface damage.

Safety belts Dirty belt straps impede the reeling action and thus have a negative impact on safety.

No chemical cleaning Do not clean chemically; this can destroy

the webbing.

Use only a mild soapy solution, with the safety belts clipped into their buckles. Do not allow the reels to retract the safety belts until they are dry.

Carpets and floor mats No objects in the area around the pedals Keep floor mats, carpets, and any other

objects out of the area of motion of the pedals; otherwise, the function of the pedals could be impeded while driving Do not place additional floor mats over existing mats or other objects. Only use floor mats that have been approved for the vehicle and can be properly fixed in place.

Seite 265

Care Mobility

265 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

Ensure that the floor mats are securely fas tened again when they are returned after being removed, such as for cleaning.

Floor mats can be removed from the passen ger compartment for cleaning. When returning the floor mats, secure them again to prevent slipping. If the floor carpets are very dirty, clean with a microfiber cloth and water or a textile cleaner. To prevent matting of the carpet, rub back and forth in the direction of travel only.

Sensors/cameras To clean sensors or cameras, use a cloth mois tened with a small amount of glass cleaner.

Displays/screens Clean the displays with an anti-static micro fiber cloth.

Cleaning displays Do not use chemical or household

cleansers. Keep all fluids and moisture away from the unit. Otherwise, they could affect or damage surfa ces or electrical components. Avoid pressing too hard when cleaning and do not use abrasive materials; otherwise, damage can result.

Long-term vehicle storage Your service center can advise you on what to consider when storing the vehicle for longer than three months.

Seite 266

Mobility Care

266 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

Seite 267

Care Mobility

267 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

Reference This chapter contains technical data, short

commands for the voice activation system, and an index that will quickly take you to the

information you need.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

Technical data Vehicle equipment This chapter describes all series equipment as well as country-specific and special equipment offered for this model series.Therefore, it also

describes equipment that may not be found in your vehicle, for instance due to the selected special equipment or the country version. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems.

Dimensions

BMW X1

Width without mirrors inches/mm 70.8 / 1,798

Width with mirrors inches/mm 81.0/2,058

Height inches/mm 60.8/1,545

Height with roof antenna inches/mm 62.0/1,573

Length inches/mm 176.5/4,484

Wheelbase inches/mm 108.7/2,760

Opening height of tailgate inches/mm 80.0/2,031

Smallest turning circle dia. ft/m 37/11.3

Smallest turning circle dia. with all-wheel drive

ft/m 38.7/11.8

Weights

BMW X1 X1 sDrive28i X1 xDrive28i X1 xDrive35i

Approved gross vehicle weight

lbs/kg 4,497/2,040 4,707/2,135 4,861/2,205

Load lbs/kg 904/410 904/410 904/410

Approved front axle load lbs/kg 2,116/960 2,326/1,055 2,425/1,100

Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 2,546/1,155 2,590/1,175 2,646/1,200

Seite 270

Reference Technical data

270 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

BMW X1 X1 sDrive28i X1 xDrive28i X1 xDrive35i

Approved roof load ca pacity

lbs/kg 165/75 165/75 165/75

Cargo area capacity cu ft/liter 25.0-56.0/420 1,350

25.0-56.0/420 1,350

25.0-56.0/420- 1,350

Capacities

BMW X1 Notes

Fuel tank Fuel specifications, refer to page 230

US gal/liters Approx. 16.6/63

Seite 271

Technical data Reference

271 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

Short commands for voice activation system Vehicle equipment This chapter describes all series equipment as well as country-specific and special equipment offered for this model series.Therefore, it also describes equipment that may not be found in your vehicle, for instance due to the selected special equipment or the country version. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems.

General information Instructions for voice activation system, refer to page 25.

To have the available spoken instructions read out loud: Voice commands The following short commands apply to vehi cles equipped with a voice activation system. They have no function in vehicles in which only the mobile phone is operated using the voice.

Adjusting Vehicle

Function Command

Opens the main menu. Main menu

Open the options. Options

Open the settings. Settings

Settings on the Control Display. Control display

Open the time and date. Time and date

Open the language and units. Language and units

Open the speed limit. Speed

Open the light. Lighting

Open the door lock. Door locks

Seite 272

Reference Short commands for voice activation system

272 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

Vehicle information Computer

Function Command

Open the computer. Onboard info

Open the trip computer. Trip computer

Vehicle

Function Command

Open the vehicle information. Vehicle info

Open the vehicle status. Vehicle status

Navigation General information

Function Command

Navigation menu. Navigation

Open the destination entry. Enter address

Enter the address. Enter address

Enter the town/city. City

Enter the country. State

Enter the postal code. Postal Code

Open destination guidance. Guidance

Start destination guidance. Start guidance

Terminate destination guidance. Stop guidance

Open the home address. Home address

Open the route criteria. Route preference

Open the route. Route information

Switch on the spoken instruction. Switch on voice instructions

Seite 273

Short commands for voice activation system Reference

273 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

Function Command

Repeat the spoken instruction. Repeat voice instructions

Switch off the spoken instruction. Switch off voice instructions

Display the address book. Address book

Display the most recent destinations. Last destinations

Open the traffic bulletins. Traffic Info

Special destinations. Points of interest

Map

Function Command

Display the map. Map

Map facing north. Map facing north

Map facing the direction of travel. Map in direction of travel

Perspective map. Map perspective view

Automatic scaling of the map. Map with automatic scaling

Scale...feet. Map scale ... feet

Scale...meters. Map scale ... meters e.g., map scale 100 meters

Scale...kilometers. Map scale ... kilometers e.g., map scale 5 kilometers

Scale...miles. Map scale ... miles e.g., map scale 5 miles

Split screen settings

Function Command

Split screen. Switch on splitscreen

Switch off the split screen. Turn off split screen

Adjust the split screen. Split screen content

Split screen, map facing north. Split screen map facing north

Split screen, current position. Split screen current position

Seite 274

Reference Short commands for voice activation system

274 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

Function Command

Split screen, facing the direction of travel. Split screen map in direction of travel

Split screen, perspective. Split screen perspective

Split screen, expanded intersection zoom. Splitscreen Exit ramp view

Split screen scale...feet. Split screen scale ... feet e.g., split screen scale 100 feet

Split screen scale...meters. Split screen scale ... meters e.g., split screen scale 100 meters

Split screen scale...kilometers. Split screen scale ... kilometers e.g., split screen scale 5 kilometers

Split screen scale...miles. Split screen scale ... miles e.g., split screen scale 5 miles

Split screen, highlight the traffic situation. Split screen, Traffic conditions

Split screen, computer. Split screen on board info

Split screen, trip computer. Splitscreen trip computer

Split screen, scale automatically. Split screen automatic scaling

Destination guidance with intermediate destinations

Function Command

Enter a new destination. Enter address

Trip list. Stored trips

Radio FM

Function Command

Open a frequency. Frequency ... megahertz e.g., 93.5 megahertz or frequency 93.5

Open the radio. Radio

Open the FM stations. F M

Seite 275

Short commands for voice activation system Reference

275 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

Function Command

Open the manual search. Manual

Select a frequency range. Select frequency

Open a station. Select station

AM

Function Command

Open a frequency. Frequency ... Kilohertz e.g., fre quency 753 or 753 kilohertz

Open the AM stations. A M

Open the manual search. Manual

Satellite radio

Function Command

Open the satellite radio. Satellite radio

Switch on the satellite radio. Satellite radio on

Select a satellite radio channel. Select satellite radio e.g., satellite radio channel 2

Stored stations

Function Command

Open the stored stations. Presets

Choose a stored station. Select preset

Select a stored station. Preset ... e.g., stored station 2

Seite 276

Reference Short commands for voice activation system

276 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

CD/multimedia CD/DVD drive

Function Command

Select a track. Track ... e.g., track 5 or C D track ... e. g., CD track 5

Play back a CD. C D on

Select a CD. Select C D

Select a CD and track. C D ... track ... e.g., CD 3 track 5

Open the CD and Multimedia menu. C D and multimedia

CD and DVD. C D

Select a DVD. D V D ... e.g., DVD 3

Display the entertainment details on a split screen. Entertainment details

Music collection

Function Command

Search for music, open a menu. Music search

Open the current playback. Current playback

Open the music collection. Music collection

Play back the music collection. Music collection on

Play back the most frequently played tracks. Top fifty

External devices

Function Command

Open the external devices. External devices

Open the Bluetooth devices. Bluetooth

Seite 277

Short commands for voice activation system Reference

277 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

Tone

Function Command

Open the tone settings. Tone

Telephone

Function Command

Dial a phone number. Dial number

Open the Telephone menu. Telephone

Display the phone book. Phonebook

Redialing. Redial

Display received calls. Received calls

List of messages. Messages

Open the Bluetooth devices. Bluetooth

Office

Function Command

Open the Office menu. Office

Display Office Today. Current office

Display the contacts. Contacts

Display the messages. Messages

Display the calendar. Calendar

Display the tasks. Tasks

Display the reminders. Reminders

Seite 278

Reference Short commands for voice activation system

278 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

Contacts

Function Command

Select a name. Choose name

My contacts. My contacts

Open the contacts. Contacts

New contact. New contact

ConnectedDrive or BMW Assist

Function Command

Open BMW Assist. B M W Assist

Open ConnectedDrive. Connected Drive

Open BMW Online. B M W Online

Seite 279

Short commands for voice activation system Reference

279 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

Everything from A to Z Index A ABS, Antilock Brake Sys

tem 97 Accident, refer to Emergency

Request, initiating 257 Acoustic signal, refer to

Check Control 80 Activated charcoal filter with

automatic climate con trol 111

Adaptive brake lights, refer to Brake force display 96

Adaptive Light Control 84 Additional telephone 196 Additives, coolant 246 Additives, engine oil 245 After washing vehicle 264 Airbags 88 Airbags, indicator/warning

light 91 Air circulation, refer to Recir

culated air mode 110 Air conditioning mode Automatic climate con

trol 108 Ventilation 111 Air distribution Automatic 109 Manual 109 Air drying, refer to Cooling

function 110 Air flow rate 110 Airing, refer to Ventila

tion 111 Air pressure, refer to Tire in

flation pressure 232 Air supply Automatic climate con

trol 108 Ventilation 111

Air vents Refer to Ventilation 111 Alarm system 39 Alarm system Avoiding unintentional

alarms 40 Ending an alarm 39 Interior motion sensor 40 Tilt alarm sensor 40 All around the headliner 17 ALL program 110 All-season tires, refer to Win

ter tires 240 All-wheel drive, refer to

xDrive 99 Alternating-code hand-held

transmitter 114 AM/FM station 166 Announcement, navigation,

refer to Spoken instruc tions 155

Antifreeze, coolant 246 Antifreeze, washer fluid 65 Antilock Brake System,

ABS 97 Anti-slip control, refer to Dy

namic Stability Control DSC 97

Anti-theft protection 32 Appointments 214 Approved axle loads, refer to

Weights 270 Approved engine oils 245 Approved gross vehicle

weight, refer to Weights 270

Armrest, refer to Center arm rest 124

Arrival time, refer to Com puter 74

Ashtray 117

Assistance, Roadside Assis tance 258

Assistance with driving off, refer to Drive-off assis tant 100

Assistance with starting en gine, refer to Jump-start ing 258

Audio device, external 124 Audio playback 175 Audio playback, Blue

tooth 187 Automatic Air distribution 109 Air flow rate 109 Automatic car wash 263 Automatic climate control Automatic air distribu

tion 109 Automatic, cruise control 101 Automatic Curb Monitor 49 Automatic Engine Start/Stop

Function 59 Automatic headlamp con

trol 83, 84 Automatic recirculated air

control 110 Automatic transmission with

Steptronic 65, 68 Automatic transmission with Steptronic Interlock 65 Kickdown 66, 68 Overriding selector lever

lock 67 AUTO program with auto

matic climate control 109 AUX-IN port 124, 184 Average fuel consumption 73 Average fuel consumption Setting the units 75 Average speed 73

Seite 280

Reference Everything from A to Z

280 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

Average speed, refer to Com puter 73

Axle loads, refer to Weights 270

B Backrest curvature, refer to

Lumbar support 45 Backrests, refer to Seats 44 Backrest width adjust

ment 46 Back seats Adjusting the backrest

tilt 118 Backup camera 105 Backup camera, obstacle

marking 107 Backup camera, pathway

lines 106 Backup camera, turning

lines 106 Backup lamps, bulb replace

ment 253 Balance 164 Band-aids, refer to First aid

kit 258 Bass 164 Battery Remote control 30 Battery disposal 255 Battery, refer to Vehicle bat

tery 255 Battery replacement, remote

control for vehicle 38 Before entering the car

wash 263 Belts, refer to Safety belts 46 Belt tensioners, refer to

Safety belts 46 Beverage holder, refer to Cu

pholder 125 Black and white map dis

play 158 Blower, refer to Air flow

rate 110 Bluetooth audio 187

Bluetooth connection, acti vating/deactivating 197

BMW Apps 224 BMW EfficientDynamics, re

fer to Saving fuel 137 BMW Homepage 6 BMW Internet page 6 BMW maintenance sys

tem 247 BMW Online 222 Bottle holder, refer to Cu

pholder 125 Brake assistant 97 Brake discs, breaking in 130 Brake fluid, refer to Service

requirements 78 Brake force display 96 Brake force distribution, elec

tronic 97 Brake lamps Bulb replacement 253 Brake lamps, brake force dis

play 96 Brake lights, adaptive 96 Brake pads, breaking in 130 Brakes Handbrake 61 Brakes, BMW maintenance

system 247 Brakes, service require

ments 78 Brake system, BMW mainte

nance system 247 Braking, notes 131 Breakdown assistance 258 Breakdown, transporting the

vehicle 260 Breaking in 130 Brightness on the Control

Display 78 Bulb replacement, refer to

Lamp and bulb replace ment 250

Button for starting the engine, refer to Start/Stop but ton 57

C Calendar 214 California Proposition 65

Warning 7 Camera, care 266 Camera, refer to Backup cam

era 105 Can holder, refer to Cu

pholder 125 Car battery, refer to Vehicle

battery 255 Car care products 264 Care 263 Care, displays 266 Care, vehicle 264 Cargo 134 Cargo area 118 Cargo area Comfort Access 37 Cover 118 Folding up the cargo floor

panel 121 Multi-function hook 121 Partition net 119 Cargo area, capacities 270 Cargo area, enlarging 118 Cargo area lamp, refer to Inte

rior lamps 87 Cargo area lid, refer to Tail

gate 35 Cargo area net, refer to Parti

tion net 119 Cargo area, opening from the

inside 36 Cargo area, opening from the

outside 36 Cargo floor panel Folding up 121 Cargo floor panel, raising 121 Cargo straps, securing

cargo 135 Car key, refer to Integrated

key/remote control 30 Carpet, care 265

Seite 281

Everything from A to Z Reference

281 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

Car phone, installation loca tion, refer to Center arm rest 124

Car phone, refer to Tele phone 196

Car vacuum cleaner, connect ing, refer to Connecting electrical devices 117

Car wash 263 Catalytic converter, refer to

Hot exhaust system 130 CBS Condition Based Serv

ice 247 CD/DVD 174 CD/DVD notes 178 CDs, storing 179 Cell phone 196 Cell phone, installation loca

tion, refer to Center arm rest 124

Center armrest, front 124 Center armrest, rear 124 Center brake lamp, bulb re

placement 254 Center console, refer to

Around the center con sole 16

Central locking Comfort Access 37 From the inside 35 Setting the unlocking char

acteristics 32 Central locking system From the outside 31 Principle 31 Central screen, refer to Con

trol Display 18 Changes, technical, refer to

Safety 6 Changing wheels/tires 239 Check Control 80 Children, transporting 52 Child restraint fixing system

LATCH 53 Child restraint fixing sys

tems 52

Child restraint fixing systems, mounting 52

Child safety locks 55 Child seat, mounting 52 Child seats, refer to Trans

porting children safely 52 Chrome parts, care 265 Cigarette lighter, connecting

electrical devices 117 Cigarette lighter, refer to

Lighter 117 Cigarette lighter socket 117 Circulation of air, refer to Re

circulated air mode 110 Cleaning, displays 266 Cleaning your BMW, refer to

Care 263 Clock 71 Clock 12h/24h format 76 Setting the time and date 76 Closing From the inside 35 From the outside 32 Clothes hooks 125 Cockpit 12 Cold start, refer to Starting

the engine 58 Combination instrument, refer

to Instrument cluster 14 Combination switch, refer to

Turn signal/high beams/ headlamp flasher 62

Combination switch, refer to Washer/wiper system 62

Comfort Access Battery replacement 38 Comfort area, refer to Around

the center console 16 Compact wheel, inflation

pressure 232 Compartment for remote

control, refer to Ignition lock 57

Compartment in floor 121

Compartments, refer to Stor age compart ments 123, 124

Compass, digital 115 Computer 73 Computer, displaying infor

mation 73 Computer, displays on the

Control Display 74 Concierge service 221 Condensation under the vehi

cle 132 Condition Based Service

CBS 247 Confirmation signals for lock

ing/unlocking the vehicle 33 Connecting, mobile phone,

refer to Pairing the mobile phone 197

Consumption, refer to Aver age fuel consumption 73

Contacts 210, 218 Control Display 18 Control Display, care 266 Control Display, settings 77 Controller 19 Controls and displays 12 Control systems, driving sta

bility 97 Convenient operation Glass sunroof 32 Window 32 Coolant 246 Coolant, checking the

level 246 Coolant temperature 72 Cooling function, switching

on and off 110 Cooling, maximum 109 Cooling system, refer to Cool

ant 246 Corrosion on brake discs 132 Courtesy lamps, refer to Inte

rior lamps 87 Cradle for telephone or mo

bile phone, refer to Snap-in adapter 207

Seite 282

Reference Everything from A to Z

282 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

Cruise control 101 Cruise control Malfunction 103 Cupholder 125 Curb weight, refer to

Weights 270 Current fuel consumption 72 Current location, storing 146 Curve lights, refer to Adaptive

Light Control 84

D Dashboard lighting, refer to

Instrument lighting 87 Dashboard, refer to Cock

pit 12 Data, technical 270 Date Date format 77 Setting 76 Daytime running lights 84 Daytime running lights, bulb

replacement 252 Defroster Rear window 111 Destination entry via the ad

dress book 146 Destination guidance 153 Destination guidance with in

termediate destinations 151 Destination input, naviga

tion 144 Digital clock 71 Digital compass 115 Digital radio 167 Dimming mirrors 50 Directional indicators, refer to

Turn signals 62 Display lighting, refer to In

strument lighting 87 Displays and controls 12 Displays, care 266 Displays, cleaning 266 Displays, refer to Instrument

cluster 14 Disposal, coolant 246

Disposal, vehicle battery 255 Distance warning, refer to

Park Distance Control PDC 103

Divided rear seat backrest, re fer to Enlarging the cargo area 118

Divided screen view, split screen 22

Door key, refer to Remote control with integrated key 30

Door lock 34 Doors, manual operation 34 Doors, unlocking and locking Confirmation signals 33 From the inside 35 From the outside 32 DOT Quality Grades 237 Downhill control 99 Draft-free ventilation 111 Drive-off assistant 100 Driving away on inclines, refer

to Drive-off assistant 100 Driving notes, breaking

in 130 Driving notes, general 130 Driving on poor roads 132 Driving stability control sys

tems 97 Driving through water 131 Driving tips, refer to Driving

notes 130 Dry air, refer to Cooling func

tion 110 DSC Dynamic Stability Con

trol 97 DTC Dynamic Traction Con

trol 98 DTMF suffix dialing 202 DVD/CD 174 DVDs, storing 179 DVD, video 176 Dynamic destination guid

ance 160 Dynamic Stability Control

DSC 97

Dynamic Traction Control DTC 98

E ECO PRO 138 ECO PRO display 138 ECO PRO driving mode 138 ECO PRO mode 138 EfficientDynamics, refer to

Saving fuel 137 Electrical malfunction Door lock 34 Driver's door 34 Fuel filler flap 229 Tailgate 36 Electric seat adjustment 45 Electronic brake-force distri

bution 97 Electronic engine oil level

check 243 Electronic Stability Program

ESP, refer to Dynamic Sta bility Control DSC 97

Emergency activation Automatic transmission, re

fer to Overriding selector lever lock 67

Emergency operation Door lock, refer to Manual

operation 34 Emergency operation, fuel

filler flap, unlocking man ually 229

Emergency Request 257 Emergency service, refer to

Roadside Assistance 258 Energy-conscious driving, re

fer to Current fuel consump tion 72

Energy, saving Automatic Engine Start/

Stop Function 59 Energy, saving, refer to Sav

ing fuel 137 Engine, breaking in 130 Engine compartment 242

Seite 283

Everything from A to Z Reference

283 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

Engine coolant, refer to Cool ant 246

Engine oil, adding 245 Engine oil, additives, refer to

Approved engine oils 245 Engine oil, alternative oil

types 245 Engine oil, BMW maintenance

system 247 Engine oil change intervals,

refer to Service require ments 78

Engine oil, checking the level 243

Engine oil, filling ca pacity 271

Engine oil temperature 72 Engine oil types, alterna

tive 245 Engine oil types, ap

proved 245 Engine, overheating, refer to

Coolant temperature 72 Engine start, assistance 258 Engine, starting 58 Engine, starting Comfort Access 37 Engine, starting, Start/Stop

button 57 Engine, stopping, Start/Stop

button 57 Engine, switching off 59 Environmentally friendly driv

ing, refer to Current fuel consumption 72

Equalizer 164 Equipment, interior 113 ESP Electronic Stability Pro

gram, refer to Dynamic Sta bility Control DSC 97

Exchanging wheels/tires 239 Exhaust system 130 Exterior mirrors 49 Exterior mirrors, adjusting 49 Exterior mirrors, automatic

dimming 50

Exterior mirrors, automatic heating 50

Exterior mirrors, folding in and out 50

External audio device 124 External devices 184 External temperature dis

play 71 External temperature display Changing the unit of meas

ure 75 On computer 75 External temperature warn

ing 71 Externel temperature dis

play 71 Eyes for securing cargo 135

F Fader 164 Failure messages, refer to

Check Control 80 False alarm Avoiding unintentional

alarms 40 Ending an alarm 39 Fastening safety belts, refer

to Safety belts 46 Fault messages, refer to

Check Control 80 Filling capacities 271 Filter Refer to Microfilter/acti

vated-charcoal filter with automatic climate con trol 111

Fine wood, care 265 First aid kit 258 Fitting for towing 262 Flashing when locking/

unlocking 33 Flat Tire Monitor FTM 91 Flat Tire Monitor FTM, snow

chains 241 Flat tire, run-flat tires 240

Flat tire, Tire Pressure Moni tor TPM 93

Flat tire, warning lamp 92, 94 Flat tire, wheel change 254 Flooding, refer to Driving

through water 131 Floor carpet, care 265 Floor mats, care 265 FM/AM station 166 Fog lamps 86 Fog lamps, indicator lamp 86 Foldable rear seat back

rest 118 Foot brake 131 Footwell lamps, refer to Inte

rior lamps 87 For your own safety 6 Four-wheel drive, refer to

xDrive 99 Front airbags 88 Front fog lamps 86 FTM Flat Tire Monitor 91 Fuel 230 Fuel Refer to Average fuel con

sumption 73 Fuel, additives 230 Fuel, average consump

tion 73 Fuel cap 228 Fuel cap, closing 228 Fuel consumption display Average fuel consump

tion 73 Fuel consumption display,

current fuel consump tion 72

Fuel-efficient driving, refer to Current fuel consump tion 72

Fuel filler flap, closing 228 Fuel filler flap, opening 228 Fuel filler flap, unlocking in

case of an electrical mal function 229

Fuel gauge 72 Fuel, saving 137

Seite 284

Reference Everything from A to Z

284 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

Fuel tank capacity, refer to Filling capacities 271

Fuel tank contents, refer to Filling capacities 271

Fuel tank, refer to Filling ca pacities 271

Fuse 256

G Garage door opener, refer to

Universal Garage Door Opener 113

Gasoline 230 Gasoline gauge, refer to Fuel

gauge 72 Gasoline quality 230 Gas station recommenda

tion 155 Gear change Automatic transmission with

Steptronic 66 Gear change, automatic

transmission with Step tronic 69

Gear change, via shift pad dles 69

Gear display, automatic trans mission with Steptronic 65

General driving notes 130 Glass sunroof, electric Convenient operation 32 Remote control 32 Glass sunroof, refer to Panor

amic glass sunroof 41 Glove compartment 123 Glove compartment, light

ing 123 GPS navigation, refer to Navi

gation system 142 Gross vehicle weight, refer to

Weights 270

H Halogen headlamps Bulb replacement 251

Hand-held transmitter, alter nating code 114

Hands-free microphone 16 Hazard warning sys

tem 16, 257 HDC Hill Descent Control 99 HD Radio 167 Head airbags 88 Headlamp control, auto

matic 83, 84 Headlamp courtesy delay fea

ture 84 Headlamp cover, remov

ing 251 Headlamp flasher 62, 85 Headlamp flasher, indicator

lamp 15 Headlamps 83 Headlamps Bulb replacement 251 Headlamps, care 264 Headlamps, cleaning 64 Headlamps, cleaning, washer

fluid 65 Headliner 17 Head restraints 47 Head restraints Adjusting the height 47 Removing 48 Heating Rear window 111 Seats 46 Heating, mirrors 50 Heavy cargo, refer to Stowing

cargo 135 Height adjustment Seats 44 Height, refer to Dimen

sions 270 High-beam Assistant 85 High beams 85 High beams Bulb replacement 251 High beams/low beams, auto

matic, refer to High-beam Assistant 85

High beams, indicator lamp 15

High-pressure washers 263 Hill Descent Control HDC 99 Hill drive-off assistant, refer to

Drive-off assistant 100 Hills 132 Holder for beverages 125 Holder for remote control, re

fer to Ignition lock 57 Homepage 6 Hood 242 Hood, opening 242 Horn 12 Hot exhaust system 130 Hotline 223 House number, entering for

navigation 145 Hydraulic brake assistant 97 Hydroplaning 131

I Ice warning, refer to External

temperature warning 71 Icy roads, refer to External

temperature warning 71 Identification marks, tires 237 Identification number, refer to

Engine compartment 242 iDrive 18 iDrive Changing settings 77 Changing the date and

time 76 Changing the language 77 Changing the units of meas

ure and display format 75 Setting the brightness 78 Ignition 58 Ignition key position 1, refer

to Radio ready state 57 Ignition key position 2, refer

to Ignition on 58 Ignition key, refer to Remote

control with integrated key 30

Seite 285

Everything from A to Z Reference

285 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

Ignition lock 57 Ignition, switched off 58 Ignition, switched on 58 Indication of a flat tire 92, 94 Indicator and warning

lamps 15 Inflation pressure monitor, re

fer to Flat Tire Monitor 91 Inflation pressure, refer to

Tire inflation pressure 232 Information on the navigation

data 142 Initialization after power fail

ure 255 Initializing Compass, refer to Calibrat

ing 116 Panoramic glass sunroof 43 Refer to Setting the time

and date 76 Initializing, Flat Tire Monitor

FTM 91 Initializing, Tire Pressure

Monitor TPM 94 Inside brake lamps Bulb replacement 254 Installation location, tele

phone 124 Instrument cluster 14 Instrument lighting 87 Instrument panel, refer to In

strument cluster 14 Instruments, refer to Cock

pit 12 Integrated key 30 Interactive map 149 Interior equipment 113 Interior lamps 87 Interior lamps Remote control 33 Interior mirror 50 Interior rearview mirror, auto

matic dimming 50 Interior rearview mirror, com

pass 115

Interior temperature, setting Automatic climate con

trol 108 Interlock, refer to Disengag

ing the remote control 65 Intermediate destina

tions 151 Internet page 6 Intersection, entering for navi

gation 145 iPod/iPhone 185

J Jacking points for the vehicle

jack 255 Jack, refer to Vehicle

jack 255 Joystick, refer to Selector

lever 68 Jump-starting 258

K Keyless Go, refer to Comfort

Access 37 Keyless opening and closing,

refer to Comfort Access 37 Key Memory, refer to Per

sonal Profile 30 Key, refer to Integrated key/

remote control 30 Kickdown Automatic transmission with

Steptronic 66, 68 Knee airbag 88 Knocking control 230

L Label, run-flat tire 240 Lamp and bulb replacement,

lamp replacement 250 Lamps 83 Lamps, automatic headlamp

control 83, 84

Lamps, High-beam Assis tant 85

Lamps, parking lamps/low beams 83

Lamps, replacing, refer to Lamp and bulb replace ment 250

Language, changing on the Control Display 77

Lap-and-shoulder belt, refer to Safety belts 46

Lashing eyes, securing cargo 135

LATCH child restraint fixing system 53

Leather, care 264 LEDs, light-emitting di

odes 250 Length, refer to Dimen

sions 270 Letters and numbers, enter

ing 23 License plate lamp, bulb re

placement 254 Light-alloy wheels, care 265 Light-emitting diodes,

LEDs 250 Lighter 117 Lighting Instruments 87 Lamp and bulb replace

ment 250 Lighting, vehicle, refer to

Lamps 83 Light switch 83 Limit, refer to Speed limit 81 Load 135 Loading 134 Lock buttons, doors, refer to

Locking 35 Locking From the inside 35 From the outside 32 Setting the confirmation

signals 33 Without remote control, re

fer to Comfort Access 37

Seite 286

Reference Everything from A to Z

286 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

Locking the vehicle From the inside 35 From the outside 32 Locks, doors, and win

dows 55 Longlife oils, alternative oil

types 245 Longlife oils, refer to Ap

proved engine oils 245 Low beams 83 Low beams Automatic 84 Bulb replacement 251 Low beams, automatic 83 Low beams, automatic, refer

to High-beam Assistant 85 Lower back support, refer to

Lumbar support 45 Luggage rack Rear luggage rack 136 Luggage rack, refer to Roof-

mounted luggage rack 136 Lumbar support 45

M Main inspection, refer to

Service requirements 78 Maintenance 247 Maintenance, refer to Service

booklet Maintenance, refer to Service

requirements 78 Maintenance require

ments 247 Maintenance system

BMW 247 Malfunction Automatic transmission with

Steptronic 67 Door lock 34 Fuel filler flap 229 Tailgate 36 Malfunction warnings, refer to

Check Control 80 Manual air distribution 109

Manual mode, automatic transmission with Step tronic 66, 69

Manual operation Door lock 34 Driver's door 34 Selector lever lock, auto

matic transmission 67 Manual operation, fuel filler

flap 229 Map, destination entry 149 Map display in black and

white 158 Map in split screen 157 Map view 155 Marking on approved

tires 240 Master key, refer to Remote

control with integrated key 30

Maximum cooling 109 Maximum speed, winter

tires 240 Medical kit, refer to First aid

kit 258 Memory, refer to Seat and

mirror memory 48 Menus, operating, iDrive 18 Menus, refer to iDrive operat

ing concept 19 Message list, traffic bulle

tins 157 Messages 212 Microfilter With automatic climate con

trol 111 Minimum tread, tires 238 Mirror Mirror memory, refer to Seat

and mirror memory 48 Mirrors 49 Mirrors Automatic Curb Monitor 49 Mirrors, folding in and out 50 Mirrors, heating 50 Mirrors, interior mirror 50

Mobile communication devi ces in the vehicle 131

Mobile phone, installation lo cation, refer to Center arm rest 124

Mobile phone, refer to Tele phone 196

Modifications, technical, refer to Safety 6

Monitor, refer to Control Dis play 18

Mounting of child restraint fix ing systems 52

MP3 player 184 Multimedia 174 Music collection 179 Music search 181 Music, storing 179

N Navigation 142 Navigation data 142 Navigation data, updat

ing 142 Navigation system Destination entry by

voice 150 Neck restraints, refer to Head

restraints 47 Nets, refer to Storage com

partments 124 Neutral cleaner, care 265 New wheels and tires 239 Notes 6, 215 Nozzles, refer to Ventila

tion 111

O OBD Onboard Diagnos

tics 248 OBD socket, refer to Socket

for OBD Onboard Diagno sis 248

Octane number, refer to Fuel quality 230

Seite 287

Everything from A to Z Reference

287 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

Octane rating, refer to Gaso line quality 230

Odometer 71 Office 209 Oil additives 245 Oil consumption 243 Oil level 243 Oil, refer to Engine oil 243 Oil types, alternative 245 Oil types, approved 245 Old batteries, disposal 255 Onboard Diagnostics

OBD 248 Onboard monitor, refer to

Control Display 18 Onboard vehicle tool kit 249 Opening and closing Comfort Access 37 From the inside 35 From the outside 32 Using the door lock 34 Using the remote control 32 Operating concept, iDrive 18 Outside-air mode Automatic climate con

trol 110 Outside air, refer to Recircu

lated air mode 110 Overheating of engine, refer

to Coolant temperature 72

P Paint, vehicle 264 Pairing, mobile phone 197 Panic mode 33 Panoramic glass sunroof Convenient operation 32 Initializing 43 Opening, closing 42 Pinch protection 42 Power failure 43 Remote control 32 Tilting 42 Park Distance Control

PDC 103 Parked-car ventilation 111

Parked vehicle, condensa tion 132

Parking aid, refer to Park Dis tance Control PDC 103

Parking assistant, refer to Park Distance Control PDC 103

Parking brake, refer to Hand brake 61

Parking lamps 83 Parking lamps/low beams 83 Parking lamps, bulb replace

ment 252 Passenger airbags, deactivat

ing 89 Passenger side mirror, tilt

ing 49 PDC Park Distance Con

trol 103 Performance Control 99 Personal information 209 Personal Profile 30 Pinch protection Panoramic glass sunroof 42 Windows 41 Plastic, care 265 Pollen Refer to Microfilter/acti

vated-charcoal filter with automatic climate con trol 111

Poor road operation 132 Position, storing 146 Postal code, entering in navi

gation 145 Power windows Safety switch 41 Power windows, opening and

closing 40 Power windows, refer to Win

dows 40 Prescribed engine oils, refer

to Approved engine oils 245 Pressure, tires 232 Pressure warning, tires 91 Profile depth, refer to Mini

mum tread depth 238

Profile, tires 238 Programmable memory but

tons, iDrive 22 Protection function, refer to Pinch protection Panoramic glass sunroof 42 Protective function, refer to Pinch protection Windows 41 Push-and-turn switch, refer to

Controller 19

R Radiator fluid, refer to Cool

ant 246 Radio-operated key, refer to

Remote control with integrated key 30

Radio ready state 57 Radio ready state, switched

off 58 Radio ready state, switched

on 57 Radio setting, refer to Radio

ready state 57 Rain sensor 63 Random 175 Random playback 175 Range 73 RDS 167 Reading lamps 87 Reading out loud 216 Rear lamps, refer to Tail

lamps 253 Rear seat backrest Foldable 118 Rear seats Adjusting the backrest

tilt 118 Adjusting the head re

straints 48 Folding down 118 Folding down the back

rests 118 Rear socket 117 Rearview camera, clean

ing 107

Seite 288

Reference Everything from A to Z

288 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

Rearview mirror, refer to Mir rors 49

Rear window defroster 111 Rear window, washing 64 Rear window wiper 64 Recirculated air mode 110 Recommended tire

brands 240 Redialing 203 Refueling 228 Remaining distance to desti

nation, refer to Com puter 74

Remaining range for service, refer to Service require ments 78

Remaining range, refer to Range 73

Reminders 216 Remote app 225 Remote control Battery replacement 38 Comfort Access 37 Garage door opener 113 Malfunction 33, 38 Tailgate 33 Universal 113 Remote control, removing

from the ignition lock 57 Remote control, service

data 247 Remote inquiry 202 Remote Services 225 Replacement fuse 256 Replacement remote con

trol 30 Replacing wheels/tires 239 Reporting safety defects 9 Reserve warning, refer to Fuel

gauge 72 Reservoir for washer fluid, re

fer to Washer fluid reser voir 65

Resetting, Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 94

Restraining systems Refer to Safety belts 46

Restraint systems for chil dren 52

Retaining straps, securing cargo 135

Retreaded tires 240 Reverse gear Automatic transmission with

Steptronic 66 Rim cleaner, care 265 Road, avoiding 153 Road detour 153 Roadside Assistance 221 Roadside parking lamp Bulb replacement 252 Roadside parking lamps 85 RON gasoline quality 230 RON, refer to Fuel qual

ity 230 Roof load capacity 270 Roof-mounted luggage

rack 136 Rope, refer to Towing 261 Route 154 Route criteria, route 153 Route, displaying 154 Route section, bypass

ing 154 RSC Runflat System Compo

nent, refer to Run-flat tires 240

Rubber components, care 265

Run-flat tires 240 Run-flat tires, tire inflation

pressure 232 Running lights, refer to Park

ing lamps/low beams 83

S Safe braking 131 Safety 6 Safety belts 46 Safety belts Damage 47 Safety belts, care 265

Safety belts, indicator/warn ing lamp 47

Safety belts, reminder 47 Safety switch for rear win

dows 41 Safety systems Safety belts 46 Safety systems, airbags 88 Safety tires, refer to Run-flat

tires 240 Satellite radio 168 Saving fuel 137 Scale, changing during navi

gation 156 Screen, refer to Control Dis

play 18 Search, refer to BMW On

line 222 Seat adjustment Manual 44 Seat adjustment, electric 45 Seat and mirror memory 48 Seat belts Refer to Safety belts 46 Seat heating 46 Seats Adjusting 44 Adjusting electrically 45 Heating 46 Memory, refer to Seat and

mirror memory 48 Sitting safely 44 Storing the setting, refer to

Seat and mirror memory 48 Selector lever, automatic

transmission with Step tronic 66, 68

Selector lever lock, overrid ing 67

Selector lever lock, refer to Changing selector lever po sitions, Shiftlock 66

Selector lever lock, releas ing 68

Selector lever positions, auto matic transmission with Steptronic 66

Seite 289

Everything from A to Z Reference

289 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

Sensors, care 266 Service and warranty 7 Service data in the remote

control 247 Service interval display, refer

to Condition Based Service CBS 247

Service interval display, refer to Service requirements 78

Service requirements 78 Service requirements, CBS

Condition Based Serv ice 247

Service, Roadside Assis tance 258

Services, remote 225 Servotronic 100 Settings Changing on the Control

Display 77 Language 77 Settings and information 74 Settings, configuring, refer to

Personal Profile 30 Settings, DVD 177 Setting the clock, 12h/24h

format 76 Shifting Automatic transmission with

Steptronic 66 Shifting, automatic transmis

sion with Steptronic 69 Shift lever Automatic transmission with

Steptronic 66 Shift paddles 69 Shift paddles on the steering

wheel 67 Short commands, voice acti

vation 272 Side airbags 88 Side windows, refer to Win

dows 40 Size, refer to Dimensions 270 Ski bag, refer to Ski and

snowboard bag 122

Slide/tilt glass roof, refer to Panoramic glass sunroof 41

Slot for remote control 57 Smokers' package, refer to

Ashtray 117 Snap-in adapter, mobile

phone 207 Snap-in adapter, refer to

Storage compartment of center armrest 124

Snow chains 241 Socket, OBD Onboard Diag

nosis 248 Socket, refer to Connecting

electrical devices 117 Software applications,

iPhone 224 Software part number 196 Software update 191 SOS, refer to Emergency Re

quest, initiating 257 Sound output 166, 174 Spare fuse 256 Special destinations, naviga

tion 147 Special equipment, series

equipment 6 Speed, average 73 Speed limit 81 Speed limit, setting 82 Speedometer 14 Speed, with winter tires 240 Split screen 22 Split screen map set

tings 157 Spoken instructions, naviga

tion 155 Sport program, automatic

transmission with Step tronic 66, 69

Spray nozzles, refer to Clean ing the windshield and head lamps 64

Spray nozzles, refer to Wind shield washer nozzles 64

Stability control systems 97

Start/Stop button 57 Start/Stop button, starting the

engine 58 Start/Stop button, switching

off the engine 59 Starting the engine 58 Start problems, refer to

Jump-starting 258 State/province, selecting for

navigation 144 Stations, stored 172 Station, storing 166 Status information, iDrive 21 Status of Owner's Manual 6 Steam jets 263 Steering wheel 51 Steering wheel Shift paddles 67 Steering wheel, adjusting 51 Steering wheel lock 57 Steptronic, refer to Automatic

transmission with Step tronic 65

Steptronic, refer to Sport pro gram and manual mode M/ S 69

Stopping, engine 59 Storage compartment

nets 124 Storage compart

ments 123, 124 Storage, tires 240 Storing the seat position, re

fer to Seat and mirror mem ory 48

Storing the vehicle 266 Street, entering for naviga

tion 145 Summer tires, refer to Wheels

and tires 232 Summer tires, tread 238 Switches, refer to Cockpit 12 Switching off, engine 59 Switching off, vehicle 59 Switch-on times, parked-car

ventilation 112 Symbols 6

Seite 290

Reference Everything from A to Z

290 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

T Tachometer 72 Tailgate Comfort Access 37 Emergency operation, refer

to Opening manually 36 Opening from the inside 36 Opening from the out

side 36 Opening manually 36 Remote control 33 Tail lamp, bulb replace

ment 254 Tail lamps 253 Tail lamps Bulb replacement 253, 254 Tank gauge, refer to Fuel

gauge 72 Tasks 215 Technical changes, refer to

Safety 6 Technical data 270 Telephone 196 Telephone, adjusting the vol

ume 200 Telephone, installation loca

tion, refer to Center arm rest 124

TeleService 221 Temperature Automatic climate con

trol 109 Changing the unit of meas

ure 75 Temperature, coolant, refer to

Coolant temperature 72 Temperature display External temperature 71 External temperature warn

ing 71 Setting the unit 75 Temperature, engine oil 72 Temperature warning 71 Text messages 212 Theft alarm system, refer to

Alarm system 39 Thigh support adjustment 45

Third brake lamp, refer to Center brake lamp 254

Tilting the passenger side mirror 49

Time Setting the time 75 Setting the time zone 76 Tire age 237 Tire identification marks 237 Tire inflation pressure 232 Tire inflation pressure, check

ing 232 Tire pressure monitor, refer to

Flat Tire Monitor 91 Tire Pressure Monitor

TPM 93 Tire Quality Grading 237 Tires Inflation pressure 232 Tires, breaking in 130 Tires, changing 239 Tires, condition 238 Tires, damage 239 Tire size 237 Tires, minimum tread 238 Tires, retreaded tires 240 Tires, run-flat tires 240 Tires, storage 240 Tire tread 238 Toll roads, route 153 Tone 164 Tool kit, refer to Onboard ve

hicle tool kit 249 Tools, refer to Onboard vehi

cle tool kit 249 Tow bar 261 Tow fitting 262 Towing 260 Towing another vehicle 260 Towing, being towed 260 Towing with automatic trans

mission 260 Town/city, navigation 145 Tow rope 261 Tow-starting 260, 262 TPM Tire Pressure Moni

tor 93

Traction control 98 Traffic bulletins, naviga

tion 157 Transmission Automatic transmission with

Steptronic 65 Overriding selector lever

lock in case of automatic transmission with Step tronic 67

Transmission, automatic transmission with Step tronic 68

Transmission lock Refer to Changing selector

lever positions 66 Refer to P Park 66 Transmission positions, auto

matic transmission with Steptronic 68

Transporting children safely 52

Treble, tone 164 Trip computer, refer to Dis

plays on the Control Dis play 74

Trip-distance counter, refer to Trip odometer 71

Triple turn signal activa tion 62

Trip odometer 71 Trips, planning 151 Trunk, refer to Cargo

area 118 Turning circle, refer to Dimen

sions 270 Turning lamps, refer to Adap

tive Light Control 84 Turn signal Indicator/warning lamp 14 Turn signals 62 Turn signals Bulb replacement 253 Bulb replacement, front 253 Turn signals, triple turn signal

activation 62

Seite 291

Everything from A to Z Reference

291 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

U Uniform Tire Quality Grading/

UTQG 237 Unintentional alarms, avoid

ing 40 Units Average fuel consump

tion 75 Temperature 75 Units of measure, changing

on Control Display 75 Universal Garage Door

Opener 113 Universal remote control 113 Unlocking From the outside 32 Setting the unlocking char

acteristics 32 Tailgate 37 Without remote control, re

fer to Comfort Access 37 Unlocking, from the inside 35 Unlocking, hood 242 Updates made after the edito

rial deadline 6 Update, software 191 Upholstery care 264 USB audio interface 185 USB interface 123

V Vacuum cleaner, connecting,

refer to Connecting electri cal devices 117

Vehicle Identification number 196 Vehicle battery, chang

ing 255 Vehicle, breaking in 130 Vehicle care 264 Vehicle care, refer to

Care 263 Vehicle equipment 6 Vehicle identification number,

refer to Identification num

ber in the engine compart ment 242

Vehicle jack 255 Vehicle paint 264 Vehicle storage 266 Vehicle, switching off 59 Vehicle wash 263 Ventilation Draft-free 111 Ventilation, refer to Parked-

car ventilation 111 Version of the navigation

data 142 Video playback 176 Voice activation Navigation 150 Voice activation, mobile

phone 205 Voice activation, short com

mands 272 Voice activation system 25 Volume, setting 164

W Warning and indicator

lamps 15 Warning messages, refer to

Check Control 80 Warning signal volumes 165 Warning triangle 258 Washer/wiper system 62 Washer/wiper system, rain

sensor 63 Washer/wiper system, washer

fluid 65 Washer/wiper system, wind

shield washer nozzles 64 Washer fluid 65 Washer fluid reservoir 65 Washing, vehicle 263 Waste tray, refer to Ash

tray 117 Water on roads, refer to Driv

ing through water 131 Weights 270 Welcome lamps 83

Wheelbase, refer to Dimen sions 270

Wheel change 254 Wheels and tires 232 Wheels, changing 239 Wheels, Flat Tire Monitor

FTM 91 Wheels, Tire Pressure Moni

tor TPM 93 Width, refer to Dimen

sions 270 Window, Convenient opera

tion 32 Windows Safety switch 41 Windows, defrosting and de fogging Automatic climate con

trol 110 Windows, pinch protec

tion 41 Windshield, cleaning 64 Windshield, defrosting, refer

to Defrosting windows 110 Windshield wash 62 Windshield washer fluid 65 Windshield wash, rear win

dow 64 Windshield wash, reservoir for

washer fluid 65 Windshield wash, washer

fluid 65 Windshield wash, washer

nozzles 64 Windshield wiper blades,

changing 249 Windshield wiper, refer to

Washer/wiper system 62 Winter storage, care 266 Winter tires, setting the speed

limit 82 Winter tires, suitable

tires 240 Winter tires, tread 238 Wiper blades, changing 249 Wiper fluid 65 Wood, care 265

Seite 292

Reference Everything from A to Z

292 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

Word match concept, naviga tion 23

Working in the engine com partment 242

Wrench/screwdriver, refer to Onboard vehicle tool kit 249

X xDrive 99 Xenon headlamps Bulb replacement 252

Y Your individual vehicle Settings, refer to Personal

Profile 30

Seite 293

Everything from A to Z Reference

293 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

More about BMW

bmwusa.com The Ultimate Driving

Machine

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 269 - VI/13

01 40

2 92

6 01

3 u

e

*BL29

Manualsnet FAQs

If you want to find out how the X1 Series BMW works, you can view and download the BMW X1 xDrive28i X1 Series 2013 Owner's Manual on the Manualsnet website.

Yes, we have the Owner's Manual for BMW X1 Series as well as other BMW manuals. All you need to do is to use our search bar and find the user manual that you are looking for.

The Owner's Manual should include all the details that are needed to use a BMW X1 Series. Full manuals and user guide PDFs can be downloaded from Manualsnet.com.

The best way to navigate the BMW X1 xDrive28i X1 Series 2013 Owner's Manual is by checking the Table of Contents at the top of the page where available. This allows you to navigate a manual by jumping to the section you are looking for.

This BMW X1 xDrive28i X1 Series 2013 Owner's Manual consists of sections like Table of Contents, to name a few. For easier navigation, use the Table of Contents in the upper left corner.

You can download BMW X1 xDrive28i X1 Series 2013 Owner's Manual free of charge simply by clicking the “download” button in the upper right corner of any manuals page. This feature allows you to download any manual in a couple of seconds and is generally in PDF format. You can also save a manual for later by adding it to your saved documents in the user profile.

To be able to print BMW X1 xDrive28i X1 Series 2013 Owner's Manual, simply download the document to your computer. Once downloaded, open the PDF file and print the BMW X1 xDrive28i X1 Series 2013 Owner's Manual as you would any other document. This can usually be achieved by clicking on “File” and then “Print” from the menu bar.